LXE MX2A137REFGD Laptop User Manual

LXE MX2A137REFGD Laptop User Manual
MX5X Reference Guide
(Microsoft® Windows® CE .NET 4.2 / CE 5.0 Equipped)
IMPORTANT NOTICE - The LXE MX5 CE .NET computers are obsolete. This electronic
manual has been made available as a courtesy to our customers. Please contact your LXE
customer support representative for replacement and assistance.
Copyright © 2010 by LXE Inc.
All Rights Reserved
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Notices
LXE Inc. reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the products described in this document at any time without
notice. While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy, LXE assumes no
liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information contained herein. Further,
LXE Incorporated, reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes to it from time to time without any obligation
to notify any person or organization of such revision or changes.
Copyright:
This document is copyrighted. All rights are reserved. This document may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied,
reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent, in writing, from
LXE Inc.
Copyright © 2008 by LXE Inc. An EMS Technologies Company.
125 Technology Parkway, Norcross, GA 30092 U.S.A. (770) 447-4224
Trademarks:
LXE® and Spire® are registered trademarks of LXE Inc. RFTerm® is a registered trademark of EMS Technologies, Norcross,
GA.
Summit Data Communications, Inc. Summit Data Communications, the Summit logo, and “The Pinnacle of Performance” are
trademarks of Summit Data Communications, Inc.
Microsoft®, ActiveSync®, MSN, Outlook®, Windows®, the Windows logo, and Windows Media are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Java® and Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. or
other countries, and are used under license.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by LXE, Inc. is under
license.
PowerScan is a registered trademark of Datalogic Scanning, Inc., located in Eugene, OR.
Wavelink®, the Wavelink logo and tagline, Wavelink Studio™, Avalanche Management Console™, Mobile Manager™, and
Mobile Manager Enterprise™ are trademarks of Wavelink Corporation, Kirkland.
RAM® and RAM Mount™ are both trademarks of National Products Inc., 1205 S. Orr Street, Seattle, WA 98108.
All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
When this manual is in PDF format: “Acrobat® Reader® Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Adobe®, the Adobe logo, Acrobat®, and the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.” applies.
Initial Release, Dec 2004
Note:
The original equipment’s User Manuals are copyrighted by Itronix® Corporation. This manual has been
amended by LXE® Inc., for the MX5X and MX5 Cradles with permission from Itronix Corporation.
Inspect enclosure for signs of deterioration such as cracking, warping, swelling or softening. Do not use
in Hazardous (Classified) Locations if there are any signs of deterioration.
Important: This symbol is placed on the product to remind users to dispose of Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE) appropriately, per Directive 2002-96-EC. In most areas, this product can
be recycled, reclaimed and re-used when properly discarded. Do not discard labeled units with trash.
For information about proper disposal, contact LXE through your local sales representative, or visit
www lxe com.
Revision Notice
Chapter 3 – System
Configuration
Revised Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration.
Added eXpress Scan section.
Removed Windows CE .NET 4.2 specific information and placed it in
Appendix C – MX5X CE .NET 4.2.
Chapter 4 – Scanner
Added Length Based Barcode Stripping.
Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration
Added note to Profile Tab parameter Radio Mode.
Appendix C – MX5X CE
.NET 4.2
New. Contains Windows CE .NET 4.2 specific information from Chapter 3
– System Configuration and Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration.
Appendix D – Reference
Material
Changed from Appendix C to D.
Removed Cisco and Symbol radio sections and placed them in Appendix C
– MX5X CE .NET 4.2 section titled Wireless Network Configuration (CE
.NET 4.2).
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Important Battery Information .............................................................................................................. 2
Li-Ion Battery........................................................................................................................................ 2
When to Use This Guide........................................................................................................................ 2
Document Conventions......................................................................................................................... 3
Identify Your Device .............................................................................................................................. 4
MX5X Features ....................................................................................................................................... 5
Upgrading an MX5X to CE 5.0 .............................................................................................................. 6
MX5X Hazardous Location Device ....................................................................................................... 7
Getting Started ....................................................................................................................................... 8
Windows CE .NET 4.2.......................................................................................................................... 8
Windows CE 5.0 ................................................................................................................................... 8
Troubleshooting Start-up ...................................................................................................................... 9
Setup the Client and Network............................................................................................................... 9
Access Terminal Emulation Parameters ........................................................................................... 10
Saving Settings .................................................................................................................................... 10
Components ......................................................................................................................................... 11
Power Key............................................................................................................................................. 14
Assembly .............................................................................................................................................. 15
Insert Main Battery ............................................................................................................................. 15
About Lithium-Ion Batteries ............................................................................................................ 15
Connect External Power Supply (Optional)........................................................................................ 16
Install Pistol Grip Handle (Optional) .................................................................................................. 17
Install Handstrap ................................................................................................................................. 18
How To .................................................................................................................................................. 20
Tap the Touchscreen with a Stylus ..................................................................................................... 20
Keypad Shortcuts.............................................................................................................................. 20
Calibrate the Touchscreen................................................................................................................... 20
Set Time Zone (Optional) ................................................................................................................... 21
Enter Owner Information (Optional) .................................................................................................. 21
Set the Display and Keypad Backlight Timers ................................................................................... 21
Set the MX5X Power Schemes Timers............................................................................................... 22
Toggle the Display and Keypad Backlight On and Off ...................................................................... 22
Increase or Decrease Keypad and Display Backlight Intensity .......................................................... 22
Connect Audio Jack (Optional)........................................................................................................... 22
Set The Audio Speaker Volume.......................................................................................................... 23
Troubleshooting Volume Adjust ...................................................................................................... 23
Enter the Multi AppLock Activation Key........................................................................................... 24
Using a Stylus Tap............................................................................................................................ 24
Using the Switch Key Sequence....................................................................................................... 24
Copy the MX5X LXEbook to the MX5X (Optional) ......................................................................... 25
Enter Data ............................................................................................................................................. 26
Keypad Entry ...................................................................................................................................... 26
Stylus Data Entry ................................................................................................................................ 26
Scanner Entry ...................................................................................................................................... 27
Data Entry and Tethered Scanners ................................................................................................... 27
Input Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 28
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
ii
Table of Contents
RS-232 Data Entry .............................................................................................................................. 28
Getting Help.......................................................................................................................................... 29
Manuals............................................................................................................................................... 29
Accessories.......................................................................................................................................... 30
MX5X Standard................................................................................................................................ 30
MX5X ISAFE Device ...................................................................................................................... 31
CHAPTER 2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AND LAYOUT
33
Hardware Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 33
System Hardware ................................................................................................................................ 33
Central Processing Unit....................................................................................................................... 33
Core Logic........................................................................................................................................... 33
System Memory .................................................................................................................................. 34
Video Subsystem................................................................................................................................. 34
Power Supply ...................................................................................................................................... 34
COM Ports .......................................................................................................................................... 35
Audio Interface ................................................................................................................................... 35
Power Key............................................................................................................................................. 36
Reboot Sequence................................................................................................................................. 36
Warm Reset......................................................................................................................................... 36
Cold Reset ........................................................................................................................................... 36
PCMCIA and Flash Cards.................................................................................................................... 37
Installation / Removal ......................................................................................................................... 38
PCMCIA Cards ................................................................................................................................ 38
Flash Cards ....................................................................................................................................... 38
Accessing the Data on CF and PCMCIA Cards.................................................................................. 39
ATA CF Card ................................................................................................................................... 39
Hatch CF Card.................................................................................................................................. 39
Hatch PCMCIA Card ....................................................................................................................... 39
COM Ports ............................................................................................................................................ 40
USB Port ............................................................................................................................................. 40
Integrated Scanner Port (Optional) ..................................................................................................... 41
Tethered Scanners (Optional) ............................................................................................................. 41
Data Entry and Tethered Scanners ................................................................................................... 42
RS-232 Serial Ports ............................................................................................................................. 42
COM1 ............................................................................................................................................... 42
COM4 ............................................................................................................................................... 42
USB Port ............................................................................................................................................. 43
IR Port ................................................................................................................................................. 43
Programmable Buttons ....................................................................................................................... 44
Power Modes........................................................................................................................................ 45
On Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 45
The Display ...................................................................................................................................... 45
The MX5X........................................................................................................................................ 45
LED Indicators ................................................................................................................................. 46
Suspend Mode..................................................................................................................................... 46
The MX5X........................................................................................................................................ 46
Off Mode............................................................................................................................................. 46
The Keypad........................................................................................................................................... 47
Scan Key Function .............................................................................................................................. 47
Enter Key Function ............................................................................................................................. 48
2nd Key Function ................................................................................................................................. 48
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Table of Contents
iii
Ctrl Key Function................................................................................................................................ 48
Alt Key Function................................................................................................................................. 48
Shft Key Function ............................................................................................................................... 48
Spc Key Function................................................................................................................................ 49
Field Exit Function.............................................................................................................................. 49
Mode Key Functions ........................................................................................................................... 49
Caps Key and CapsLock Mode ........................................................................................................ 49
Keypress Sequences ............................................................................................................................ 49
Input Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 49
Accessing Files on the Compact Flash Card.................................................................................... 50
Touchscreen......................................................................................................................................... 50
Display and Keypad Backlight Timer................................................................................................. 50
Cleaning the Glass Display/Scanner Aperture ................................................................................. 51
Speaker ................................................................................................................................................. 51
Set The Audio / Speaker Volume........................................................................................................ 52
Using the Keypad ............................................................................................................................. 52
Using the Touch Screen.................................................................................................................... 52
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 52
Power Supply ....................................................................................................................................... 53
Checking Battery Status...................................................................................................................... 53
Important Battery Information ............................................................................................................ 53
Handling Batteries Safely ................................................................................................................... 53
Main Battery Pack............................................................................................................................... 54
Battery Hot-Swapping......................................................................................................................... 54
Low Battery Warning.......................................................................................................................... 55
Battery Status LEDs............................................................................................................................ 55
Backup Battery.................................................................................................................................... 55
Battery Maintenance Publication ........................................................................................................ 55
Battery Chargers.................................................................................................................................. 56
MX5 Multi-Charger (Optional)........................................................................................................... 56
External Power Supply for MX5X and Cradle ................................................................................... 57
Cradles .................................................................................................................................................. 58
Tethered Barcode Scanner Data Entry Using the MX5 Cradle........................................................... 59
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
61
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 61
Windows Operating System ............................................................................................................... 61
Network Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 61
Installed Software ................................................................................................................................ 61
Software Load ..................................................................................................................................... 62
Software Applications......................................................................................................................... 62
Optional............................................................................................................................................... 62
AppLock (Option) ............................................................................................................................ 62
JAVA (Option) ................................................................................................................................. 63
LXE RFTerm (Option) ..................................................................................................................... 63
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Option) ............................................................................................ 63
Desktop ................................................................................................................................................. 64
My Device Folders.............................................................................................................................. 65
Folders Copied at Startup ................................................................................................................. 65
Start Menu Program Options.............................................................................................................. 66
Communication ................................................................................................................................... 66
ActiveSync .......................................................................................................................................... 67
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
iv
Table of Contents
Synchronizing from the MX5X........................................................................................................ 67
Get Connected .................................................................................................................................. 67
Remote Desktop Connection............................................................................................................... 68
Command Prompt ............................................................................................................................... 68
Inbox ................................................................................................................................................... 68
Internet Explorer ................................................................................................................................. 68
Media Player ....................................................................................................................................... 69
Windows Explorer .............................................................................................................................. 69
Transcriber .......................................................................................................................................... 69
Taskbar................................................................................................................................................ 70
Advanced Tab................................................................................................................................... 70
Expand Control Panel .................................................................................................................... 70
Clear Contents of Document Folder .............................................................................................. 70
Control Panel Options ......................................................................................................................... 71
Accessibility........................................................................................................................................ 72
Administration – for AppLock............................................................................................................ 73
Audio................................................................................................................................................... 74
Certificates .......................................................................................................................................... 75
Date/Time............................................................................................................................................ 76
Dialing................................................................................................................................................. 77
Display ................................................................................................................................................ 78
Display Properties ............................................................................................................................ 78
Background....................................................................................................................................... 78
Backlight .......................................................................................................................................... 78
Handheld ............................................................................................................................................. 79
How to Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset .......................................................... 79
Disable Touch Panel and Calibration ............................................................................................ 79
Disable Touch Panel Only ............................................................................................................. 79
How to Re-enable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset ...................................................... 79
Handheld Properties ......................................................................................................................... 80
Versions tab ................................................................................................................................... 80
Comms tab ..................................................................................................................................... 80
Radios tab ...................................................................................................................................... 81
Misc tab.......................................................................................................................................... 81
Input Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 82
Internet Options................................................................................................................................... 83
Keyboard............................................................................................................................................. 84
Mouse.................................................................................................................................................. 85
Network and Dialup Connections ....................................................................................................... 85
Create a Communication Option ...................................................................................................... 85
Owner.................................................................................................................................................. 86
Password ............................................................................................................................................. 87
PC Connection .................................................................................................................................... 87
Power .................................................................................................................................................. 89
Status ................................................................................................................................................ 89
Battery .............................................................................................................................................. 89
Schemes............................................................................................................................................ 89
Regional Settings ................................................................................................................................ 90
Remove Programs ............................................................................................................................... 90
Scanner................................................................................................................................................ 91
Determine Your Scanner Software Version ..................................................................................... 91
Factory Default Settings ................................................................................................................... 92
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Table of Contents
v
Main.................................................................................................................................................. 93
Keys.................................................................................................................................................. 94
Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value..................................................................................... 94
Advanced.......................................................................................................................................... 95
Translate Control Codes ................................................................................................................ 95
Strip Leading / Strip Trailing Characters....................................................................................... 95
Prefix / Suffix................................................................................................................................. 96
COM Ports........................................................................................................................................ 97
Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds..................................................................................................... 97
Storage Manager ................................................................................................................................. 98
Stylus................................................................................................................................................... 99
Double Tap ....................................................................................................................................... 99
Calibration ........................................................................................................................................ 99
System............................................................................................................................................... 100
General ........................................................................................................................................... 100
Memory .......................................................................................................................................... 100
Device Name .................................................................................................................................. 101
Copyrights ...................................................................................................................................... 101
Compact Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs ........................................................................... 102
Access Files on the CF Card ............................................................................................................. 102
CF Files ............................................................................................................................................. 102
API Calls.............................................................................................................................................. 103
ActiveSync / Get Connected Process.............................................................................................. 104
Introduction....................................................................................................................................... 104
Initial Install ...................................................................................................................................... 105
Install ActiveSync on Desktop/Laptop........................................................................................... 105
Serial Connection ........................................................................................................................... 105
USB Connection............................................................................................................................. 105
Connect – Initial Install Process ..................................................................................................... 106
Change Connection Parameters ........................................................................................................ 106
Backup MX5X Files Using ActiveSync ........................................................................................... 107
Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................... 107
MX5X and PC Partnership ............................................................................................................. 107
Serial Port Transfer......................................................................................................................... 107
Infrared Port Transfer ..................................................................................................................... 107
USB Transfer.................................................................................................................................. 107
Ethernet Transfer ............................................................................................................................ 107
Connect........................................................................................................................................... 107
Ethernet or Wireless Connection.................................................................................................... 108
Explore .............................................................................................................................................. 108
Disconnect......................................................................................................................................... 108
Serial Connection ........................................................................................................................... 108
IRDA Connection........................................................................................................................... 108
USB Connection............................................................................................................................. 108
Wireless Device Connection .......................................................................................................... 108
Ethernet Connection ....................................................................................................................... 108
Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection...................................................................................... 109
Troubleshooting ActiveSync............................................................................................................. 109
iRescue ............................................................................................................................................... 111
Start iRescue ..................................................................................................................................... 111
Backup Your Mobile Device using iRescue ..................................................................................... 111
Change Backup Settings ................................................................................................................... 112
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
vi
Table of Contents
Manage Backups ............................................................................................................................... 112
Restore Backups................................................................................................................................ 112
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration ................................................................................... 113
Briefly . . . ......................................................................................................................................... 113
Enabler Install Process ...................................................................................................................... 113
Enabler Uninstall Process ................................................................................................................. 113
Stop the Enabler Service ................................................................................................................... 114
Update Monitoring Overview ........................................................................................................... 114
Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings ................................................................................ 115
Enabler Configuration....................................................................................................................... 116
File Menu Options.......................................................................................................................... 117
Avalanche Update using File | Settings .......................................................................................... 118
Menu Options .............................................................................................................................. 118
Connection Tab............................................................................................................................ 119
Execution Tab .............................................................................................................................. 120
Server Contact Tab ...................................................................................................................... 121
Startup/Shutdown Tab ................................................................................................................. 122
Scan Config Tab .......................................................................................................................... 123
Display Tab.................................................................................................................................. 123
Shortcuts Tab ............................................................................................................................... 124
Adapters Tab................................................................................................................................ 125
Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 128
Troubleshooting Avalanche Enabler................................................................................................. 128
eXpress Scan ..................................................................................................................................... 129
CHAPTER 4 SCANNER
133
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 133
Determine Your Scanner Software Version .................................................................................... 133
Barcode Processing Overview ......................................................................................................... 134
Factory Default Settings.................................................................................................................... 135
Main Tab.............................................................................................................................................. 136
Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 136
Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds ..................................................................................................... 137
Keys Tab ............................................................................................................................................. 137
Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value........................................................................................ 138
COM1/COM4 Tab................................................................................................................................ 139
Barcode Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 140
Buttons .............................................................................................................................................. 140
Enable Code ID ................................................................................................................................. 141
Options ........................................................................................................................................... 141
Barcode – Symbology Settings ......................................................................................................... 142
Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 143
Strip Leading/Trailing Control ....................................................................................................... 144
Barcode Data Match List ............................................................................................................. 145
Barcode Data Edit Buttons........................................................................................................... 145
Match List Rules .......................................................................................................................... 146
Add Prefix/Suffix Control .............................................................................................................. 147
Barcode – Ctrl Char Mapping ........................................................................................................... 148
Translate All ................................................................................................................................... 148
Barcode – Custom Identifiers............................................................................................................ 150
Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 150
Buttons............................................................................................................................................ 151
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Table of Contents
vii
Control Code Replacement Examples............................................................................................. 152
Barcode Processing Examples .......................................................................................................... 153
Length Based Barcode Stripping..................................................................................................... 155
CHAPTER 5 WIRELESS NETWORK CONFIGURATION
157
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 157
Summit Client Configuration ............................................................................................................ 158
Summit Client Utility........................................................................................................................ 158
Help................................................................................................................................................... 158
Summit Tray Icon ............................................................................................................................. 159
Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Client ..................................................................... 159
Main Tab ........................................................................................................................................... 160
Admin Login .................................................................................................................................. 161
Config or Profile Tab ........................................................................................................................ 162
Buttons............................................................................................................................................ 162
Config/Profile Parameters .............................................................................................................. 164
Status Tab.......................................................................................................................................... 166
Diags Tab .......................................................................................................................................... 167
Buttons............................................................................................................................................ 167
Global or Global Settings Tab........................................................................................................... 168
Factory Default Settings ................................................................................................................. 168
Global Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 169
Summit Wireless Security................................................................................................................. 172
Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials ...................................................................................................... 173
Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path ...................................................................................... 175
User Certificates .......................................................................................................................... 175
Root CA Certificates.................................................................................................................... 175
No Security..................................................................................................................................... 176
WEP Keys ...................................................................................................................................... 177
LEAP w/o WPA Authentication..................................................................................................... 178
EAP-FAST Authentication............................................................................................................. 179
PEAP/MSCHAP Authentication .................................................................................................... 181
WPA/LEAP Authentication ........................................................................................................... 183
WPA PSK Authentication .............................................................................................................. 184
PEAP/GTC Authentication ............................................................................................................ 185
EAP-TLS Authentication ............................................................................................................... 187
Certificates ......................................................................................................................................... 189
Root Certificates ............................................................................................................................... 189
Download a Root CA Certificate.................................................................................................... 189
Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device ................................................................. 191
User Certificates................................................................................................................................ 193
Generating a User Certificate for the MX5X ................................................................................. 193
Installing a User Certificate on the MX5X (WPA-TLS Only)....................................................... 198
CHAPTER 6 APPLOCK
201
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 201
Determine Your AppLock Version ................................................................................................... 201
Setup a New Device ........................................................................................................................... 202
Administration Mode ......................................................................................................................... 204
End User Mode................................................................................................................................... 204
Passwords .......................................................................................................................................... 205
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
viii
Table of Contents
AppLock Password Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 205
End-User Switching Technique........................................................................................................ 206
Using a Stylus Tap ............................................................................................................................ 206
Using the Switch Key Sequence ....................................................................................................... 206
Multi-Application Configuration ....................................................................................................... 207
Application Panel .............................................................................................................................. 207
Launch Button ................................................................................................................................ 209
Auto At Boot ............................................................................................................................. 209
Auto Re-Launch ........................................................................................................................ 210
Manual (Launch) ....................................................................................................................... 210
Allow Close............................................................................................................................... 211
End User Internet Explorer (EUIE) ............................................................................................. 211
Security Panel................................................................................................................................. 212
Setting an Activation Hotkey....................................................................................................... 212
Setting a Password in the Security Panel ..................................................................................... 213
Status Panel .................................................................................................................................... 213
View............................................................................................................................................. 213
Log ............................................................................................................................................... 214
Save As ........................................................................................................................................ 214
Troubleshooting AppLock ................................................................................................................ 215
APPENDIX A KEY MAPS
217
Keypad ................................................................................................................................................ 217
Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies ..................................................................................................... 218
IBM Keypad Overlays ........................................................................................................................ 222
3270 Keypad ..................................................................................................................................... 222
5250 Keypad ..................................................................................................................................... 223
APPENDIX B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
225
Physical Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 225
Display Specifications....................................................................................................................... 226
Environmental Specifications .......................................................................................................... 226
MX5X ............................................................................................................................................... 226
AC Wall Adapter .............................................................................................................................. 226
Network Card Specifications ............................................................................................................ 227
Summit Client Type II ...................................................................................................................... 227
Symbol Client Type II....................................................................................................................... 227
Cisco Client Type II .......................................................................................................................... 227
APPENDIX C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
229
System Configuration CE .NET 4.2 .................................................................................................. 229
Introduction....................................................................................................................................... 229
Windows Operating System CE .NET 4.2........................................................................................ 229
Installed Software CE .NET 4.2........................................................................................................ 229
Software Load ................................................................................................................................ 230
Software Applications .................................................................................................................... 230
Optional .......................................................................................................................................... 231
AppLock (Option)........................................................................................................................ 231
JAVA (Option) ............................................................................................................................ 231
LXE RFTerm (Option) ................................................................................................................ 231
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Table of Contents
ix
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler ...................................................................................................... 231
Bluetooth Manager (CE .NET 4.2 only) ...................................................................................... 231
Desktop CE .NET 4.2........................................................................................................................ 232
My Computer Folders (CE .NET 4.2)............................................................................................... 233
Folders Copied at Startup ............................................................................................................... 233
Start Menu Program Options CE .NET 4.2....................................................................................... 234
Communication .............................................................................................................................. 234
ActiveSync ..................................................................................................................................... 235
Synchronizing from the MX5X ................................................................................................... 235
Get Connected.............................................................................................................................. 235
Remote Desktop Connection .......................................................................................................... 235
Command Prompt........................................................................................................................... 236
Inbox............................................................................................................................................... 236
Internet Explorer............................................................................................................................. 236
Media Player................................................................................................................................... 236
Windows Explorer.......................................................................................................................... 236
Transcriber...................................................................................................................................... 236
Taskbar ........................................................................................................................................... 237
Advanced Tab .............................................................................................................................. 237
Expand Control Panel................................................................................................................ 237
Clear Contents of Document Folder.......................................................................................... 237
Control Panel Options CE .NET 4.2 ................................................................................................. 238
Accessibility ................................................................................................................................... 240
Administration – for AppLock ....................................................................................................... 240
Audio .............................................................................................................................................. 241
Certificates...................................................................................................................................... 242
Date/Time ....................................................................................................................................... 243
Dialing ............................................................................................................................................ 243
Display............................................................................................................................................ 244
Display Properties........................................................................................................................ 244
Background.................................................................................................................................. 244
Backlight...................................................................................................................................... 244
Handheld ........................................................................................................................................ 245
How to Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset...................................................... 245
Disable Touch Panel and Calibration .......................................................................................... 245
Disable Touch Panel Only ........................................................................................................... 245
How to Re-enable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset.................................................. 245
Bootloader Version 1.02................................................................................................................. 246
Versions tab ................................................................................................................................. 246
Comms tab ................................................................................................................................... 246
Radios tab .................................................................................................................................... 247
Misc tab........................................................................................................................................ 247
Bootloader Version 1.01................................................................................................................. 248
Versions tab ................................................................................................................................. 248
Comms tab ................................................................................................................................... 248
Radios tab .................................................................................................................................... 248
Misc tab........................................................................................................................................ 248
Input Panel...................................................................................................................................... 249
Internet Options .............................................................................................................................. 250
Windows CE .NET 4.2 Defaults.................................................................................................. 250
Keyboard ........................................................................................................................................ 250
Mouse ............................................................................................................................................. 250
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
x
Table of Contents
Network and Dialup Connections................................................................................................... 251
Create a Communication Option ................................................................................................. 251
Owner ............................................................................................................................................. 252
Password......................................................................................................................................... 253
PC Connection................................................................................................................................ 253
Power.............................................................................................................................................. 254
Status............................................................................................................................................ 254
Battery.......................................................................................................................................... 254
Schemes ....................................................................................................................................... 254
Regional Settings............................................................................................................................ 255
Remove Programs .......................................................................................................................... 255
Scanner ........................................................................................................................................... 256
Determine Your Scanner Software Version................................................................................. 256
Factory Default Settings .............................................................................................................. 257
Main ............................................................................................................................................. 258
Keys ............................................................................................................................................. 259
Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value ................................................................................ 259
Advanced ..................................................................................................................................... 260
Translate Control Codes............................................................................................................ 260
Strip Leading / Strip Trailing Characters .................................................................................. 260
Prefix / Suffix ............................................................................................................................ 261
COM Ports ................................................................................................................................... 262
Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds ................................................................................................ 262
Storage Manager............................................................................................................................. 263
Stylus .............................................................................................................................................. 264
Double Tap .................................................................................................................................. 264
Calibration ................................................................................................................................... 264
System ............................................................................................................................................ 265
General......................................................................................................................................... 265
Memory........................................................................................................................................ 265
Device Name................................................................................................................................ 266
Copyrights.................................................................................................................................... 266
Wireless Network Configuration (Cisco and Symbol Clients) ...................................................... 267
Cisco Client Configuration (CE .NET 4.2 only)............................................................................... 267
Aironet Client Utility (ACU).......................................................................................................... 267
Profiles Tab.................................................................................................................................. 267
Firmware Tab............................................................................................................................... 267
Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 267
Statistics Tab................................................................................................................................ 268
Survey Tab................................................................................................................................... 268
Cisco Wireless Security.................................................................................................................. 268
System Requirements................................................................................................................... 268
Installing Cisco Wireless Client Drivers...................................................................................... 268
Checking for the Cisco PEAP Supplicant.................................................................................... 269
Cisco WPA Configuration ........................................................................................................... 270
PEAP/MS-CHAP Authentication Configuration......................................................................... 273
Configuring the PEAP/MS-CHAP Supplicant.......................................................................... 273
Server Authentication................................................................................................................ 275
PEAP / GTC Authentication Configuration................................................................................. 276
Configuring the PEAP/GTC Supplicant.................................................................................... 276
Server Authentication................................................................................................................ 278
WPA/LEAP ................................................................................................................................. 279
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Table of Contents
xi
Cisco ACU ................................................................................................................................ 279
EAP-TLS Authentication Configuration ..................................................................................... 281
User Certificate ......................................................................................................................... 281
Setting EAP/TLS Parameters .................................................................................................... 282
Validating the Server Certificate............................................................................................... 284
WPA PSK Configuration............................................................................................................. 285
Symbol Client (CE .NET 4.2 only) ................................................................................................... 286
IP Information Tab ......................................................................................................................... 286
IPv6 Information Tab ..................................................................................................................... 286
Configuring IPv6 ............................................................................................................................ 286
Wireless Information Tab............................................................................................................... 286
View Log ..................................................................................................................................... 287
Add a new connection .................................................................................................................... 287
Disable WEP................................................................................................................................ 287
Enable WEP................................................................................................................................. 287
Continue....................................................................................................................................... 287
Select a User Certificate............................................................................................................... 287
APPENDIX D REFERENCE MATERIAL
289
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 289
AppLock - Single Application Configuration .................................................................................. 290
Determine Your AppLock Version ................................................................................................... 290
Setup a New Device .......................................................................................................................... 291
Administration Mode ........................................................................................................................ 291
End User Mode ................................................................................................................................. 292
Passwords.......................................................................................................................................... 292
Password Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................. 292
Single Application Configuration ..................................................................................................... 293
Administrator Control Panels ......................................................................................................... 293
Control Panel .................................................................................................................................. 294
End User Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................... 294
Security Panel ................................................................................................................................... 295
Specify a Hotkey Sequence ............................................................................................................ 295
Setting a Password.......................................................................................................................... 295
Status Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 296
View ............................................................................................................................................... 296
Levels ............................................................................................................................................. 297
Save As........................................................................................................................................... 297
AppLock Error Messages.................................................................................................................. 298
AppLock Registry Settings ............................................................................................................... 303
Valid VK Codes for CE....................................................................................................................... 304
ASCII Control Codes.......................................................................................................................... 305
Hat Encoding...................................................................................................................................... 307
Decimal – Hexadecimal Chart........................................................................................................... 309
Revision History................................................................................................................................. 311
INDEX
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
313
MX5X Reference Guide
xii
Table of Contents
Illustrations
Figure 1-1 Identify your Device...........................................................................................................................4
Figure 1-2 Features ..............................................................................................................................................5
Figure 1-3 Front of MX5X.................................................................................................................................11
Figure 1-4 Scan Aperture and Audio Jack .........................................................................................................11
Figure 1-5 Ports..................................................................................................................................................12
Figure 1-6 Back w/Optional Handle or Hand Strap ...........................................................................................12
Figure 1-7 Handle (Optional).............................................................................................................................13
Figure 1-8 Power Key Location.........................................................................................................................14
Figure 1-9 Main Battery Pack ............................................................................................................................15
Figure 1-10 AC/DC 12V External Power Supply ..............................................................................................16
Figure 1-11 Battery Charging LED....................................................................................................................16
Figure 1-12 Trigger Handle Attach Points.........................................................................................................17
Figure 1-13 MX5X With Handstrap Installed....................................................................................................18
Figure 1-14 Upper Strap Bracket .......................................................................................................................18
Figure 1-15 Strap Inserted in Upper Bracket .....................................................................................................19
Figure 1-16 Connect Audio Jack........................................................................................................................22
Figure 1-17 End-User Multi AppLock Touch Panel Segment...........................................................................24
Figure 1-18 Scan Beam......................................................................................................................................27
Figure 1-19 Scanner LED Location ...................................................................................................................27
Figure 1-20 Input Panel......................................................................................................................................28
Figure 2-1 System Hardware .............................................................................................................................33
Figure 2-2 COM Ports – Left and Right ............................................................................................................35
Figure 2-3 PCMCIA Wireless Client Card and Flash Card Location ................................................................37
Figure 2-4 COM Ports........................................................................................................................................40
Figure 2-5 RS-232 Ports ....................................................................................................................................42
Figure 2-6 DB26 RS-232 Pinouts ......................................................................................................................42
Figure 2-7 MX5X USB Port ..............................................................................................................................43
Figure 2-8 USB-Serial Cable Pinouts ................................................................................................................43
Figure 2-9 IR Port on MX5X .............................................................................................................................43
Figure 2-10 Scan Buttons...................................................................................................................................44
Figure 2-11 Power Modes – On, Suspend and Off ............................................................................................45
Figure 2-12 The ANSI / Batch Keypad..............................................................................................................47
Figure 2-13 Touchscreen ...................................................................................................................................50
Figure 2-14 Speaker Location............................................................................................................................51
Figure 2-15 LXE Multi-Charger ........................................................................................................................56
Figure 2-16 Insert Battery Pack in Charging Pocket..........................................................................................56
Figure 2-17 AC/DC 12V Power Supply ............................................................................................................57
Figure 3-1 Desktop Icons...................................................................................................................................64
Figure 3-2 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen ............................................................................................................68
Figure 3-3 Taskbar and Start Menu Properties ..................................................................................................70
Figure 3-4 Accessibility Options .......................................................................................................................72
Figure 3-5 Audio Properties...............................................................................................................................74
Figure 3-6 Digital Certificates ...........................................................................................................................75
Figure 3-7 Date/Time Properties........................................................................................................................76
Figure 3-8 Dialing Properties.............................................................................................................................77
Figure 3-9 Display Properties ............................................................................................................................78
Figure 3-10 Handheld Properties – Version 1.02...............................................................................................80
Figure 3-11 Input Panel......................................................................................................................................82
Figure 3-12 Keyboard Properties .......................................................................................................................84
Figure 3-13 Owner Properties............................................................................................................................86
Figure 3-14 PC Connection / Change Connection .............................................................................................88
Figure 3-15 Power Properties.............................................................................................................................89
Figure 3-16 Remove/Delete User Installed Programs........................................................................................90
Figure 3-17 Determine Your Scanner Software Version ...................................................................................91
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Table of Contents
xiii
Figure 3-18 Scanner Properties / Main Tab .......................................................................................................93
Figure 3-19 Scanner Properties / Keys Tab .......................................................................................................94
Figure 3-20 Scanner Properties / Advanced tab.................................................................................................95
Figure 3-21 Scanner Properties / COM Port Settings ........................................................................................97
Figure 3-22 Storage Properties...........................................................................................................................98
Figure 3-23 Stylus Properties / Calibration Start / Calibration Begin................................................................99
Figure 3-24 System / Memory .........................................................................................................................100
Figure 3-25 System / Device Name .................................................................................................................101
Figure 3-26 iRescue Backup ............................................................................................................................111
Figure 3-27 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen .............................................................................................116
Figure 3-28 Connection Options......................................................................................................................119
Figure 3-29 Execution Options (Dimmed).......................................................................................................120
Figure 3-30 Server Contact Options.................................................................................................................121
Figure 3-31 Startup / Shutdown Options..........................................................................................................122
Figure 3-32 Scan Config Option ......................................................................................................................123
Figure 3-33 Window Display Options .............................................................................................................123
Figure 3-34 Application Shortcuts ...................................................................................................................124
Figure 3-35 Adapters Options – Network ........................................................................................................125
Figure 3-36 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed .........................................................................................126
Figure 3-37 Manual Settings Properties Panels ...............................................................................................127
Figure 3-38 Status Display...............................................................................................................................128
Figure 3-39 eXpress Scan Desktop Icon ..........................................................................................................129
Figure 3-40 eXpress Scan Password Input.......................................................................................................129
Figure 3-41 Scan Barcode 1.............................................................................................................................130
Figure 3-42 Scan Remaining Barcodes............................................................................................................130
Figure 3-43 Configuring Settings.....................................................................................................................131
Figure 4-1 Scanner Control / Main ..................................................................................................................136
Figure 4-2 Scanner Properties / Keys Tab .......................................................................................................137
Figure 4-3 Scanner Control / COM1 and COM4 .............................................................................................139
Figure 4-4 Scanner Control / Barcode tab........................................................................................................140
Figure 4-5 Barcode Tab – Symbology Settings ...............................................................................................142
Figure 4-6 Strip Leading / Trailing and Barcode Data.....................................................................................144
Figure 4-7 Barcode Data Match List................................................................................................................145
Figure 4-8 Add Prefix/Suffix Control ..............................................................................................................147
Figure 4-9 Barcode Tab – Ctrl Char Mapping .................................................................................................148
Figure 4-10 Barcode Tab – Custom Identifiers................................................................................................150
Figure 4-11 Control Code Replacement Examples ..........................................................................................152
Figure 4-12 Barcode Processing Examples......................................................................................................154
Figure 5-1 Summit Client Utility (SCU)..........................................................................................................158
Figure 5-2 SCU – Main Tab.............................................................................................................................160
Figure 5-3 Main Tab – Enter Admin Password ...............................................................................................161
Figure 5-4 SCU – Config / ProfileTab .............................................................................................................162
Figure 5-5 SCU - Scan .....................................................................................................................................163
Figure 5-6 SCU – Status Tab ...........................................................................................................................166
Figure 5-7 SCU – Diags Tab............................................................................................................................167
Figure 5-8 SCU – Global /Global Settings Tab ...............................................................................................168
Figure 5-9 Sign-On Screen ..............................................................................................................................174
Figure 5-10 Choose Certificate ........................................................................................................................175
Figure 5-11 Configure a Summit Profile with No Security .............................................................................176
Figure 5-12 Summit WEP Key Dialog ............................................................................................................177
Figure 5-13 Configure a Summit Profile for LEAP w/o WPA ........................................................................178
Figure 5-14 LEAP Credentials Dialog .............................................................................................................178
Figure 5-15 Configure a Summit Profile for EAP-FAST ................................................................................179
Figure 5-16 Summit EAP-FAST Credentials...................................................................................................180
Figure 5-17 Configure a Summit Profile for PEAP/MSCHAP........................................................................181
Figure 5-18 PEAP/MSCHAP Credentials Dialog............................................................................................182
Figure 5-19 Configure a Summit Profile with LEAP for WPA TKIP .............................................................183
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
xiv
Table of Contents
Figure 5-20 LEAP Credentials.........................................................................................................................183
Figure 5-21 Configure a Summit Profile with WPA PSK Encryption.............................................................184
Figure 5-22 Summit PSK Entry Dialog ...........................................................................................................184
Figure 5-23 Configure a Summit Profile with PEAP/GTC..............................................................................185
Figure 5-24 PEAP/GTC Credentials Dialog ....................................................................................................186
Figure 5-25 Configure a Summit Profile with EAP-TLS.................................................................................187
Figure 5-26 EAP-TLS Credentials Dialog .......................................................................................................188
Figure 5-27 Logon to Certificate Authority .....................................................................................................189
Figure 5-28 Certificate Services Welcome Screen...........................................................................................189
Figure 5-29 Download CA Certificate Screen .................................................................................................190
Figure 5-30 Download CA Certificate Save to Desktop ..................................................................................190
Figure 5-31 Certificate Stores ..........................................................................................................................191
Figure 5-32 Import Certificate From a File......................................................................................................191
Figure 5-33 Browsing to Certificate Location .................................................................................................192
Figure 5-34 Logon to Certificate Authority .....................................................................................................193
Figure 5-35 Certificate Services Welcome Screen...........................................................................................193
Figure 5-36 Request a Certificate Type ...........................................................................................................194
Figure 5-37 Advanced Certificate Request Screen ..........................................................................................194
Figure 5-38 Advanced Certificate Details........................................................................................................195
Figure 5-39 Script Warnings............................................................................................................................196
Figure 5-40 Script Warnings............................................................................................................................196
Figure 5-41 User Certificate Issued .................................................................................................................197
Figure 5-42 Download Certificate Security Warning ......................................................................................197
Figure 5-43 Certificate Stores ..........................................................................................................................198
Figure 5-44 Import User Certificate.................................................................................................................198
Figure 5-45 Browsing to Certificate Location .................................................................................................199
Figure 5-46 User Certificate Listing ................................................................................................................199
Figure 5-47 Browsing to Private Key Location ...............................................................................................200
Figure 6-1 Determine Your AppLock Version ................................................................................................201
Figure 6-2 AppLock Panels .............................................................................................................................203
Figure 6-3 Switchpad Menu.............................................................................................................................206
Figure 6-4 Application Panel – Multi-Application ..........................................................................................207
Figure 6-5 Application Launch Options...........................................................................................................209
Figure 6-6 Security Panel – Multi-Application................................................................................................212
Figure 6-7 Status Panel – Multi-Application ...................................................................................................213
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Chapter 1 Introduction
Overview
Note:
At the bottom of the MX5X is a label that indicates the operating system resident on the
mobile device. This guide is directed toward an MX5X with Windows CE on the label.
The LXE® MX5X is a rugged, portable, hand-held Microsoft® Windows® CE .NET 4.2 or CE
5.0 equipped mobile computer capable of wireless data communications. The MX5X can transmit
information using a 2.4 GHz wireless client (with dual internal antennas) and it can store
information for later transmission using an RS-232 serial port, Ethernet, RF, IRDA or a USB port.
The MX5X is vertically oriented and features backlighting for the display and the keypad. The
touch-screen display supports graphic features and icons that the Windows operating system
supports. A stylus is attached to the MX5X to assist in entering data and configuring the unit.
The MX5X is powered by a 2800 mAh Lithium-Ion main battery pack and an internal backup
battery.
MX5X Hazardous Location unit can be distinguished from the standard MX5X by the blue
keypad overlay and the safety approval labeling on the back of the unit. The MX5X that is
approved for use in Hazardous Locations does not accept tethered scanner or external power
connection. See section titled Identify Your Device.
Warning: Standard MX5X units are not approved for Hazardous Location use.
Note:
Until the main battery and backup battery are completely depleted, the MX5X is always
drawing power from the batteries (On). This unit is to be used with a power supply (LXE
P/N MX5A305PSACUS / MX5A305PSACWW).
Note:
If the mobile device has AppLock installed, please refer to Chapter 6 – AppLock for
setup and processing information before continuing.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
2
When to Use This Guide
Important Battery Information
Important: If the main battery has been out of the MX5X for an extended period of time or
becomes fully discharged or dead, a fully charged backup battery in the MX5X will last for up to
24 hours. If this happens, the device will cold reset the next time power is applied from either AC
power or a charged main battery. A cold reset will cause loss of data and custom programs.
Always store unused mobile devices with a fully charged main battery pack installed. The MX5X
requires periodic connection to an external power source to maintain an optimum backup battery
charged status.
• Until the main battery and backup battery are completely depleted, the MX5X is always
drawing power from the batteries (On).
• New batteries must be fully charged prior to use 1.
• Whenever possible, use the AC power adapter with the MX5X to conserve the main battery
and charge the backup battery.
• When a new battery is installed in the MX5X for the first time (or when the backup battery is
completely depleted), the Time and Date reverts to it’s default values.
Li-Ion Battery
When disposing of the MX5X main battery, the following precautions should be observed: The
battery should be disposed of properly. The battery should not be disassembled or crushed. The
battery should not be heated above 212°F (100°C) or incinerated.
When to Use This Guide
As the reference for LXE’s MX5X computer, this guide provides detailed information on its
features and functionality.
Use this reference guide as you would any other source book – reading portions to learn about the
MX5X, and then referring to it when you need more information about a particular subject. This
guide takes you through all aspects of installation and configuration for the LXE MX5X.
Daily operation, installation and safety instructions for the general user are covered in the MX5X
User’s Guide.
This chapter, Introduction, describes this reference guide’s structure, contains initial setup
instruction, MX5X assembly and use, briefly describes data entry processes, and explains how to
get help.
Chapter 2 - Physical Description and Layout, describes the function and layout of the MX5X,
controls and connectors. Also describes the power supplies and docking options for the MX5X.
Chapter 3 - System Configuration takes you through the Windows CE operating system setup
and the MX5X file structure. The Avalanche Enabler is included.
Chapter 4 - Scanner describes the function, layout and setup for the LXE Wedge.
Chapter 5 - Wireless Network Configuration details Summit wireless client setup..
Configuration for WEP and WPA is included.
Chapter 6 - AppLock covers all aspects of the LXE AppLock program.
Appendix A - Key Maps describes the keypress sequences for the keypad.
Appendix B - Technical Specifications lists MX5X and optional device technical specifications.
1
If the MX5 has a dead main battery and is as cold as the extended operating temperature’s lowest value, the unit
must be warmed to above –20°C (-4°F) before installing a new main battery pack and pressing the On button.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Document Conventions
3
Appendix C - MX5X CE .NET 4.2 takes you through the Windows CE .NET 4.2 system setup
and file structure. Also included are the wireless network configuration instructions for the Cisco
and Symbol radios.
Appendix D - Reference Material contains parameter programming charts. It also contains the
Single Application AppLock information and instruction.
Document Conventions
ALL CAPS
All caps are used to represent disk directories/folders, file names, and application names.
Menu | Choice
Rather than use the phrase “choose the Save command from the File menu”, this guide uses
the convention “choose File | Save”.
“Quotes” or
Italics
Indicates the title of a book, chapter or a section within a chapter (for example, “Document
Conventions” or Document Conventions).
<
>
Indicates a key on the keypad (for example, <Enter> ).
Indicates a reference to other documentation.
ATTENTION
Keyword that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow.
Attention symbol that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow. Also, when marked
on product, means to refer to the manual or user’s guide.
International fuse replacement symbol. When marked on the product, the label includes
fuse ratings in volts (v) and amperes (a) for the product.
Note:
Keyword that indicates immediately relevant information.
CAUTION
Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result
in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Keyword that indicates a imminent hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
4
Identify Your Device
Identify Your Device
At the front bottom of the MX5X is a label indicating the operating system resident on the mobile
device. This document is one in a series covering the MX5X family of computers:
Label : Windows CE .NET
For MX5X computers equipped with Microsoft Windows CE .NET 4.2 or CE 5
Operating System :
• MX5X User’s Guide
• MX5X Reference Guide
• LXEbook – MX5X User’s Guide (can be downloaded to the MX5X
device from the LXE Manuals CD.)
Label : I-SAFE
For MX5X Intrinsically Safe (MX5-IS) computers equipped with Microsoft
Windows CE .NET 4.2 or CE 5.0 Operating System:
• MX5X Intrinsically Safe User’s Guide
• MX5X Reference Guide
• LXEbook – MX5X I-Safe User’s Guide (can be downloaded to the MX5IS device from the LXE Manuals CD.)
The MX5X Intrinsically Safe Hazardous Location unit (MX5-IS) is distinguished
from the standard MX5X by the blue keypad overlay and the safety approval
labeling on the back of the MX5-IS. Please refer to the MX5X Intrinsically Safe
User’s Guide for cautions, warnings, explanation and instruction when using the
MX5-IS device.
Warning: Standard MX5X units, powered cradles, tethered scanners,
multichargers, headsets, belt battery system, USB devices and external power
supplies are not approved for Hazardous Location use.
Figure 1-1 Identify your Device
The following manuals are interchangeable for MX5X computers (except where noted in the
manuals):
• MX5 Cradle Reference Guide
• MX5 Multi-charger Reference Guide
• MX5 Belt Battery System (LXE suggests using this accessory specifically with a Low
Temperature MX5X.)
Do not use the MX5 Belt Battery System with an MX5-IS in a hazardous location.
Note:
The External Power Supply for MX5X is not approved for sale in China
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Features
5
MX5X Features
New features affect user interaction and internal operation of the MX5X.
The appropriate wireless client utility for your device configuration has been pre-installed by LXE
and the utility icon is displayed on the desktop.
Windows CE .NET 4.2
Windows CE 5
Optional?
Summit® Client Utility
x
x
No
Aironet® Client Utility (Cisco)
x
-
No
Symbol® Client Utility
x
-
No
MX5X I-SAFE
x
x
Yes
SE1223 Integrated Laser Scanner
x
x
Yes
SE1224 Integrated Laser Scanner
x
x
Yes
SE2223 Integrated Laser Scanner
x
x
Yes
400MHz
x
x
No
64MB RAM
x
x
No
Type I/II Compact Flash slot
x
x
No
ATA Compact Flash slot
x
x
No
Charging/Communication Cradles
x
x
Yes
Wavelink® Avalanche® Enabler
-
x
Yes
RFTerm®
x
x
Yes
JAVA®
x
x
Yes
Single AppLock
x
-
Yes
Multi AppLock
x
x
Yes
Figure 1-2 Features
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
6
Upgrading an MX5X to CE 5.0
Upgrading an MX5X to CE 5.0
Microsoft CE 5.0 Licenses must be purchased from LXE and applied to each upgraded device.
The mobile device cannot be upgraded to CE 5.0 using the Wavelink / eXpress Config application.
Note:
The MX5X operating system cannot be upgraded using Wavelink Avalanche.
If your (3.6 inch / 9.1 cm diagonal) MX5 touch screen border looks like this:
It can be upgraded to Windows CE 5.0.
If your (3.8 inch / 9.6 cm diagonal) MX5X touch screen border looks like this:
The device must be returned to LXE for upgrading to CE 5.0, or an LXE Field Service Engineer
can be dispatched to upgrade the hardware and software. Contact your LXE representative for
assistance.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Hazardous Location Device
7
MX5X Hazardous Location Device
Label : I-SAFE
Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Rating
Operating Humidity
Vibration
-6°F to 140°F (-21°C to 60°C) [non-condensing]
-60°F to 160°F (-51°C to 71°C) [non-condensing]
IEC IP67
5% to 90% non-condensing at 140°F (60°C)
Based on MIL Std 810F
Read Before Use
DO NOT USE THIS UNIT IN CLASSIFIED AREAS UNSUITABLE FOR ITS SAFETY
RATINGS.
CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 Non-Incendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I, Division
2 Hazardous Locations
US and Canadian Approval
Class I
Per the Class / Division Classification System, this Division 2
unit is rated for safe use in the following classified
Groups A, B, C, D
locations:
300° C (T2)
Tamb -21°C to +60° C (-6°F to 140°F)
The following symbol is used to identify and warn against specific hazards, and for accident prevention purposes:
Safety Alert Symbol with Keyword
Warning
Definition and Meaning
Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Warning
To prevent ignition of a hazardous atmosphere, batteries must only be charged or changed
in an area known to be non-hazardous.
Warning
Explosion hazard – Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be nonhazardous.
Warning
Explosion hazard – Equipment not to be connected to a TNV source when used in a Class
I Division 2 area.
Warning
Explosion hazard – Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D.
Caution
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Warning
Inspect enclosure for signs of deterioration such as cracking, warping, swelling or
softening. Do not use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations if there are any signs of
deterioration.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
8
Getting Started
Getting Started
Note:
When your MX5X is pre-configured, the wireless client, flash card and scanner are
programmed by LXE to your specifications. The sequence of steps in Getting Started must
also be completed when the MX5X returns from a Cold Reset and when a new OS version
is loaded. The wireless client, flash card, virtual keyboard and scanner parameters may
also need to be reset after a cold reset.
This section’s instructions are based on the assumption that your new system is pre-configured
and requires only accessory installation (e.g. handstrap) and a power source. LXE recommends
that installation or removal of accessories be performed on a clean, well-lit surface. When
necessary, protect the work surface, MX5X, and components from electrostatic discharge.
In general, the sequence of events is:
Windows CE .NET 4.2
MX5X Desktop CE Indication
1.
Insert a fully charged battery. (Always put a fully charged battery in the MX5X at the
beginning of the shift or workday.)
2.
Connect an external power source to the unit (if available).
3.
If the screen does not automatically display, tap the Power key.
4.
Press < N > when the message Update Micro/Boot? Y/N (timer countdown) is displayed, or,
let the timer count down.
5.
Calibrate the touchscreen.
After all files are loaded and the Desktop is displayed, adjust audio volume and other parameters if
desired. If needed, change the Time and Date from it’s default value by tapping the Start |
Settings | Control Panel | Date/Time icon.
Windows CE 5.0
MX5X Desktop CE Indication
1.
Insert a fully charged battery. (Always put a fully charged battery in the MX5X at the
beginning of the shift or workday.)
2.
If the screen does not automatically display, tap the Power key.
3.
Calibrate the touchscreen.
After all files are loaded and the Desktop is displayed, adjust audio volume and other parameters if
desired.
If needed, change the Time and Date from it’s default value by tapping the Start | Settings |
Control Panel | Date/Time icon.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Setup the Client and Network
9
Troubleshooting Start-up
Can’t align the screen, change the date/time or
adjust the volume.
AppLock is installed and running on the mobile device.
AppLock restricts user access to the control panels. See
Chapter 6 - AppLock for setup and processing information.
RFTerm® opens and runs upon each cold
reset and warm reset.
This activity is the default setting for RFTerm. Tap File |
Exit to close the RFTerm application.
Touch screen won’t accept stylus taps.
Touchscreen may have been disabled or the touchscreen
may require recalibration. Hold down the Power key and
the Orange key for 4+ seconds to warmboot the device.
Force the Start menu to appear by pressing the right arrow
key and the Blue key to access Start button options, then
use the arrow keys to select menu options (e.g. Start |
Settings ).
The MX5X seems to lockup as soon as it is
warm booted.
There may be small delays while the wireless client
connects to the network, Wavelink Avalanche management
of the MX5X startup completes, and AppLock launch
sequences finalize.
Setup the Client and Network
Prerequisites
• Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point
• WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys
See Chapter 5 - Wireless Network Configuration for complete information.
For Cisco and Symbol radios – See Appendix C – MX5X CE .NET 4.2, Wireless
Network Configuration
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
10
Access Terminal Emulation Parameters
Access Terminal Emulation Parameters
RFTerm icon on desktop.
Before you make a host connection, you will, at a minimum, need to know:
• the alias name or IP address (Host Address) and
• the port number (Telnet Port) of the host system
to properly set up your host session.
Make sure the mobile client network settings are configured and functional. If you are connecting
over wireless LAN (802.11b/g), make sure your mobile client is communicating with the Access
Point.
1.
From Start | Programs, run LXE RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop.
2.
Select Session | Configure from the application menu and select the host type that you require.
This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to; i.e. 3270
mainframe, AS/400 5250 server or VT host.
3.
Enter the Host Address of the host system that you wish to connect to. This may either be a
DNS name or an IP address of the host system.
4.
Update the telnet port number, if your host application is configured to listen on a specific
port. If not, just use the default telnet port.
5.
Select OK.
6.
Select Session | Connect from the application menu or tap the Connect button on the
Command Bar. Upon a successful connection, you should see the host application screen
displayed.
To change options such as Display, Colors, Cursor, Barcode, etc., please refer to the RFTerm
Reference Guide on the LXE Manuals CD.
Saving Settings
When returning from a Cold Reset the previously saved (or original if this is the first Cold Reset)
registry savings are reloaded.
When you want to save the registry without having to reset the MX5X, double-tap the RegSave
file (located in the Windows folder).
The RegSave utility creates the RegTemp.reg registry backup file. The registry is reloaded from
the RegTemp.reg file after a Cold Reset.
The registry save process takes 5 – 10 seconds. It is also saved after each Resume from Suspend
and each time the OK button is tapped in Control Panel applets.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Components
11
Components
Figure 1-3 Front of MX5X
1
2
3
Scanner Housing
Microphone
Touchscreen
4
5
6
Keypad
Power Key
Speaker
Figure 1-4 Scan Aperture and Audio Jack
1
Scan Aperture
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
2
Audio Jack
MX5X Reference Guide
12
Components
Figure 1-5 Ports
1
2
COM 1 – RS-232, Ethernet, USB and
AC Power Connection
COM 3 – IR Port
3
COM 4 – RS-232 and AC Power
Connection
Figure 1-6 Back w/Optional Handle or Hand Strap
1
2
3
MX5X Reference Guide
Scanner
Stylus and Stylus Pocket
Trigger Handle
4
5
6
Trigger
Battery Fastener
Main Battery
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Components
13
Figure 1-7 Handle (Optional)
1
2
Scan Aperture
Trigger
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
3
Handle
MX5X Reference Guide
14
Power Key
Power Key
Note:
Refer to the section titled Power Modes later in this guide for information relating to the
power states of the MX5X.
Figure 1-8 Power Key Location
The Power key is located next to the < Z > key on the keypad. When a battery is inserted in the
MX5X for the first time press the Power key.
Tapping the Power key places the MX5X immediately in Suspend mode. Tapping the Power key
again, or connecting to AC power, immediately releases the MX5X from Suspend Mode.
Please refer to the section titled Power Modes later in this guide for a list of the kinds of activities
that will return the MX5X from Suspend Mode.
Please refer to the section titled Power Key in Chapter 2 for Reboot options and instruction.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Assembly
15
Assembly
Insert Main Battery
Press the Power key after the battery is inserted into the MX5X.
Note:
On first use the MX5X batteries should be charged with an external power source (i.e.
AC Adapter, powered MX5 cradle or MX5 Multi-Charger) – 3 hours for the main battery
and 7 hours for the backup battery. New main battery packs alone must be charged prior
to first use – this process takes up to four hours in an MX5 Multi-Charger.
The MX5X battery compartment is located at the bottom of the back of the mobile device. The
fasteners in the main battery pack are connected to the battery pack.
Figure 1-9 Main Battery Pack
1
Note:
Battery Pack Fasteners
2
Battery Pack
Using the battery removal tool (or a coin) twist each fastener to the left to loosen the
battery pack. Twist the fastener to the right to tighten the battery pack.
Place the battery in the battery well, making sure the tabs on the bottom of the battery pack fit into
the slots at the bottom end of the battery well. Push the battery down into the battery well while
fastening the screws. Fasten the screws tight enough to allow the rubber gasket to create a
watertight seal. If the screws do not easily twist into the threaded opening, remove the battery pack
and repeat the process. When the main battery pack is charging, the Battery Charge LED flashes
green. The backup battery is trickle-charged by the main battery. There is no backup battery
charging indicator. Whenever possible, use the AC power adapter with the MX5X to conserve the
main battery and charge the backup battery.
About Lithium-Ion Batteries
Li-Ion batteries (like all batteries) gradually lose their capacity over time (in a linear fashion) and
never just stop working. This is important to remember – the MX5X is always ‘on’ even when in
the Suspend state and draws power from the batteries at all times. Tap the Start | Settings | Control
Panel | Power tab to check the battery status and power reading.
The following chart is an approximation. Actual battery capacity will vary based on usage,
ambient temperature and peripherals drawing power from the MX5:
100% capacity
2800 mAh minimum
80% capacity
2240 mAh minimum
Deciding when to put a fully charged main battery pack in the MX5X is difficult to quantify
because it is very application specific. 1800 mAh may be the cutoff for one customer who uses the
computer frequently, while 1000 mAh may be perfectly fine for a customer who occasionally uses
the computer. You need to determine the point at which battery life becomes unacceptable for
your business practices and replace the main battery pack before that point.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
16
Assembly
Connect External Power Supply (Optional)
Note:
The External Power Supply for MX5X is not approved for sale in China.
The MX5X receives AC/DC power from the AC/DC 12V Power Supply or a powered MX5
Cradle.
The MX5X DC power connection is located at the base of the MX5X. The cradle power jack is
located on the back of the cradle.
The A/C power cable is not included with the Power Supply, please contact your LXE
representative for replacement power cables. When the power cable is connected to a wall outlet
and the Power Supply, the ON indicator on the Power Supply illuminates green.
Figure 1-10 AC/DC 12V External Power Supply
1.
Squeeze the sides of the power connector and push the power cable connector into either
MX5X port. The click means the connector is seated firmly.
2.
The CHGR LED above the keypad illuminates when the MX5X is receiving external
power through the power jack. The main battery recharges when the MX5X is connected
to an external power source.
Note:
When the MX5X is receiving power through a cradle connected to external power the
MX5’s CHGR LED is illuminated.
When the MX5X is connected to an external power supply, and the main battery pack is charging,
the Battery Charge LED flashes green.
Figure 1-11 Battery Charging LED
Whenever possible, use the AC power adapter with the MX5X to conserve the main battery and
charge the backup battery.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Assembly
17
Install Pistol Grip Handle (Optional)
The MX5X can be purchased with a customer-installable pistol grip handle. The handle enables
the user of the MX5X to hold the unit while pointing and activating the scanner with one hand.
Pressing the trigger activates the scanner and functions the same as the Scan key on the keypad.
With the handle installed the Scan key on the keypad remains active. The trigger duplicates the
operation.
The handle is built of a durable and flexible plastic that will not detach from the MX5X if the unit
is dropped.
The trigger handle is a mechanical device. Battery or external A/C power is not required for
operation of the trigger handle. The trigger handle does not need to be removed when replacing
the main battery pack.
Either the trigger handle is attached to the MX5X or the handstrap is attached, not both.
Figure 1-12 Trigger Handle Attach Points
Handle Installation
1.
Place the MX5X, with the screen facing down, on a flat stable surface.
2.
Slip the L-shaped plastic hooks, at the top of the handle, into the slots on each side of the
back of the MX5X and slide the handle downward until the screw holes are visible.
3.
Attach the pistol grip handle to the MX5X (as shown above) with the set of three screws
and washers provided.
4.
Test the handle’s connection making sure the MX5X is securely connected.
Periodically check the pistol grip handle for wear and the connection for tightness. If the handle
gets worn or damaged, it must be replaced.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
18
Assembly
Install Handstrap
Note:
The handstrap cannot be used/installed when the MX5X has the trigger handle installed
at the same time.
An elastic hand strap is available for the MX5X. Once installed, the hand strap provides a means
for the user to secure the computer to their hand. It is adjustable to fit practically any size hand and
is easily moved to allow installation or removal of the MX5X battery pack.
Figure 1-13 MX5X With Handstrap Installed
Installation
1.
If a handle is installed, remove it at this time. See section Install Pistol Grip Handle.
2.
Slip the strap through the upper bracket prior to securing the upper bracket to the unit.
Figure 1-14 Upper Strap Bracket
3.
When slipping the strap through the bracket make sure the closed loop fastener surface is up.
4.
After slipping the strap through the bracket, fold the strap over so that the two closed loop
fastener surfaces mate evenly.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Assembly
19
Figure 1-15 Strap Inserted in Upper Bracket
5.
Prior to securing the upper bracket to the unit, slide the bottom assembly into the slots at the
bottom of the MX5X. Insure that both ends of the bottom assembly are securely installed.
6.
After securing the bottom of the strap to the MX5X, loosen the closed loop fastener strap and
then secure the upper bracket to the unit with a screw.
Removal
1.
Separate the closed loop fastener tabs and loosen the strap through the upper bracket.
2.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the upper bracket screw.
3.
Pull the bottom assembly from the slots in the bottom back of the MX5X.
Slide the bottom bracket out and away from the MX5X when replacing the main battery pack.
Periodically check the handstrap for wear and the connection for tightness. If the handstrap gets
worn or damaged, it must be replaced.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
20
How To
How To
Tap the Touchscreen with a Stylus
Note:
Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display. Never use
an actual pen, pencil, abrasive or sharp object to write on the touchscreen.
Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil. Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the
stylus then remove the stylus from the screen. Firmly press the stylus into the stylus holder on the
MX5X when the stylus is not in use.
Like using a mouse to left-click icons on a computer screen, using the stylus to tap icons on the
MX5X display is the basic action that can:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open applications
Choose menu commands
Select options in dialog boxes or drop-down boxes
Drag the slider in a scroll bar
Select text by dragging the stylus across the text
Place the cursor in a text box prior to typing in data or retrieving data using the integrated
barcode scanner or an input/output device connected to the serial port.
• A mouse right-click is performed by holding the stylus down on the touch screen. A circle of
dots appear and then the right-click operation can be performed. See Note.
Note:
A ‘right mouse click’ function must be programmed by the customer to accept a constant
stream of left mouse click messages. An application can choose to interpret this stream of
messages as a right mouse click. LXE does not support non-LXE application
programming.
An extra or replacement stylus can be ordered from LXE. See the section titled Accessories for the
stylus part number.
Keypad Shortcuts
Use keyboard shortcuts instead of the stylus:.
• Press Tab and a Left or Right Arrow key to select a file.
• Press Shift and an Up or Down Arrow key to select several files. Press Shift+Arrow, then
Shift+Arrow again for each additional file selected.
• Once you’ve selected a file, press Alt then press Enter to open its Properties dialog.
• Press Orange then press numeric dot to delete the currently highlighted file(name). Or, tap and
hold the stylus on the filename and a menu box with a Delete option appears.
Calibrate the Touchscreen
Note:
The first time it is used, the MX5X automatically runs the touchscreen calibration
program. The calibration program is also run when Cold Reset is used.
If the MX5X is not responding properly to pen touch taps, the touchscreen may need to be
recalibrated. Contact your System Administrator for assistance.
To recalibrate the screen, tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Stylus.
To start, select the Calibration tab then tap Recalibrate. Follow the instructions on the screen and
press the Enter key to save the new calibration settings or press <Esc> to cancel or quit.
See Also: Chapter 3, section titled Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
How To
21
Set Time Zone (Optional)
Note:
The first time it is used, or the device returns from a Cold Reset, the MX5X sets Date and
Time to the factory default values.
To set the Time Zone, tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Date/Time icon.
Select the physical time zone. Enable the checkbox next to Automatically adjust clock for daylight
saving if applicable.
Adjust the time and calendar date and tap Apply. Tap OK when you are finished or X to ignore
any changes.
Enter Owner Information (Optional)
Note:
Upon initial startup, the MX5X automatically runs the touch screen calibration program
and the Date/Time dialog.
Use the virtual keyboard or keys on the keypad to enter the following data.
To set Owner information, tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Owner icon.
Select the Identification tab, and enter Name, Company, Address, and telephone numbers. Enable
the Display owner identification checkbox if you want this information displayed each time the
system powers on.
Select the Notes tab, enter a note to see at power on. Enable the Display owner notes checkbox to
see the note at power on.
Select the Network ID tab and enter the User Name, Password and Domain.
Tap OK when finished or X to ignore any changes.
Set the Display and Keypad Backlight Timers
Note:
Refer to the section titled Power Modes later in this manual for information relating to
the power states of the MX5X.
Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display | Backlight tab. Change the parameter values and
tap OK to save the changes.
The first option affects the MX5X when it is running on battery power only. The second option
affects the MX5X when it is running on external power (e.g. AC adapter, powered vehicle or
desktop cradle).
The default value for the battery power timer is 1 minute. The default value for the external power
timer is 10 minutes. The backlight will remain on all the time when both checkboxes are blank.
The transmissive color display backlight timer dims the backlight at the end of the specified time.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
22
How To
Set the MX5X Power Schemes Timers
Note:
Refer to the section titled Power Modes later in this guide for information relating to the
power states of the MX5X.
Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power | Schemes tab. Change the parameter values and tap
OK to save the changes.
Battery Power Scheme
Use this option when the MX5X will be running on battery power only.
Switch state to Suspend:
Default is After 3 minutes
AC Power Scheme
Use this option when the MX5X will be running on external power (e.g. AC adapter, powered
cradle).
Switch state to Suspend:
Default is 5 minutes
Toggle the Display and Keypad Backlight On and Off
When the keypad backlight option is Enabled in Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display |
Backlight tab, both the display and the keypad backlights can be toggled on and off.
Locate the Blue key at the top of the keypad. Toggle the backlights on and off by pressing the
Blue key, then the Right Scan key.
Increase or Decrease Keypad and Display Backlight Intensity
When the backlight is on, press the Orange key and the < 7 > key to decrease the intensity of the
backlight. Repeating this keypress sequence continues to decrease the intensity of the backlight
until the backlight is Off.
Once the backlight is off, use the Blue key and the Right Scan button keypress to toggle the
backlight on. This process returns the backlight to it’s brightest intensity.
Connect Audio Jack (Optional)
The MX5X audio jack is located on the top of the unit next to the scan aperture. The internal
speaker is disabled when the audio jack is connected.
Figure 1-16 Connect Audio Jack
Insert the barrel end of the connector into the MX5X audio jack and push in firmly.
Note:
The audio option draws power from the main battery.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
How To
23
Set The Audio Speaker Volume
Note:
An application may override the control of the speaker volume. Turning off sounds saves
power and prolongs battery life.
The audio volume can be adjusted to a comfortable level for the user. The MX5X has an internal
speaker and a jack for an external headset.
Using the Keypad
Note:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Audio must have the options below Enable sounds for
enabled before the following key sequences will adjust the volume.
To adjust speaker volume, locate the < V > key and the Blue key.
Adjust the speaker volume by pressing the:
Blue key, then the <V> key to enter Volume change mode.
Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to adjust volume until the speaker volume is
satisfactory.
Press the Enter key to exit this mode.
As the arrow keys are tapped, the speaker beeps each time the volume increases or decreases in
decibel range.
Using the Touch Screen
Tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Audio icon.
Tabs
System
Routing
Volume
Extra
Events
Actions
Moving the slider between Soft and Loud adjusts the speaker volume. Enable or
disable sounds for each function by tapping the check boxes.
Use these options to determine where the audio output goes. Enable or disable
the headset and speaker, and microphone gain.
As the volume scrollbar is moved between up and down for System volume, the
computer beeps each time the volume increases or decreases in decibel range.
As the volume scrollbar is moved between up and down, the computer beeps
each time the volume increases or decreases in decibel range for Bay Digital,
CRMA Radio and Mixer volume.
Choose sounds to play for Windows CE events or create your own sound
scheme.
Troubleshooting Volume Adjust
Blue+V puts the MX5X in ‘Volume Adjust’ mode.
Shift+Blue+Shift puts the unit in ‘Blue’ Mode which, when followed by ‘V’, puts the unit in
‘Volume Adjust’ mode as well.
If the MX5X is responding to touch input, but does not respond to keypad (hard or soft) input, the
MX5X may still be in Volume Adjust mode.
Press Enter to cancel (exit) Volume Adjust mode. After pressing enter, the MX5X should start
responding to key input.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
24
How To
Enter the Multi AppLock Activation Key
Note:
The touch screen must be enabled. See Chapter 6 - AppLock for AppLock instruction.
AppLock may be installed and running on the mobile device. AppLock restricts access to
programs and the Windows CE Control Panel. Please contact your system administrator for
instruction.
or
Figure 1-17 End-User Multi AppLock Touch Panel Segment
A checkmark indicates applications currently active or available for Launching by the user.
Previous versions used the program icon to indicate the same function. When Keyboard is
selected, the MX5X default input method (Input Panel, Transcriber, or custom input method) is
activated.
Using a Stylus Tap
When the mobile device enters end-user mode, a Switchpad icon (it looks like three tiny windows
one above the other) is visible at the far right in the taskbar. The taskbar is always visible on top of
the application in focus. Note: If only one application is configured and the Input Panel is not
enabled, the Switchpad icon is not displayed.
When the user taps the Switchpad icon, a menu is displayed showing the applications available to
the end-user. They can tap an application name in the popup menu and the selected application is
brought to the foreground (in focus). The previous application continues to run in the background.
Stylus taps affect the application in focus only. When the user needs to use the Input Panel, they
tap the Keyboard option. Input Panel taps affect the application in focus only.
The figure shown above is an example and is shown only to aid in describing how the user can
switch between applications using a stylus tap. The switchpad lists user applications as well as the
Keyboard option.
Using the Switch Key Sequence
One switch key sequence (or hotkey) is defined by the administrator for the end-user to use when
switching between locked applications. This is known as the Activation key. The Activation key is
assigned by the Administrator using the Global Key parameter (the default Global Key is
Ctrl+Spc). When the switch key sequence is pressed on the keypad, the next application in the
AppLock configuration is moved to the foreground (in focus) and the previous application moves
to the background. The previous application continues to run in the background. End-user key
presses affect the application in focus only.
Note that the system administrator may have assigned a different key sequence to use when
switching applications.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
How To
25
Copy the MX5X LXEbook to the MX5X (Optional)
Note:
The LXEbook user guides do not contain the illustrations and regulatory information
contained in the full user guides on the LXE Manuals CD and on the LXE Website. See
the full format user guide MX5X User’s Guide on the LXE Manuals CD.
Mobile Device
Required Adobe Acrobat Reader Version
MX5X
Windows PDF Viewer (pre-installed by LXE)
First, using your desktop computer download LXEbook – MX5X Users Guide from the LXE
Manuals CD to your desktop computer.
Next, refer to ActiveSync Processes and Initial Install in Chapter 3 of this guide before connecting
the MX5X to your PC.
When the MX5X and the desktop ActiveSync applications are synchronized, tap Explore on the
ActiveSync menu on your PC to display the contents of the MX5X folders.
Then, open the folder on your desktop computer containing the downloaded LXEbook. Tap and
drag the LXEbook to the My Documents folder on the MX5X.
When the file copy process is finished, disconnect the MX5X from the synchronization equipment
and close ActiveSync.
To view the LXEbook on the MX5X, select Start | Programs | PDF Viewer | File | Open. Locate
the LXEbook on the MX5X and ‘open’ the file.
See Also: Install LXEbooks on the LXE Manuals CD.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
26
Enter Data
Enter Data
You can enter data into the MX5X through several different methods. The Scanner aperture
provides barcode data entry, the RS-232 serial port or the IR port are used to input/output data,
and the keypad provides manual entry.
Mobile devices with a touch screen and Microsoft CE software can use a stylus to input data, the
COM ports and/or the keypad. An input panel (virtual keyboard) is available in applications that
expect keyed input.
Keypad Entry
The keypad is used to manually input data that is not collected otherwise. Almost any function that
a full sized computer keyboard can provide is duplicated on the MX5X keypad but it may take a
few more keystrokes to accomplish a keyed task. Please refer to Appendix A – Key Maps for
instruction on the specific keypresses to access all keypad functions.
Almost every key has two or three different functions. The primary alpha or numeric character is
printed on the key.
The Orange or Blue keys are pressed when you want to use a 2nd key function. For example, when
you press a Blue or Orange key (the 2nd key), then press the key that has the desired secondfunction key, the second-function key is the ‘active’ key. The specific 2nd character is printed
above the corresponding key in either Orange or Blue.
Stylus Data Entry
Note:
This section is directed to the MX5X daily user. The assumption is that the mobile device
has been configured and the touch panel calibrated by the System Administrator prior to
releasing the MX5X for daily use. The touch screen should be calibrated before initial
use.
The stylus performs the same function as the mouse that is used to point to and click elements on a
desk top computer. The stylus is used in the same manner as a mouse – single tap or double tap to
select menu options, drag the stylus across text to select, hold the stylus down to activate slider
bars, etcetera.
Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil. Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the
stylus then remove the stylus from the screen. The touch screen responds to an actuation force
(touch) of 4 oz. (or greater) of pressure.
The stylus can be used in conjunction with the keyboard and scanner and an input/output device
connected to a serial port.
Touch the stylus to the field of the data entry form to receive the next data feed.
The cursor begins to flash in the field.
The unit is ready to accept data from either the physical keypad, virtual keyboard, integrated
scanner or a scanner connected to the serial port on the cradle, if the scanner applet is configured
correctly.
Note:
Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display. Never use
an actual pen, pencil, abrasive or sharp object to write on the touch screen.
See Also: Chapter 3, section titled Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Enter Data
27
Scanner Entry
Read all cautions, warnings and labels before using the laser scanner.
To scan with the laser barcode reader, point the laser window towards a barcode and press the
Scan button. You will see a red laser beam strike the barcode.
Correct Scan
Incorrect Scan
Incorrect Scan
Figure 1-18 Scan Beam
Align the red beam so that the barcode is centered within the beam. The laser beam must cross the
entire barcode. Move the MX5X towards or away from the barcode so that the barcode takes up
approximately two-thirds the width of the beam.
Green
Red
Figure 1-19 Scanner LED Location
The Scanner Active LED turns red when the laser beam is on. Following a barcode scan and read
the Scanner Active LED turns green for two seconds and the MX5X beeps, indicating a successful
scan. If the scan was unsuccessful, the Scanner Active LED turns off and a different beep
sequence is heard.
The laser engine and Scanner Active LED automatically turn off after a successful or unsuccessful
read. The scanner is ready to scan again after the Scan key (or trigger on the handle if installed) is
released, or after the green LED turns off following a successful scan.
Data Entry and Tethered Scanners
Please refer to the tethered scanner manufacturer’s user guide for instruction.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
28
Enter Data
Input Panel
The Input Panel is always available. Tap the virtual keyboard icon at the bottom of the screen to
put the input panel on the display. Using the stylus:
• Tap the Shift key to type one capital letter.
• Tap the CAPS key to type all capital letters.
• Tap the au key to access symbols.
Figure 1-20 Input Panel
RS-232 Data Entry
The MX5X accepts input from an RS-232 device connected to either RS-232 port.
Note:
ActiveSync (running on the desktop computer) will not transfer files over the RS-232
connector on the MX5 cradle IF the scanner port is configured for COM 1 External.
Refer to ActiveSync Processes in Chapter 3 of this guide.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Getting Help
29
Getting Help
All LXE manuals are now available on one CD and they can also be viewed/downloaded from the
LXE ServicePass or PartnerPass website. Contact your LXE representative to obtain the LXE
Manuals CD.
You can also get help from LXE by calling the telephone numbers listed on the LXE Manuals CD,
in the file titled Contacting LXE. This information is also available on the LXE website’s
ServicePass or PartnerPass page.
Explanations of terms and acronyms used in this manual are located in the file titled LXE
Technical Glossary on the LXE Manuals CD.
Manuals
This document is one in a series covering the MX5X family of computers:
For MX5X computers equipped with Microsoft Windows CE Operating Systems:
• MX5X User’s Guide
• MX5X Reference Guide
• LXEbook – MX5X User’s Guide (can be downloaded to the MX5X device from the LXE
Manuals CD.)
For MX5X Intrinsically Safe (I-SAFE) computers equipped with Microsoft Windows CE
Operating System:
• MX5X Intrinsically Safe User’s Guide
• MX5X Reference Guide
• LXEbook – MX5X I-Safe User’s Guide (can be downloaded to the I-SAFE device from the
LXE Manuals CD.)
For both MX5X and MX5 Pocket PC computers, the following are interchangeable (except where
noted):
• MX5 Cradle Reference Guide
• MX5 Multi-charger Reference Guide
• MX5 Belt Battery System (LXE suggests using this accessory specifically with a Low
Temperature MX5X. Do not use the MX5 Belt Battery System with an MX5-IS in a hazardous
location. )
Additional Manuals
•
•
•
•
RFTerm Reference Guide
LXE Security Primer
CE API Programmer’s Guide
Integrated Scanner Programming Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
30
Getting Help
Accessories
Note:
Bluetooth access, Bluetooth modules and Bluetooth Manager are not supported by LXE.
MX5X Standard
Note:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Items with a Green letter R in the first column are ROHS-compliant. Please contact your LXE
representative when ordering ROHS-compliant items as the part number may have changed. Items
without the letter R may have received ROHS-compliance after this guide was published.
Holding Accessories
Strap, Hand, Nylon
Handle, w/wrist strap
Handle, Neoprene slip-on cover
Case and strap, MX5X w/o handle
Case and strap, MX5X w/handle
Holster, MX5X w/o handle, w/o belt
Holster, MX5X w/handle, w/o belt
Holster, MX5X w/handle, w/o belt
Belt, Use with Holsters
Belt, Heater Battery, MX5 (US only)
Charger, Heater Battery Belt, MX5 (US only )
Cable, Heater Battery Belt to MX5, 12” US only (US only)
Cable, Heater Battery Belt to MX5, 1.5M (Non-US)
Miscellaneous
Stylus, Tethered
Stylus, 6 Pack Replacement, MX5
Software, CE .NET 4.2 SDK, MX5 CE
Battery Chargers and Battery
6 Unit Charger w/ US Power Cable
6 Unit Charger w/o US Power Cable
Tool, Battery Removal 5 Pack, MX5
Battery, Li-Ion
Cradles and Power Supplies
Vehicle Mount Cradle (Power Adapter Required)
Standard Desktop Cradle
Enhanced Desktop Cradle, MX5
Enhanced Desktop Cradle, Ethernet, MX5X
Power Supply, AC/DC w/ US Power Cable
Power Supply AC/DC w/o Power Cable
Power Supply, 12V, Bare Wire Input, MX5X Output
Power Supply, 12V Auto to VM Cradle
Power Supply, 12V Auto to VM Cradle (EU)
Power Supply, 24V-72V, Bare Wire Input, MX5X Output
MX5A401HANDSTRAP
MX5A406HANDLE
MX5A407HANDLECOVER
MX5A402CASE1
MX5A403CASE2
MX5A404HOLSTER1
MX5A405HOLSTER2
9000A407HOLSTERHAND
9200L67
MX5A382HTRBATTBELT
MX5A383BATTBELTCHGR
MX5A053CBLBATTBELT
MX5A054CBLBATTBELTWW
9000A507STYLUS
MX5A501STYLUS
MX5XA505CENET42SDK
MX5A385CHGR6US
MX5A385CHGR6WW
9000A508BATTERYTOOL
MX5A379BATT
MX5A001VMCRADLE
MX5A002DESKCRADLE
MX5A003EDESKCRADLE
MX5A004ETHDESKCRADLE
MX5A305PSACUS
MX5A305PSACWW
MX5A306PS12V
MX5A380PSAUTO12VUS
MX5A381PSAUTO12VWW
9000A316PS24V72VMX5
Cables for Cradle and MX5/MX5X Serial Ports
R
R
R
R
Cable, MX5 to PC RS-232, D26 to DA9F
Cable, MX5 to PC USB, D26 to USB
Cable, MX5 D26 to Ethernet RJ45, MX5X
Cable, MX5 D26 to USB Host Receptacle, MX5X
MX5X Reference Guide
MX5A051CBLD26DA9F
MX5A052CBLD26USB
MX5A057CBLETHD26RJ45
MX5A058CBLD26USBHOST
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Getting Help
31
Tethered Scanners (requires 3” D26 to DA9M cable)
R
R
R
R
R
R
Cable, MX5X for Powerscan, 3”, D26 to DA9M
Scanner, Powerscan, SR, 8’ Cbl
Strap with Scanner clip
Scanner, Powerscan, SR, 12’ Cbl
Scanner, Powerscan, LR, 8’ Cbl
Scanner, Powerscan, LR, 12’ Cbl
Scanner, Powerscan, XLR, 8’ Cbl
Scanner, Powerscan, XLR, 12’ Cbl
MX5A055CBL3IND26D9M
8300A326SCNRPWRSR8DA9F
9000A411SCNRSTRAP
8300A327SCNRPWRSR12DA9F
8310A326SCNRPWRLR8DA9F
8310A327SCNRPWRLR12DA9F
8320A326SCNRPWRXLR8DA9F
8320A327SCNRPWRXLR12DA9F
MX5X ISAFE Device
Note:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
US and Canada only.
Holding Accessories
Strap, Hand, Nylon
MX5A401HANDSTRAP
Handle, w/wrist strap
MX5A406HANDLE
Handle, Neoprene slip-on cover
MX5A407HANDLECOVER
Case and strap, MX5X w/o handle
MX5A402CASE1
Case and strap, MX5X w/handle
MX5A403CASE2
Holster, MX5X w/o handle, w/o belt
MX5A404HOLSTER1
Holster, MX5X w/handle, w/o belt
9000A407HOLSTERHAND
Belt, Use with Holsters
9200L67
Miscellaneous
Stylus, Tethered
9000A507STYLUS
Stylus, 6 Pack Replacement, MX5
MX5A501STYLUS
Software, CE .NET 4.2 SDK, MX5 CE
MX5XA505CENET42SDK
Rubber dust covers for external data ports. Two covers with
I62-0465-001
tether.
Battery Chargers and Battery
6 Unit Charger w/ US Power Cable, 2 Battery Removal Tools
MX5A385CHGR6US
Tool, Battery Removal 5 Pack, MX5
9000A508BATTERYTOOL
Battery, Li-Ion
MX5A379BATT
Cradles and Power Supplies
Standard Desktop Cradle
MX5A002DESKCRADLE
Enhanced Desktop Cradle, MX5X (Not ISAFE Approved)
MX5A003EDESKCRADLE
Enhanced Desktop Cradle, Ethernet, MX5X
MX5A004ETHDESKCRADLE
Power Supply, AC/DC w/ US Power Cable (Not ISAFE
MX5A305PSACUS
Approved)
Cables for Cradle and MX5/MX5X Serial Ports
Cable, MX5X to PC RS-232, D26 to DA9F
MX5A051CBLD26DA9F
Cable, MX5X to PC USB, D26 to USB
MX5A052CBLD26USB
Cable, MX5X D26 to Ethernet RJ45, MX5X
MX5A057CBLETHD26RJ45
Cable, MX5 D26 to USB Host Receptacle, MX5X
MX5A058CBLD26USBHOST
Note: Use MX5A051CBLD26DA9F or MX5A052CBLD26USB cable for ActiveSync communication
with MX5X cradles.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
32
MX5X Reference Guide
Getting Help
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout
Hardware Configuration
System Hardware
The MX5X hardware configuration is shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-1 System Hardware
Note:
LXE does not distribute nor support headsets connected to the MX5X.
Central Processing Unit
The LXE MX5X CPU is an Intel Xscale processor running at 400 MHz. The operating system is
either Microsoft CE .NET 4.2 or Microsoft CE 5.0, resident in flash memory.
Core Logic
The MX5X supports the following I/O components of the core logic:
• One PCMCIA slot (supports Type II PCMCIA cards).
• One compact Flash card slot (supports Type I and II cards) in the rear hatch.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
34
Hardware Configuration
•
•
•
•
One ATA compact Flash card slot under the main battery pack.
One InfraRed port.
Two serial ports.
One Digitizer Input port (Touchscreen).
Note:
As the MX5X does not have PC Card Management software installed, LXE recommends
purchasing pre-formatted cards.
System Memory
On-board 128MB low power DRAM, 64MB Compact Flash for operating system, 40MB
available for application and data storage.
64MB Flash contains the CE operating system, hardware-specific OEM Adaptation Layer, device
drivers, standard CE applications and utilities. The operating system supports MFC, ATL and
Visual Basic programming languages, TCP/IP and PPP network protocols. The Flash is
configured as the primary boot device.
The computer has one Type I/II CF slot and one ATA CF slot. The MX5X supports and auto
detects up to 256MB of Type I compact flash memory.
Video Subsystem
The touchscreen is a 3/8” (9.65cm) ¼ VGA 240 by 320 pixel TFT Reflective Active Color LCD.
Backlighting is available, can be turned on and off with key sequences. The turn-off timing is
configured through the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display | Backlight icon. The display
controller supports Microsoft CE graphics modes.
A touch screen allows mouse functions (pointing and tapping on the display or Signature Capture)
using an LXE approved stylus.
The color display is optimized for outdoor use but may also be used indoors. The color display has
a CCFL (Cold-Cathode Fluorescent Lighting) front light.
The transflective display appears to have a greenish hue when the unit is in Suspend.
Power Supply
The LXE MX5X uses two batteries for operation.
A replaceable Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) 2800mAh battery pack. The battery pack recharges while in
the MX5X with the computer in a powered cradle or with the optional external power source
attached. The main battery pack can be removed from the MX5X and inserted in the MX5 MultiCharger which simultaneously charges up to six battery packs in four hours.
An internal 450 mAh Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) coin cell backup battery. The backup battery
is recharged directly by an external power source. Full charging of the backup battery will take
seven hours. The backup battery must be replaced by qualified service personnel.
Connecting the MX5X to an external power source, and a main battery in the MX5X, is necessary
for backup battery charging.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Hardware Configuration
35
COM Ports
The MX5X has two mini D serial ports that are configurable using the Start | Settings | Handheld |
Comms tab:
Figure 2-2 COM Ports – Left and Right
Port 1 (left) COM 1
Port 2 (right) COM 4
USB
RS-232
RS-232
AC Power
AC Power
Ethernet
COM 3 is always the IR port.
ActiveSync
Power to the COM ports may be turned on and off.
Note:
ActiveSync is not configurable to work on COM 4. IR ActiveSync application is available.
Refer to ActiveSync Processes in Chapter 3 of this guide.
Audio Interface
An interface is available for headset/microphone operation. When the headset is plugged into the
audio port next to the scan aperture, the speaker at the bottom, front of the MX5X is disabled.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
36
Power Key
Power Key
Note:
Refer to the section titled Power Modes for information relating to the power states of the
MX5X.
The power key is located next to the < Z > key on the keypad. When a battery is inserted in the
MX5X for the first time, the Power key must be pressed.
Quickly tapping the Power key places the MX5X immediately in Suspend mode. Quickly tapping
the Power key again, or connecting the AC adapter, immediately returns the MX5X from Suspend.
Note:
The unit will not suspend on AC power nor when connected through ActiveSync.
Reboot Sequence
When the desktop is displayed or an application begins, the power up (or reboot) sequence is
complete. If you have previously saved your settings 2, they will be restored on reboot.
Warm Reset
Hold down the Power key and the Orange key for 4+ seconds. A warm reset does not affect the
operating system and no data loss occurs.
Cold Reset
Hold down the Power key, the Blue key and the Orange keys for 4+ seconds. The MX5X will
power off, release the keys and the device will power on again.
Calibrating the touchscreen will need to be performed when the MX5X powers on again. See
Chapter 3, section titled Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset.
If needed, change the Time and Date from it’s default values by tapping the Start | Settings |
Control Panel | Date/Time icon.
Important:-- Because of the extreme nature of the Cold Reset, LXE recommends that the Cold
Reset be used only as an emergency procedure and the Warm Reset be used as necessary.
LXE recommends the RegSave file be run when configuration changes are made.
Note:
When performing a Cold Reset on a device, the system will ask if you want to overwrite
files – LXE recommends selecting No and continuing with the Cold Reset process.
If you need to set up the SE1223, SE1224 or SE2223 integrated scanner barcode reading
parameters, please refer to the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide on the LXE Manuals
CD or the LXE ServicePass website.
2
Configuration settings are saved when a configuration applet is exited by tapping OK.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
PCMCIA and Flash Cards
37
PCMCIA and Flash Cards
Note:
When removing or installing PCMCIA and/or Compact Flash cards, protect the MX5X
internal components from electrostatic discharge.
Use and operation of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA)
device (e.g. PC card) is dependent upon both the type of device installed and the application(s)
running on the computer.
Make sure the proper software is pre-loaded and wireless client cards are properly configured.
The compact flash card under the main battery pack is ATA only and is intended to store program
CAB files, MX5X utilities, the registry and the registry backup information.
Figure 2-3 PCMCIA Wireless Client Card and Flash Card Location
Note:
As there is no PC Card management software loaded on the MX5X, LXE recommends
purchasing preformatted PC and Flash cards as well as preformatted Compact Flash
disks.
Slot 1
The MX5X has one internal PCMCIA slot that conforms electrically to PCMCIA 2.1
specifications. The PC Slot supplies .75 of an amp at 3V, 5V and for dual 3.3V/5V cards. Battery
voltage is supplied through unused pin 35 to support a WAN wireless client in the slot, if installed.
The PC slot is accessible by the use of a Phillips screwdriver to remove the back hatch of the unit.
It accepts Type II cards only. Slot 0 accepts PCMCIA 2.4GHz wireless client cards.
Note:
Care must be taken, when reattaching the back hatch to the device, to preserve the water
tight seal.
Slot 0
The MX5X has one internal compact Flash card port that supports Type I and II CF cards.
The wireless client drivers are stored on the compact flash card in the ATA CF slot (under the
main battery pack). During the cold boot process, the JmpStart program accesses the compact
flash card and loads the wireless client drivers and any saved parameters.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
38
PCMCIA and Flash Cards
Installation / Removal
Equipment required: A screwdriver (not supplied by LXE)
• LXE recommends that installation/removal of cards be performed on a clean, well-lit surface.
• Anti-static protection is required when installing/removing cards. (Not supplied by LXE)
If you anticipate keeping a card out of the MX5X for a long period of time place it in a static-free
storage container. Store in an area that is protected from dirt, moisture, and electrostatic contact.
PCMCIA Cards
Installation
1.
Using a screwdriver, loosen the back hatch of the MX5X and carefully remove or loosen all
cables. Disconnect the antenna from the network card.
2.
Set both the back and the screws aside.
3.
Slide the PC Card, connector side first, into the slot until it seats. Use caution not to pull or
snag the antenna connector.
4.
If the PC Card is difficult to seat in the slot, remove the card, turn it around and re-install.
Removal
Grasp the top of the PC Card and pull it straight upward to remove.
Use caution not to pull or snag the antenna connector on a network card, if installed.
Flash Cards
Installation
Place the MX5X into Suspend. Disconnect the AC adapter from the MX5X.
• ATA CF Card – Loosen then remove the main battery pack.
• Hatch CF Card – Loosen then remove the back cover of the MX5X taking care not to pinch or
twist any cables. Follow the instructions for removing the PCMCIA card, if installed.
Insert the CF card in the recessed slot, label side uppermost.
Replace the main battery pack (or the PC card and back cover of the MX5) and perform a warm
reset. Always perform a warm reset when exchanging one Flash card for another.
Removal
Place the MX5X into Suspend. Disconnect the AC adapter from the MX5X.
• ATA CF Card – Loosen then remove the main battery pack.
• Hatch CF Card – Loosen then remove the back cover of the MX5X taking care not to pinch or
twist any cables. Follow the instructions for removing the PCMCIA card, if necessary.
Carefully lift the CF card up and away from the recessed slot.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
PCMCIA and Flash Cards
39
Accessing the Data on CF and PCMCIA Cards
ATA CF Card
Tap the Start | Programs | Windows Explorer | System folder.
Hatch CF Card
Tap the Start | Programs | Windows Explorer | Storage Card (Storage Card 2 when the PCMCIA
slot is not empty).
Hatch PCMCIA Card
Tap the Start | Programs | Windows Explorer | Storage Card.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
40
COM Ports
COM Ports
The MX5X supports three COM port options.
Scanner Port
RS-232 Port, Ethernet,
USB and AC Power
(COM 1, left)
RS-232 Port, AC Power
(COM 4, right)
IR Port (COM 3)
Figure 2-4 COM Ports
COM 1 port is always the left (with screen facing up) RS-232 port on the base of the MX5X.
COM 1 port accepts RS-232, USB, USB Host, Ethernet and AC power connectors.
The RS-232 port on the docking cradle is ‘connected’ to the MX5X when a tethered scanner is
connected to the RS-232 port on the MX5 cradle, and the MX5X is in the cradle. The cradle must
be powered by an alternate AC or DC power source to enable tethered scanner use.
The COM 3 port is always the IR port on the base of the MX5X.
COM 4 is always the right (with screen facing up) RS-232 port on the base of the MX5X. COM 4
port accepts RS-232 and AC power connectors.
To edit Scanner Com Port parameters, tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner. Change the
parameter values and tap OK to save the changes.
An RJ45 Ethernet port is on the Enhanced Desktop Cradle with Ethernet Port.
USB Port
The USB port requires a DB26 to USB cable (available from LXE). The serial port/USB port also
supports serial data transfer (using a null modem cable) and USB I/O at 1.5 Mbps. The MX5X
automatically detects the cable configuration. Host and client is automatically configured based on
the type of cable used.
Refer to section titled Accessories in this guide for part numbers for the DB26-USB cable and the
null modem cable.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
COM Ports
41
Integrated Scanner Port (Optional)
The MX5X integrated barcode scanner is used to collect barcode data from any nearby compatible
barcode label. Depending on the size of the barcode, size of bars and spacing and quality of the
barcode, the scanner is used to read barcodes between 3 in (7.6 cm) and 30 in (76 cm). The
barcode scanner reads UPC/EAN, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Code 128, Codabar
and MSI symbologies.
The internal barcode scanner scans only when either Scan button is pressed or the scan trigger is
pressed, if installed. Scan buttons have no effect on tethered barcode scanners connected to the
RS-232 port. The Scanner LED illuminates during any integrated scanner activation.
Look on the label on the back of the MX5X. The type of installed scan engine should be clearly
labeled and may be one of the following:
•
•
•
•
Symbol SE 1224 HP
Symbol SE 1223 LR
Symbol SE 1223 ALR
Symbol SE 2223 2D
Use the scanner label information if you need to program the Symbol scanner engine using the
barcodes in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide (available on the LXE Manuals CD or the
LXE ServicePass website).
Note:
Use the scanner control panel to set up using both the integrated scanner and a tethered
scanner.
To switch active scanner Com ports tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel |Scanner | Main tab.
Note:
If there is no internal scanner, Internal is greyed out. On units without an internal
scanner, controls on Port 1 and Port 2 are greyed out – the COM1 external control can
be selected.
To assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits to Com 1, tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel
| Scanner | COM1 tab.
If the scanner needs to be configured, refer to the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide on the
LXE Manuals CD.
Tethered Scanners (Optional)
Note:
LXE cable number MX5A055CBL3IND26D9M must be used with PowerScan® SR, LR
and XLR tethered scanners connected directly to the MX5X device. Do not connect
Symbol® tethered scanners to the MX5X device or to this cable.
The MX5X Scan buttons have no effect on tethered barcode scanners connected to a serial port on
the MX5X or vehicle cradle. Tethered scanners read barcode scans only when the trigger on the
tethered scanner is pressed.
To set the MX5X to use a tethered scanner, tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Main
tab.
Tap the Send Key Messages (WEDGE) checkbox. The COM port that accepts the scanner data
can be configured for data rate, parity, stop bits and data bits using the COM1 tab.
If the tethered scanner is powered by the mobile device, enable Power Output in Start | Settings |
Control Panel | Handheld | Comms tab.
See Also:
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Tethered Barcode Scanner Data Entry Using the MX5 Cradle.
MX5X Reference Guide
42
COM Ports
Data Entry and Tethered Scanners
Please refer to the tethered scanner manufacturer’s user guide for instruction.
RS-232 Serial Ports
RS-232 connection is made through an RS-232 serial port. The connector is an industry-standard
RS-232 DB26 female connector. The MX5X automatically detects the cable configuration type.
Figure 2-5 RS-232 Ports
COM1
Cable connections: RS-232, Ethernet, USB and AC Power.
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
SIGNAL
CHG +
CHG +
CHG +
DCD1
RX1
TX1
DTR1
DSR1
RTS1
CTS1
SHIELD
USB +5V
USB +
PIN
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
SIGNAL
CHG GND
CHG GND
CHG GND
TPO +
TPO GND
TPI +
VCCOUT2
TPI RI_VCCOUT1
SHIELD
USB COM
USB -
COM4
Cable connections: RS-232 and AC Power.
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
MX5X Reference Guide
SIGNAL
PIN
SIGNAL
CHG +
14
CHG GND
CHG +
15
CHG GND
CHG +
16
CHG GND
DCD2
17
NC
RX2
18
NC
TX2
19
GND
DTR2
20
NC
DSR2
21
NC
RTS2
22
NC
CTS2
23
RI_VCCOUT2
NC
24
NC
NC
25
NC
NC
26
NC
Figure 2-6 DB26 RS-232 Pinouts
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
COM Ports
43
USB Port
The USB port (the left port when the MX5X is face up) requires a DB26 to USB cable (available
from LXE). The connector is an industry-standard RS-232 DB26 female connector.
Figure 2-7 MX5X USB Port
The serial port/USB port also supports serial data transfer (using a null modem cable) and USB
I/O at 1.5 Mbps. The MX5X automatically detects the cable configuration. Refer to section titled
Accessories in this guide for part numbers for the DB26-USB cable and the null modem cable.
An optional LXE USB cable is required to adapt the connection to a standard USB connector.
Please refer to section titled Accessories for the USB part number when ordering.
MX5X Cable End
1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 To 3
4 Not Used
5 To 4
6 Not Used
7 To 2
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
Cable Signal
USB Cable End
1 Not Used
2 From 7
D + (Green Wire)
3 From 3
4 From 5
Ground (Black Wire)
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
D – (White Wire)
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
Figure 2-8 USB-Serial Cable Pinouts
IR Port
The InfraRed (IR) port provides a means of transferring information to a device with a similar port
and the proper software. The IR port can be used to communicate with printers or a host computer
with the use of an adapter.
Figure 2-9 IR Port on MX5X
The IR Port is specified as COM 3 and is a bi-directional half-duplex infrared port. It supports the
Slow IrDA (Infrared Data Access) PHY Layer standard that allows communication speeds up to
115k baud.
When sending data through the IR port to another MX5X IR port, make sure both units are in
close proximity to each other. The IR operating envelope has a distance range of 2 cm (0.79
inches) to 15 centimeters (6 inches) with a viewing angle of 30 degrees.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
44
Programmable Buttons
Programmable Buttons
Figure 2-10 Scan Buttons
The Scan buttons can be programmed by the System Administrator to perform the following
functions:
Disabled
Key press has no effect.
Scan
Pressing this key activates the laser scanner.
Enter
Pressing this key confirms a forms entry or transmits information. See the
following section titled Enter Key Function in The Keypad section.
Tab
Pressing this key moves the cursor to the next input field.
Field
Exit
IBM5250/TN5250 units only. Pressing this key exits an input field. See
the following section titled Field Exit Key Function in The Keypad section.
Esc
Pressing this key cancels the current operation.
The default setting for the right button is Enter. The default setting for the left button is Enter.
When the MX5X does not have an integrated scanner, both buttons default to Enter keys and the
Scan selection is greyed out. The buttons can be programmed to perform other functions when
there is no internal scanner.
How To: Program the Scan Buttons
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Keys tab
Tap the desired control option. Tap OK to close this menu option. Tap X to cancel changes. Any
changes made are in effect immediately.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Power Modes
45
Power Modes
Figure 2-11 Power Modes – On, Suspend and Off
1.
On
2.
Tap Power key or the power has failed
3.
Power key or connect to AC power supply
4.
Suspend
5.
Backup battery and main battery depleted
6.
Off
7.
Power On
On Mode
The Display
When the display is On:
• the keyboard, touchscreen and all peripherals function normally
• the display backlight is on until the Backlight timer expires
The MX5X
After a new MX5X has been received, a charged main battery inserted, and the Power key tapped,
the MX5X is always On until both batteries are drained completely of power.
When the main battery and backup battery are drained completely, the unit is in the Off mode. The
unit transitions from the Off mode to the On mode when a charged main battery is inserted or
external power is applied.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
46
Power Modes
LED Indicators
LED
When On ...
Integrated barcode scanner function.
Scanner Active
Red – scanning.
Green – good scan.
Main Battery Charging
Left Green LED flashes. When the battery is fully
charged, the green LED remains lit.
Suspend Mode
The MX5X
The Suspend mode is entered when the unit is inactive for a predetermined period of time or the
user taps the Power key.
MX5X Suspend timers are set using Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power | Schemes tab.
A Power key tap wakes the unit and resets the display backlight timers.
Connecting the MX5X to AC power wakes the unit and resets the display backlight timers.
When the unit wakes up, the Display Backlight and the Power Off timers begin the countdown
again. When any one of the above events occurs prior to the Power Off timer expiring, the timer
starts the countdown again.
The MX5X must be placed in Suspend mode before hot-swapping the main battery.
Off Mode
The unit is in Off Mode when the main battery and the backup battery are depleted. Insert a fully
charged main battery and press the Power key to turn the MX5X On.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
The Keypad
47
The Keypad
Figure 2-12 The ANSI / Batch Keypad
1
2
3
4
5
Scanner Active LED
Left and Right Scan
Blue and Orange 2nd Function Key
Ctrl
Enter
6
7
8
9
10
Tab
Spc
Power On/Off
Alt
Shift
The keymaps (keypress sequences) are located in Appendix A – Key Maps.
Scan Key Function
When programmed as Scan keys, either the left or right Scan key activates the scanner. The
internal scanner scans only when the Scan button is pressed (or when the scan trigger is pressed on
the optional trigger handle, if installed).
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
48
The Keypad
Enter Key Function
The Enter key is used to confirm a forms entry or to transmit information. How it is used is
determined by the application running on the computer.
2nd Key Function
The Orange (top left) and Blue (top right) keys are 2nd keys used to activate the 2nd functions of the
keypad. Printed above many keys are small characters, in either orange (on the left side of the key)
or blue (on the right side of the key), that represent the 2nd function of that key. Using the 2nd key
activates the second key function. Note that the 2nd key only stays active for one keystroke. Each
time you need to use the 2nd function you must press the Orange or Blue 2nd key. To cancel a 2nd
function before pressing another key, press the 2nd key again.
Ctrl Key Function
The Ctrl key enables the control functions of the keypad. This function is similar to a regular
keyboard’s Control key. Note that the Ctrl key only stays active for one keystroke. Each time you
need to use a Ctrl function, you need to press the Ctrl key before pressing the desired key.
Alt Key Function
The Alt key enables the alternate functions of the keypad. This function is similar to a regular
keyboard’s Alt key. Note that the Alt key only stays active for one keystroke. Each time you need
to use an alternate function, you need to press the Alt key before pressing the desired key.
Shft Key Function
The Shft key enables the shifted functions of the keypad. This function is similar to a regular
keyboard’s Shift key. Note that the Shift key only stays active for one keystroke. Each time you
need to use a Shifted function, you need to press the Shft key before pressing the desired key.
When the Shft key is pressed the next key is determined by the major key legends, i.e., the alpha
keys display lower case letters – when CAPS is On alpha characters are capitalized. For example,
when CAPS is On and the Shft key and the G key are pressed, a lower case g is displayed.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
The Keypad
49
Spc Key Function
The Spc key adds a space to the line of data on the display. This function is similar to a regular
keyboard’s Spacebar. Note that the Spc key only stays active for one keystroke.
Field Exit Function
IBM TN5250 specific keypad only. The left Scan key can be programmed as a Field Exit key. The
Field Exit key is used to exit an input field. If the field is an Auto Enter field, the auto transmit
function is activated. Refer to the Programmable Buttons section for instruction.
Mode Key Functions
Caps Key and CapsLock Mode
This function is similar to a regular keyboard’s CapsLock key. Note that the CapsLock mode stays
active until the CapsLock key sequence is pressed again. Each time you need to use a Caps
function, you need to press the Caps key sequence first. To cancel a CapsLock function press the
Caps key sequence again.
The CapsLock key sequence is Blue key then the <Tab> key.
• No CapsLock AND No Shift keypress – result is a lowercase letter.
• CapsLock OR Shift – result is an uppercase letter.
• CapsLock AND Shift keypress – result is a lowercase letter.
A Capital A is displayed in the taskbar when the device is in CapsLock mode or the Caps Key has
been pressed and the next key (to be capitalized) has not been pressed.
Keypress Sequences
See Appendix A for key maps for all keypads.
Input Panel
The Input Panel is always available. Tap the keyboard icon at the bottom of the screen to put the
input panel on the display. See Input Panel in Chapter 1. If the touch screen has been disabled, the
input panel is not available.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
50
Accessing Files on the Compact Flash Card
Accessing Files on the Compact Flash Card
Double tap My Computer then select System. Files stored on the Compact Flash (CF) card are
listed.
Touchscreen
Figure 2-13 Touchscreen
The MX5X Touchscreen is an Active Color LCD unit capable of supporting QVGA graphics
modes. Display size is 240 x 320 pixels in portrait orientation. The covering is designed to resist
stains. The touchscreen allows signature capture and touch input. A pen stylus is included. The
touchscreen responds to an actuation force (touch) of 4 oz. of pressure (or greater).
The color display has a CCFL (Cold-Cathode Fluorescent Lighting) front light. When the device is
in Suspend mode, the reflective 256 color display appears to have a greenish hue.
The display is automatically turned off when the MX5X enters the Suspend state.
See Also: Chapter 3, section titled Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset.
Display and Keypad Backlight Timer
When the Backlight timer expires the display and keypad backlight is turned off.
The default value for the battery power timer is 1 minute. The default value for the external power
timer is 10 minutes.
The backlight timer dims the backlight on the touchscreen at the end of the specified time and
turns the keypad backlight off. When the display wakes up, the Backlight timers begin the
countdown again.
See the section titled Set the Display Backlight Timer in Chapter 1 Introduction, section titled
Quick Start.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Cleaning the Glass Display/Scanner Aperture
51
Cleaning the Glass Display/Scanner Aperture
Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the scan aperture and display. If the glass
becomes soiled or smudged, clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex®
without vinegar or use Isopropyl Alcohol. Do not use paper towels or harsh-chemical-based
cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the glass surface. Use a clean, damp, lint-free
cloth. Do not scrub optical surfaces. If possible, clean only those areas which are soiled.
Lint/particulates can be removed with clean, filtered canned air.
As the MX5X screen is the same size as commercially available Palm® handheld devices, static
screen protectors that fit the Palm device will also fit the MX5X. Static screen protectors for the
MX5X are not available from or supported by LXE.
Speaker
Figure 2-14 Speaker Location
The MX5X Speaker has a loudness of at least 87 dB (1500 Hz) at 10 cm measured from the front
of the unit. The Speaker volume is adjustable via the keypad or the Settings or by an application
through the use of an API call. There are 5 distinct volume levels. The minimum volume level is 0
(no sound) with a default setting of 3. The volume sticks at maximum and minimum levels.
The speaker is disabled when a headset is plugged into the Audio Jack on the endcap. The audio
volume can be adjusted to a comfortable level for the user. The volume is increased or decreased
one step each time the volume key sequence is pressed.
Speaker volume is first enabled and adjusted using the ‘Audio’ icon. The default value for Audio
is midrange Volume and all sounds enabled. When volume and sounds are enabled, speaker
volume can be adjusted using the volume key sequence, if desired.
Note:
An application may override the control of the speaker volume. Turning off sounds saves
power and prolongs battery life.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
52
Speaker
Set The Audio / Speaker Volume
The audio volume can be adjusted to a comfortable level for the user. The MX5X has an internal
speaker and a jack for an external headset.
Using the Keypad
Note:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Audio must have the options in the Enable sounds for
checked before the following key sequences will adjust the volume.
To adjust speaker volume, locate the <V> key and the Blue key.
Adjust the speaker volume by pressing the:
• Blue key, then the <V> key to enter Volume change mode.
• Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to adjust volume until the speaker volume is
satisfactory.
• Press the Enter key to exit this mode.
As the arrow keys are tapped, the computer beeps each time the volume increases or decreases in
decibel range.
Using the Touch Screen
Tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Audio icon.
Tabs
System
Routing
Volume
Extra
Events
Actions
Moving the slider between Soft and Loud adjusts the speaker volume. Enable or
disable sounds for each function by tapping the check boxes.
Use these options to determine where the audio output goes. Enable or disable the
headset and speaker, and microphone gain.
As the volume scrollbar is moved between up and down for System volume, the
computer beeps each time the volume increases or decreases in decibel range.
As the volume scrollbar is moved between up and down, the computer beeps each
time the volume increases or decreases in decibel range for Bay Digital, CRMA
Radio and Mixer volume.
Choose sounds to play for Windows CE events or create your own sound scheme.
Troubleshooting
Blue+V puts the MX5X in Volume Adjust mode.
Shift+Blue+Shift puts the unit in Blue Mode which, when followed by <V>, puts the unit in
Volume Adjust mode as well.
If the MX5X is responding to touch input, but does not respond to keypad (hard or soft) input, the
MX5X may still be in Volume Adjust mode.
Press Enter to cancel (exit) Volume Adjust mode. After pressing enter, the MX5X should start
responding to key input.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Power Supply
53
Power Supply
The MX5X computer is designed to work with a Lithium-Ion (Li-ion) battery from LXE. Under
normal conditions it should last approximately eight to ten hours before requiring a recharge. The
more you use the scanner or the wireless transmitter, the shorter the time required between battery
recharges.
A suspended MX5X maintains the date and time for a minimum of two days using a main battery
that has reached the Low Warning point and a fully charged backup battery. The MX5X retains
data, during a main battery hot swap, for at least 5 minutes.
Note:
New main battery packs must be charged prior to use. This process takes up to four hours
in an LXE Multi-Charger and three hours when the MX5X is connected to external power
through it’s power jack.
Checking Battery Status
Tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power | Status tab. Battery level, power status and charge
remaining is displayed.
Important Battery Information
Important:
If the main battery has been out of the MX5X for an extended period of time or
becomes fully discharged or dead, a fully charged backup battery will last for up to 24 hours. If
this happens, the device will cold reset the next time power is applied from either AC power or a
charged main battery. A cold reset will cause loss of data and custom programs. Always store
unused MX5’s with a fully charged main battery pack installed.
Until the main battery and backup battery are completely depleted, the MX5X is always drawing
power from the batteries (On).
New batteries must be fully charged prior to use.
Whenever possible, use the AC power adapter with the MX5X to conserve the main battery and
charge the backup battery.
When a new battery is installed in the MX5X for the first time (or when the backup battery is
completely depleted), the Time and Date must be re-set.
Handling Batteries Safely
Never dispose of a battery in a fire. This may cause an explosion.
Do not replace individual cells in a battery pack.
Do not attempt to pry open the battery pack shell.
Be careful when handling any battery. If a battery is broken or shows signs of leakage do not
attempt to charge it. Dispose of it using proper procedures.
Never place a battery in a pocket or case with keys, coins, or other metal objects.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
54
Power Supply
Caution
Nickel-based cells contain a chemical solution which burns skin, eyes, etc. Leakage from
cells is the only possible way for such exposure to occur. In this event, rinse the affected
area thoroughly with water. If the solution contacts the eyes, get immediate medical
attention.
NiCd and Li-Ion batteries are capable of delivering high currents when accidentally shorted.
Accidental shorting can occur when contact is made with jewelry, metal surfaces,
conductive tools, etc., making the objects very hot. Never place a battery in a pocket or case
with keys, coins, or other metal objects.
Main Battery Pack
The main battery pack has a rugged plastic enclosure that is designed to withstand the ordinary
rigors of an industrial environment. Exercise care when transporting the battery pack making sure
it does not come in contact with excessive heat or any power source other than the LXE MultiCharger or the MX5X unit.
When the main battery pack is properly installed in the unit it provides up to eight hours of
operation depending upon use and accessories installed. The battery pack is resistant to impact
damage and falls of up to four feet to a concrete surface.
Under normal conditions it should last approximately eight hours before requiring a recharge. The
more you use the scanner or the wireless transmitter, the shorter the time required between battery
recharges.
Battery Hot-Swapping
When the main battery power level is low, the MX5X will signal the user with a warning dialog
box on the display and a warning tone. The low battery warning notice and tones continue until
the main battery is replaced, the battery completely depletes, external power is applied to the
MX5X using an AC Adapter, or the MX5X is placed in a powered cradle.
You can replace the main battery by first placing the device in Suspend Mode then removing the
discharged battery (with the battery removal tool) and installing a charged battery within a five
minute time limit (or before the backup battery depletes).
When the main battery is removed, the MX5X remains in suspend mode, the display is turned off
and the backup battery continues to power the unit for at least five minutes. Though data is
retained, the MX5X cannot be used until a charged main battery pack is installed. After installing
the new battery, the MX5X automatically transitions to the On state. Full operational recovery
from Suspend can take several seconds while the wireless client (if installed) is reestablishing an
RF link.
If the backup battery depletes before a fully charged main battery can be inserted, the MX5X will
turn OFF and the Power key must be tapped after a main battery pack is installed.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Power Supply
55
Low Battery Warning
It is recommended that the main battery pack be removed (with the battery removal tool) and
replaced when it’s energy depletes. When the Low Battery Warning appears perform an orderly
shut down, minimizing the operation of any installed devices and insuring any information is
saved that should be.
When the unit is in an ON state, a low battery warning dialog box appears on the display and a
warning tone is emitted.
Note:
Once you receive the Low Battery Warning, you have approximately 5 minutes to
perform an orderly shutdown and replace the main battery pack before the unit powers
off. The Low Battery Warning will transition the mobile device to Suspend before the
computer powers off.
Battery Status LEDs
Main Battery Charging
Left GREEN LED slow flashing.
Main Battery Fully Charged
Left GREEN LED stops flashing; is solid ON.
Charge / battery fault
Left GREEN LED has quick double flashes.
Backup Battery
The MX5X has a backup battery that is designed to provide limited-duration electrical power in
the event of main battery pack failure. The backup battery is a 450 mAh Nickel Metal Hydride
(NiMH) battery that is factory installed in the unit. The energy needed to charge the backup
battery comes from an AC adapter.
It takes several hours of operation before the backup battery is capable of supporting the operation
of the computer. The duration of backup battery life is dependent upon operation of the MX5X,
it’s features and any operating applications.
The backup battery is replaced by LXE.
Note:
This mobile device’s backup battery maintains it’s charge by drawing power from the
main battery pack. Always store unused devices with a fully charged main battery pack
installed. LXE recommends an in-use mobile device be frequently connected to an
external power source to maintain optimum power levels in the main battery pack and the
backup battery. When the backup battery and main battery pack are dead, the mobile
device reverts to setup defaults when a fully charged main battery pack is installed and
the device is powered On again.
Battery Maintenance Publication
The LXE publication Getting the Most from Your Batteries is available on the LXE Manuals CD
and on the LXE ServicePass website. It is a single-source guide to battery management. The
publication contains information about battery recharging, conditioning, and other pertinent issues.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
56
Battery Chargers
Battery Chargers
MX5 Multi-Charger (Optional)
Figure 2-15 LXE Multi-Charger
The MX5X main battery pack can be charged in the LXE Multi-Charger.
The main battery pack can be charged in the LXE Multi-Charger. Please refer to the MX5 MultiCharger User’s Guide for instruction.
The multi-charger requires an external power source before battery pack charging can commence.
The external Power Supply for the Multi-charger is shipped with the multi-charger.
MX5 Multi-Chargers are not approved for use in Hazardous Locations.
Figure 2-16 Insert Battery Pack in Charging Pocket
Lower the battery pack straight into the battery charger pocket and push it down firmly. Do not
‘slam’ the battery into the charging cup or drop it into the cup.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in damage to the main battery or the charger.
Please refer to the specific battery charger user’s guide for technical information and
operating instructions.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Battery Chargers
57
External Power Supply for MX5X and Cradle
The MX5X DC adapter can be plugged into either of the D26 pin connectors on the bottom of the
MX5X.
The cradle power jack is located on the back of the cradle.
Figure 2-17 AC/DC 12V Power Supply
Note:
When the MX5X is receiving power through a cradle connected to external power the
Battery Charge LED on the MX5X is green.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
58
Cradles
Cradles
MX5 cradles are not approved for use in Hazardous Locations.
Important:
The cradles are not designed to secure an MX5X with a protective padded case.
The vehicle cradle is not designed to secure an MX5X with a trigger handle. The desktop cradles
will secure mobile device’s with handstraps or trigger handles.
MX5 docking cradles give the MX5X the ability to communicate with a host computer and other
devices. In addition, using wall AC adapters or DC/DC converters, the cradle charges the main
battery. The MX5X can be either On or in Suspend mode while in the cradles.
LXE offers three desktop cradles and one vehicle cradle:
Standard Desktop Cradle requires AC power before main battery charging can commence.
This cradle does not have an active LED on the front housing. MX5A002DESKCRADLE
Enhanced Desktop Cradle requires AC power before main battery charging can commence. It
will charge both the main battery in the MX5X and another MX5X Battery Pack at the same
time. MX5A003EDESKCRADLE
Enhanced Desktop Cradle with Ethernet Port requires AC power before main battery
charging and host/client communications can commence. It will charge both the main battery
in the MX5X device and another main battery pack at the same time.
MX5A004ETHDESKCRADLE
Vehicle Mount Cradle requires AC/DC power before main battery charging can commence.
MX5A001VMCRADLE
Note:
LXE offers a device similar in appearance to the MX5CE device – the LXE MX5 Pocket
PC 2002 device. All MX5 cradles can be used by the MX5s. The Enhanced Desktop
Cradle, developed specifically for the MX5X device, cannot be used by the MX5 Pocket
PC device.
Cradle COM port and power cables are available from LXE. The RS-232 connector is located on
the back of the cradle. When the MX5X is properly docked, the COM 1 RS-232 interface connects
with the DA9 RS-232 port in the cup at the front of the cradle. The cup at the back of the desktop
cradles accept a single Battery Pack for charging.
The Ethernet port is on the Enhanced Desktop Cradle with Ethernet Port.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Cradles
59
Tethered Barcode Scanner Data Entry Using the MX5 Cradle
The MX5X supports an accessory barcode label reading device (a tethered scanner) connected to
the serial port on a vehicle cradle. Keypad data entries can be mixed with barcode data entries.
Any tethered scanner that decodes the barcode internally and outputs an RS-232 data stream may
be used. It sends the data to the MX5X in ASCII format.
The serial port parameters may need to be changed to match the parameters of the tethered
scanner.
When a tethered scanner is connected to the serial port on a vehicle cradle, the MX5X scanner
must be configured as follows:
1.
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Main | either Port 1 or Port 2
2.
Select COM1 External on one of the ports. The tethered scanner must be connected to the
DB9 port on the vehicle cradle. The cradle must be powered by an alternate AC or DC power
source to enable tethered scanner use.
3.
If the tethered scanner is powered by the mobile device, enable Power Output in Start |
Settings | Control Panel | Handheld | Comms tab.
See Also: Tethered Scanners (Optional).
The MX5 Cradle Reference Guide contains cradle installation and technical information.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
60
MX5X Reference Guide
Cradles
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Chapter 3 System Configuration
Introduction
There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the mobile device. Many of
the setup and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and
software installed on the unit. The examples found in this chapter are to be used as examples only,
as the configuration of your specific mobile device may vary. The following sections provide a
general reference for the configuration of the mobile device and some of it’s optional features.
Your MX5X operating system may be Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0. This chapter
presents information and procedures for Windows CE 5 only. The MX5X operating system is
displayed on the Desktop. This is the factory default value for the Desktop Display Background.
Windows CE .NET 4.2 information and procedures are contained in Appendix C – MX5X CE
.NET 4.2.
Windows Operating System
For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE
5.0 user’s guides or the Windows on-line Help application installed in the mobile
device.
This chapter’s contents assumes the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows
options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows 2000 (or later) desktop computers.
Therefore, the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the
MX5X and it’s Windows CE environment.
Network Configuration
Summit client 2.4GHz network configuration is included in Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration. Instruction for Cisco and Symbol clients is located in Appendix C MX5X CE .NET
4.2 section titled Wireless Network Configuration.
Installed Software
Note:
Some standard Windows options require an external modem connection. Modems are not
available from LXE nor supported by LXE.
When you order a mobile device you receive the software files required by the separate programs
needed for operation and wireless communication. The files are loaded by LXE and stored in
folders in the mobile device. This section lists the contents of the folders and the general function
of the files. Files installed in the mobile device are specific to the intended function of the mobile
device.
Files installed in each mobile device configured for a wireless network environment contain
wireless client specific drivers – the drivers for each type of client are specific to the manufacturer
(e.g. Cisco, Symbol, Summit) for the clients installed in the RF environment and are not
interchangeable.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
62
Installed Software
Software Load
The software loaded on the MX5X computer consists of Windows CE 5.0 OS, hardware-specific
OEM Adaptation Layer, device drivers, Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows CE browser and
utilities. The software supported is summarized below:
• Operating System -- Full Operating System License: Includes all operating system
components, including Windows CE 5.0 kernel, file system, communications, connectivity (for
remote APIs), device drivers, events and messaging, graphics, keyboard and touchscreen input,
window management, and common controls.
• Network and Device Drivers
• Wavelink Avalanche (Option)
• LXE AppLock (Option)
• Java (Option) -- Java executables and browser components are handled by the Java option
(when installed).
• Terminal Emulation (Option) -- RFTerm (VT220, TN5250, TN3270). Runs automatically at
the conclusion of each reboot (if installed).
• LXE API Routines (see Accessories for the LXE SDK Kit part number)
Note:
Please contact your LXE representative for software updates and CAB files as they are
released by LXE.
Software Applications
The following applications are included:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WordPad (PocketWord in previous versions of Windows CE)
Pocket Inbox
Word Viewer
Excel Viewer
PDF Viewer
PowerPoint Viewer
Image Viewer
Scanner Wedge (LXE developed)
ActiveSync
Media Player
Transcriber
Internet Explorer
Note that the Viewer applications allow viewing documents, but not editing them.
Note:
Bluetooth access, Bluetooth modules and Bluetooth Manager are not supported by LXE.
Optional
AppLock (Option)
Installed by LXE. The AppLock program is accessed by the user or the AppLock Administrator at
bootup or upon completion of a warm boot. Set parameters using the Administration option in the
Control Panel.
See Chapter 6 - AppLock for instruction.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Installed Software
63
JAVA (Option)
Installed by LXE. Files can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | JEM-CE. Doubletap the
EVM icon to open the EVM Console. A folder of JAVA examples and Plug-ins is also installed
with the JAVA option. LXE does not support all JAVA applications running on the mobile device.
LXE RFTerm (Option)
Installed by LXE. The application can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | RFTerm. Please
refer to Terminal Emulation Setup earlier in this guide for RFTerm quick start instruction. Refer to
the RFTerm Reference Guide on the LXE Manuals CD for complete information and instruction.
WAV files added by the user should be stored in System\LXE\RFTerm\Sounds.
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Option)
The following features are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in
conjunction with the Avalanche Manager. Requires Windows CE 5 operating system.
The mobile device cannot be upgraded to CE 5.0 using the Wavelink / eXpress Config / eXpress
Scan application. The device must be returned to LXE for upgrading or an LXE Field Service
Engineer can be dispatched to upgrade the device. Contact your LXE representative for assistance.
After configuration, Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset. Network
parameter configuration is supported for:
•
•
•
•
•
IP address: DHCP or static IP
RF network SSID
DNS hosts (primary, secondary, tertiary)
Subnet mask
Enabler update
Related Manual: Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers.
The MX5X has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded, but not installed, on the mobile
device when it is shipped from LXE. The installation files are located in the System folder on CE
devices. The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used.
After the installation application is manually run, the Enabler begins normal performance. The
Enabler is by default an auto-launch application. This behavior can be modified by accessing the
Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface. The designation of the mobile
device to the Avalanche Manager is LXE_MX5X.
LXE CE devices manufactured before October 2006 must have their drivers and system files
upgraded before they can use the Avalanche Enabler functions. Please contact an LXE
representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline.
If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device, the Enabler
should not be installed on the mobile device(s).
Terminology may appear different, based on your installed version: Avalanche Manager may be
shown as the Avalanche Mobility Center Console
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
64
Desktop
Desktop
For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE 5.0 user’s
guides or the Windows on-line Help application installed in the mobile device.
Note:
Whenever possible, use the AC power adapter with the MX5X to conserve the main
battery and to ensure the backup battery is charged.
The Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP. At a
minimum, it has desktop icons that can be tapped with the stylus to access My Computer, Internet
Explorer, and the Recycle Bin.
At the bottom of the screen is the Start button. Tapping the Start Button causes the Start Menu to
open. It contains the standard Windows menu options: Programs, Favorites, Documents, Settings,
Help, and Run.
The Start Menu Shutdown option found on most desktop PC’s has been replaced with a single
command: Suspend, because the mobile device is always powered On (when a fully charged main
battery and backup battery are present).
Tap the Suspend button to turn the screen off or tap the red Power button to turn the screen off and
place the device into Suspend mode.
Tap the screen once more or tap the Power button to ‘wake’ the unit up.
Desktop Option
Icon
Function
My Device (CE 5.0)
Access files and programs.
Recycle Bin
Storage for files that are to be deleted.
Internet Explorer
Connect to the Internet/intranet (requires a wireless
transmitter and Internet Service Provider – ISP
enrollment is not available from LXE).
Transcriber
Enter text using the stylus on the touch screen.
Wireless Client
Setup Icon (Summit,
Cisco, Symbol)
Used for configuring wireless client for network
security settings. Note that only one client can be used
at a time, e.g. if the Summit client icon is present, the
Cisco client icon is not present.
My Documents
Storage for downloaded files / applications.
Start
Access programs, select from the Favorites listing,
documents last worked on, change/view settings for the
control panel or taskbar, on-line help, run programs or
place the unit into Suspend mode.
Figure 3-1 Desktop Icons
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Desktop
65
My Device Folders
Preserved upon
Reboot?
Folder
Description
Application
Data
Data saved by running applications
No
My Documents
Storage for downloaded files /
applications
No
Network
Mounted network drive
No
Program Files
Applications
No
System
Internal SD Flash Card (CAB file
storage)
Yes
Temp
Location for temporary files
No
Windows
Operating System in Secure Storage
No
Folders Copied at Startup
The following folders are copied on startup:
•
•
•
•
•
System\Desktop
System\Favorites
System\Fonts
System\Help
System\Programs
-> Windows\Desktop
-> Windows\Favorites
-> Windows\Fonts
-> Windows\Help
-> Windows\Programs
This function copies only the directory contents, no sub-folders.
The following folders are *NOT* copied on startup:
• Windows\AppMgr
• Windows\Recent
• Windows\Startup
because copying these has no effect on the system, or an incorrect effect.
Files in the Startup folder are executed, but only from System\Startup. Windows\Startup is parsed
too early in the boot process so it has no effect.
Executables in System\Startup must be the actual executable, not a shortcut, because shortcuts are
not parsed by Launch.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
66
Start Menu Program Options
Start Menu Program Options
The following options represent the factory default program installation. Your system may be
different based on the software and hardware options purchased. Note that there can be only one
wireless client installed at a time. The client driver configuration utility chosen is based on the
type of installed wireless client card (Cisco, Summit, Symbol).
| Programs
Access:
Cisco
Requires Windows CE .NET 4.2
operating system.
Symbol
Requires Windows CE .NET 4.2
operating system.
Summit
Communication
Get Connected
Remote Desktop
Terminal
Microsoft File Viewers
Excel Viewer
Image Viewer
PDF Viewer
PowerPoint Viewer
Word Viewer
Command Prompt
Inbox
Internet Explorer
iRescue
Media Player
Microsoft WordPad
Windows Explorer
Transcriber
Note:
Set Cisco client / network parameters. (See
Appendix C - MX5X CE .NET 4.2 section titled
Wireless Network Configuration for instruction.)
Tap the Network icon in the toolbar to set up the
Symbol client (See Appendix C - MX5X CE .NET
4.2 section titled Wireless Network Configuration for
instruction.)
Set Summit Client / network parameters. (See
Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for
instruction.)
Stores Network communication options
Run this command after setting up a connection
Displays MX5X file structure on a remote desktop
monitor
Log on to a Windows Terminal Server
View downloaded files (see Note)
View Excel 97 (and later) documents
View BMP, JPEG and PNG images
View Adobe Acrobat documents
View PowerPoint files
View Word 97 (and later) and RTF files
The command line interface in a separate window
Microsoft Outlook mail inbox.
Access web pages on the world wide internet
Data backup and recovery utility
Music management program
Opens an ASCII notepad
File management program
Enter data using the stylus on the touch screen.
The Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected or
encrypted.
Communication
Access:
Note:
| Programs | Communication
Some communication menu options require an external modem connection to the MX5X.
Modems are not available from LXE nor supported by LXE.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Start Menu Program Options
67
ActiveSync
Once a relationship (partnership) has been established with Connect (on a desktop computer),
ActiveSync will synchronize using the wireless link, serial port, USB or the infrared port on the
MX5X. Refer to ActiveSync Processes later in this guide.
Note:
ActiveSync does not transmit through the IR port in vehicle cradles. It will transport
through the IR port of the MX5 desktop cradles.
For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer, open ActiveSync, then
open ActiveSync Help.
Synchronizing from the MX5X
You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first
synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device. Refer to ActiveSync
Processes later in this guide.
To initiate synchronization from your device, tap
begin the process.
Note:
| Programs | Communication | ActiveSync to
If you have a wireless LAN card, you can synchronize remotely from your device.
Tap Sync to connect and synchronize. View synchronization status.
Tap Tools to synchronize via IR or change synchronization settings. View connection status.
Tap Stop to stop synchronization.
Tap
| Help for context-sensitive help.
Get Connected
Get Connected is used to initiate a hardwired connection to a host.
The default connect setup is USB direct connect.
After a Connect setup is selected,
connect to a host.
| Programs | Communication | Get Connected will start to
The wireless link is made using
| Run. Tap the Browse button and browse to the Windows
folder. Select repllog.exe and tap the OK button. The Run text box reappears with
\windows\repllog in the text box.
Before pressing Enter, type a backslash ( / ) and remote in the Run text box. For example:
\windows\repllog / remote
See Also: Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
68
Start Menu Program Options
Remote Desktop Connection
Access:
| Programs | Communication | Remote Desktop Connection
There are few changes in the CE version of Remote Desktop Connection as it relates to the general
desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection options.
Select a computer from the drop down list and tap the Connect button.
Tap the Options >> button to access the General, Display, Local Resources, Programs and
Experience tabs. Tap the <?> button to access Remote Desktop Connection Help.
Command Prompt
Access:
| Programs | Command Prompt
Figure 3-2 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen
Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands. Exit the Command Prompt by
typing exit at the command prompt or select File | Close.
Inbox
Access:
| Programs | Inbox
This option requires a connection to a mail server. There are a few changes in the CE version of
Inbox as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Outlook Inbox options. Tap the
<?> button to access Inbox Help. ActiveSync can be used to transfer messages between the MX5X
inbox and a desktop inbox. Refer to ActiveSync Processes in Chapter 3 of this guide.
Internet Explorer
Access:
| Programs | Internet Explorer
This option requires a wireless card and an Internet Service Provider. There are a few changes in
the CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet
Explorer options. Tap the <?> button to access Internet Explorer Help.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Start Menu Program Options
69
Media Player
Access:
| Programs | Media Player
There are few changes in the CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general desktop
Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options. Tap the <?> button to access Media Player Help.
Windows Explorer
Access:
| Programs | Windows Explorer
There are a few changes in the CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general
desktop PC Windows Explorer options. Tap the <?> button to access Windows Explorer Help.
Transcriber
Access:
| Programs | Transcriber
Select Transcriber on the Start | Programs menu or tap the icon on the Desktop. To make changes
to the Transcriber application, enable or disable the current Transcriber session, etc., tap the hand
with a pen icon in the toolbar. Tap the <?> button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
70
Start Menu Program Options
Taskbar
Access:
| Settings | Taskbar and Start Menu
The Taskbar can be used to determine how the taskbar appears on the display. Use the Advanced
tab to clear the contents of the Documents menu.
Factory Default Settings
General
Always on Top
Auto hide
Show Clock
Advanced
Expand Control Panel
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
There are a few changes in the CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC
Windows Taskbar options.
When the taskbar is auto hidden, press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button
appear.
Figure 3-3 Taskbar and Start Menu Properties
Advanced Tab
Expand Control Panel
Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the
Settings | Control Panel menu option.
Clear Contents of Document Folder
Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Recently Opened Document folder.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
71
Control Panel Options
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel or My Computer | Control Panel
Getting Help
Please tap the <?> box to get Help when changing Control Panel options.
Option
Function
Accessibility
Customize the way the keyboard, audio, display or mouse function for
users with hearing or viewing difficulties.
Administration
LXE AppLock Administration utility. See Chapter 6 – AppLock for
details.
Audio
Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to CE events. Adjust
the volume, record gain, and sidetone for headphone, software and
microphone. Set volume for Bay Digital, CRMA Radio and Mixer.
Aironet Client Utility
Set the parameters for a Cisco client. (See Chapter 5 Wireless Network
Configuration for instruction.) Requires Windows CE .NET 4.2
operating system.
Certificates
Manage digital certificates used for secure communication.
Date/Time
Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings.
Dialing
Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by
LXE).
Display
Set background graphic, window/menu appearance parameters and set
backlight properties and timers.
Handheld
Displays hardware and software details. Tabs are Versions, Comms,
Radios, Misc. Enable or disable the touch panel (see Handheld
Properties | Misc).
Input Panel
Select the current key / data input method.
Internet Options
Set General, Connection, Security and Advanced options for Internet
connectivity. CE 5 version added Privacy and Popups options.
Keyboard
Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate.
Mouse
Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touch screen.
Network and Dial Up
Options
Set network driver properties and network access properties.
Owner
Set MX5X owner details (name, phone, etc) and Notes. Enter Network
ID for the device – user name, password, domain. Includes option to
display owner identification at power-on.
Password
Set MX5X user access password properties.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
72
Control Panel Options
Option
Function
PC Connection
Control the connection between the MX5X and a local desktop or laptop
computer.
Power
Set Power scheme properties. Review battery status and properties..
Regional Settings
Set appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional
and language settings.
Remove Programs
Remove user installed programs in their entirety.
Scanner
Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner
port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data
bits for available COM ports.
See section titled Determine Your Scanner Software Version.
Stylus
Set double-tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel.
Enable or disable the touch panel (see Handheld Properties | Misc).
Symbol
Set the parameters for a Symbol client. (See Chapter 5 Wireless Network
Configuration for instruction.) Requires Windows CE .NET 4.2
operating system.
System
Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage
and Program memory settings. Enter device name and description.
Terminal Server
Client Licenses
Assign a stored Terminal Server Client license to the device.
Accessibility
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Accessibility
Figure 3-4 Accessibility Options
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
73
Customize the way the keyboard, sound, display, mouse, automatic reset and notification sounds
function. There are a few changes from general desktop Accessibility options. Adjust the settings
and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
The following exceptions are due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system:
If the ToggleKeys option is selected, please note that the ScrollLock key does not produce a sound
as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do.
If the SoundSentry option is selection, please note that ScrollLock does not produce a visual
warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do.
Administration – for AppLock
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Administration
Use this option to set parameters for computers intended to be used as dedicated, single or
multiple application devices. In other words, only the application or feature(s) specified in the
AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the user.
LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to start up in Administration mode with no
default password, and when the device is started for the first time, the user has full access to the
mobile device and no password prompt is displayed. After the Administrator specifies an
application or applications to lock, assigns a password and the device is rebooted (or the hotkey is
pressed), the mobile device is then in end-user mode.
AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters and application launch
settings as specified by the Administrator.
See Chapter 6 - AppLock for further information and instruction.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
74
Control Panel Options
Audio
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Audio
Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files for operating system events. Adjust the volume,
record gain, and sidetone for headphone, software and microphone. Set volume for Bay Digital,
CRMA Radio and Mixer.
Figure 3-5 Audio Properties
Factory Default Settings
System
Speaker Volume
Events
Applications
Notifications
Key Clicks
Screen taps
Routing
System (Normal)
MX5X Reference Guide
Loud
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Loud
Loud
Enabled
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
75
Factory Default Settings
Wireless Phone (Network card)
Headset
CRMA Radio
Exp. Bay
Disable Headset
Disable Speaker (Mute)
Microphone Gain
Volume
Headphone
Software
Microphone
Extra Volume
Bay Digital
CRMA Radio
Mixer
Events
Scheme
Note:
Disabled
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
Enabled
Enabled
60%
80%
60%
60%
60%
60%
Windows CE Default
Bluetooth access, Bluetooth modules and Bluetooth Manager are not supported by LXE.
Certificates
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Certificates
Manage digital certificates used for secure communication.
Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on the mobile devices when using any type of
certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will
fail.
Figure 3-6 Digital Certificates
Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the MX5X user. These values may change based on the type
of wireless security resident in the client, access point or the host system.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
76
Control Panel Options
Date/Time
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Date/Time Icon
Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings after cold boot or at anytime.
Factory Default Settings
Current Time
Midnight
Time Zone
GMT-05:00
Daylight Savings Disabled
Note:
Date and time is reset to the default value each time the MX5X is rebooted.
Figure 3-7 Date/Time Properties
There is minimal change from general desktop PC Date/Time Properties options. Adjust the
settings and tap the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes. The changes take effect
immediately. Double-tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes the Date/Time Properties
screen to appear.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
77
Dialing
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Dialing
Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by LXE). Tap the <?> and
follow the instructions in Help.
Factory Default Settings
Location
Work
Area Code
425
Tone Dialing
Enabled
Country/Region
1
Disable Call Waiting Disabled
Figure 3-8 Dialing Properties
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
78
Control Panel Options
Display
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Display Icon
Select the Desktop image and set the display/keypad backlight timers when on battery or external
power.
Factory Default Settings
Background
Tile
Backlight
Battery Auto Turn Off
Idle Timer
External Auto Turn Off
Idle Timer
Windows CE
Disabled
Enabled
1 minute
Enabled
10 minutes
Display Properties
Figure 3-9 Display Properties
Background
There is no change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Background options. Select an
image from the dropdown list (or tap the Browse button to select an image from another folder) to
display on the Desktop, then tap the OK box to save the change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Backlight
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
When the backlight timer expires, the screen backlight is dimmed not turned off and the keypad
backlight is turned off. Default values are 1 minute for Battery power and 10 minutes for External
power.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
79
Handheld
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Handheld
Displays hardware, communications, versions and WLAN client details.
How to Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Handheld | Misc tab
Use this option to disable the touch panel. It can also be used to disable the touch screen
calibration configuration during a Cold Reset. When touch is disabled, the keypad must be used
for input. The Input Panel cannot be used.
Disable Touch Panel and Calibration
Access: My Computer | System
Create a file on the CF card (My Computer\System folder) named DisableTouchScreen.dat. If this
file is present on the CF card, the touch screen will be disabled, and calibration will NOT be
requested upon a cold reset.
Disable Touch Panel Only
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Handheld | Misc tab
To just disable the touch panel (calibration still required upon cold reset), enable (tap) the Touch
Panel Disabled checkbox on the Misc tab in the Handheld Properties Control Panel.
When checked, the touch panel is disabled. When touch is disabled, the keypad must be used for
input. The Input Panel cannot be used.
How to Re-enable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold
Reset
Access: My Computer | System
To enable Touch Panel and Calibration, delete the file named DisableTouchScreen.dat on the CF
card (My Computer\System folder). When this file is present on the CF card, the touch screen is
disabled, and calibration does not occur after a cold reset.
To enable the Touch Panel only, uncheck the Touch Panel Disabled checkbox on the Misc tab in
the Handheld Properties Control Panel (Start/Settings/Control Panel/Handheld/Misc tab).
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
80
Control Panel Options
Handheld Properties
Figure 3-10 Handheld Properties – Version 1.02
Versions tab
Bootloader, CPU type, CPU, Controller, PCB.CPLD, Platform versions. Mobile device serial
number.
Comms tab
Comms
COM 1 Port
COM 4 Port
Bay Power
MX5X Reference Guide
Default
Main Connector enabled
Disabled: Power Output for Main Connector,
Options Bay
Main Connector enabled
Disabled: Power Output for Main Connector,
Options Bay
Disabled: CRMA, Bay 3V, Bay 5V
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
81
Radios tab
Parameter
Default
CF Slot Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
CF Slot Wakeup Enabled
Disabled (blank)
PC Slot Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
PC Slot Wakeup Enabled
Disabled (blank)
Bluetooth Radio Enabled
Disabled (blank) [see Note]
Ethernet Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
Note:
Bluetooth access, modules and Bluetooth Manager are not supported by LXE.
Misc tab
Parameter
Defaults
Keyboard Backlight
Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
Nonvolatile option
52-key Standard
Options: 52-key Phone, 52-key
MultiKey
Stealth Mode Enabled
Disabled (blank) [see Note]
Touch Panel Disabled
Disabled (blank) [see Note]
Note:
See previous section titled How To Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset
and How To Enable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
82
Control Panel Options
Input Panel
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Input Panel
Select the current key / data input method.
Factory Default Settings
Input Method
Allow applications to
change input panel state
Options
Keys
Use gestures
Keyboard
Enabled
Small keys
Disabled
Figure 3-11 Input Panel
Use this option to make the Input Panel or the physical keypad primarily available when entering
data. When new key maps are added to the registry, they will appear in the Input Method
dropdown list.
Tap the Input Panel icon in the taskbar to toggle the on-screen Keyboard on and off.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
83
Internet Options
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Internet Options
Set MX5X user options for internet connectivity.
Factory Default Settings
General
Start Page
http://www.lxe.com/
Search Page
http://www.google.com
Cache Size
512 Kb
Connection
Use LAN
Disabled
Autodial Name
Blank
Proxy Server
Disabled
Bypass Proxy
Disabled
Security
Allow cookies
Enabled
Allow TLS 1.0 security
Disabled
Allow SSL 2.0 security
Enabled
Allow SSL 3.0 security
Enabled
Warn when switching
Enabled
Privacy
First party cookies
Accept
Third party cookies
Prompt
Session cookies
Always allow
Advanced
Stylesheets
Enable
Theming Support
Enable
Multimedia
All options enabled
Security
All options enabled
Popups
Block popups
Disabled
Display notification
Enabled
Use same window
Disabled
Select a tab. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
84
Control Panel Options
Keyboard
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard Icon
Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate.
Factory Default Settings
Repeat
Enable
Delay
Short
Rate
Slow
Figure 3-12 Keyboard Properties
There is no change from general desktop PC Keyboard Properties options. Adjust the settings and
tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
These values do not affect virtual keyboard (Input Panel) taps.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
85
Mouse
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Mouse
Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touch screen.
Network and Dialup Connections
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections
Create a dialup, direct, Ethernet or VPN connection on the MX5X.
Create a Communication Option
1.
On the MX5X, select
| Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections. A
window is displayed showing the existing connections.
2.
Assuming the one you want does not exist, tap Connection. Then tap New…
3.
Give the new connection an appropriate name (IR @ 9600, etc.). Tap the Direct Connection
control. Tap the Next button.
4.
From the popup menu, choose the port you want to connect to. Only the available ports are
shown.
5.
Tap the Configure... button.
6.
Under the Port Settings tab, choose the appropriate baud rate. Data bits, parity, and stop bits
remain at 8, none, and 1, respectively.
7.
Under the Call Options tab, be sure to disable Wait for dial tone, since a direct connection will
not have a dial tone. Set the Cancel parameter (default is 2 seconds). Tap OK.
8.
TCP/IP Settings should not need to change from defaults. Tap the Finish button to create the
new connection.
9.
Close the Remote Networking window.
10. To activate the new connection select
the Change button.
| Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection and tap
11. Select the new connection. Tap OK twice.
12. Close the Control Panel window.
13. Connect the desktop PC to the MX5X with the appropriate cable.
14. Tap the desktop Connect icon to test the new connection.
You can activate the connection by double-tapping on the specific connection icon in the Remote
Networking window, but this will only start an RAS (Remote Access Services) session, and does
not start ActiveSync properly.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
86
Control Panel Options
Owner
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Owner Icon
Set MX5X owner details.
Factory Default Settings
Identification
Name, Company, Address, Telephones
Display at power-on
Notes
Notes
Display at power-on
Network ID
User Name
Password
Domain
Blank
Disabled
Blank
Disabled
Blank
Blank
Blank
Figure 3-13 Owner Properties
There is little change from general desktop PC Owner Properties display. Enter the information
and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
87
Password
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Password Icon
Set MX5X access/power up password properties.
Factory Default Settings
Password
Blank
At Power On
Disabled
Screensaver
Disabled
Note:
Once a password is assigned, each Control Panel option requires the password be
entered before the Control Panel option can be accessed. If you forget the password, it
cannot be restored without performing a cold boot on the unit (which erases everything
in memory).
Enter the password, then type it again to confirm it and tap the OK box to save the changes. The
password is immediately in effect.
Tap the Enable password protection at power on checkbox to set whether the user types a
password at Power On.
Tap the Enable password protection for screensaver checkbox to set whether the user types a
password at Power On.
The screensaver password is the same as the power-on password. They are not set independently.
A screensaver password cannot be created without first enabling the Enable password protection at
power-on checkbox. The screensaver password is not automatically enabled when the power-on
checkbox is enabled.
PC Connection
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection
Control the connection between the MX5X and a nearby desktop/laptop computer.
Factory Default Settings
Enable direct connection
Enabled
Connect Using
‘USB Default’
Tap the Change Connection .. button to adjust the settings. Then tap the OK button to save the
changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Unchecking the Enable direct connections ….. disables ActiveSync.
Change Connection ….
Tapping Change Connection displays a list of configured ActiveSync connections.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
88
Control Panel Options
Figure 3-14 PC Connection / Change Connection
Please refer to the Backup MX5X Files section later in this chapter for parameter setting
recommendations.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
89
Power
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Power
Set Power Off, Backlight properties. Review battery status and details. Please refer to Chapter 2
Physical Description and Layout section titled Power Modes.
Factory Default Settings
Status
Main Battery Power Gauge
Power Schemes
Battery
Suspend
3 minutes
AC Power
Suspend
5 minutes
Figure 3-15 Power Properties
Status
The Status tab shows the status and the percentage of power left in the main battery (removable).
The listed values cannot be changed by the user. Backup battery information is not available.
Battery
The Battery tab displays technical information (serial number, charge cycles remaining, etc.) about
the main battery pack. Backup battery information is not available.
Schemes
The Schemes tabs allows the user to set the Suspend timers when the mobile device is running on
Battery power or AC power. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The
changes take effect immediately.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
90
Control Panel Options
Regional Settings
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Regional Settings
Set the appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional and language settings.
Factory Default Settings
Regional Setting
English (United States)
Number
123,456,789.00 / -123,456,789.00 neg
Currency
$123,456,789.00 pos / ($123,456,789.00) neg
Time
h:mm:ss tt (tt=AM or PM)
Date
M/d/yy short / dddd,MMMM,dd,yyyy long
In addition to the above settings, the user can set the user interface language and the default input
language.
Factory Default Settings
Language
User Interface
English (United States)
Input
Language
English (United States)-US
Installed
English (United States)-US
Tap the Customize button to assign a different format for dates, times, numbers and currency.
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. Changes are saved across tabs. Tap
the <X> box to discard any changes. Tap the <?> for Help. The changes take effect immediately.
Remove Programs
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Remove Programs
Figure 3-16 Remove/Delete User Installed Programs
Select a program and tap Remove. Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user-installed
only programs. The change takes effect immediately.
Files stored in the My Documents folder are not removed using this option.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
91
Scanner
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Scanner
Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings.
Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports. Scanner parameters
apply to the MX5X integrated scanner/imager only. Barcode manipulation parameters apply to
barcodes scanned by the integrated scanner/imager engine only.
Scanner configuration can be changed using the Scanner Control Panel or via the LXE API
functions. While the changed configuration is being read, the Scanner LED is solid amber. The
scanner is not operational during the configuration update.
Determine Your Scanner Software Version
Note:
Scanner control panel options are based on the installed software version levels, driver
and OS versions in MX5X devices. Your Scanner options may or may not be as described
in this section. Contact your LXE representative to obtain the most current software and
drivers for your mobile device. To identify the software version, go to Settings | Control
Panel | Handheld | Versions tab.
If the Scanner Control panel looks like this . . . .
Go to . . . .
This chapter, this
section titled Scanner
or
Chapter 4 Scanner
Figure 3-17 Determine Your Scanner Software Version
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
92
Control Panel Options
Factory Default Settings
Factory Default Settings
Main
Port 1
Port 2
Send key messages WEDGE
Translate Control Codes
Keys
Left
Enter
Right
Enter
Advanced (Version 2)
Translate
Disabled
Strip Leading
0 characters
Strip Trailing
0 characters
Prefix
Disabled
Suffix
Disabled
COM Ports (COM1, COM4)
Baud Rate
9600
Parity
None
Stop Bits
1
Data Bits
COM1 : 8
Note:
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
COM4 : greyed out
If the internal scanner has to be configured to operate at any communication settings
other than 9600, N, 8, 1 and the computer either loses power or a cold boot command is
entered, the Scanner applet must be reconfigured to match the scanner communication
settings.
ActiveSync will not work over a COM port if that COM port is enabled in the Scanner applet as a
scanner input. For example, if COM 1 is being used by the scanner, COM 1 can’t be used by any
other program.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
93
Main
Version 1
Version 2
Figure 3-18 Scanner Properties / Main Tab
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
If Send Key Messages … is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the
active window. When this box is not checked, the application will need to use the set of LXE
Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver. Note that this latter method is
significantly faster than using Wedge.
Version 1
If Translate Control Codes is checked, unprintable ASCII characters (characters below 20H) in
scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are
sent in Character mode.
When Translate Control Codes is not checked and Send Key Messages is checked, CTRL codes
are passed through in Block mode.
See Also: Appendix D Reference Material section titled ASCII Control Codes.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
94
Control Panel Options
Keys
Figure 3-19 Scanner Properties / Keys Tab
The Keys tab sets up what happens when one of the Scan keys are pressed. Note that the two keys
can do the same or different functions.
Disabled
Scan
Enter
Tab
Field Exit
Esc
When either scan key is set to Disabled, it does nothing when pressed.
When set to Scan the integrated scanner is activated. If no integrated scanner is
present, the Scan selection is greyed out.
When set to Enter, both the Enter key and the (Scan button) / Enter key
perform the same function.
When set to Tab, both the Tab key and the (Scan button) / Tab key perform the
same function.
IBM TN5250 specific keypad only. The left Scan key can be programmed as a
Field Exit key.
When set to Esc the Scan key press halts the current function.
Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value
Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor. LXE recommends caution when editing the
Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made.
Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ LXE \ Scanner.
Set either the ScanCodeLeft or ScanCodeRight to be the scan code of the key to be used as the
virtual key when the Virtual Left key (Left Scan key) or Virtual Right key (Right Scan key) is
pressed. The registry requires a decimal value.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
95
Advanced
Figure 3-20 Scanner Properties / Advanced tab
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
The title in the group box reflects the current mode. If you are in Block mode, the title of the group
box is Block. If you are in Key Message mode, the title of the group box is Key Message.
Translate Control Codes
If Translate Control Codes is checked, unprintable ASCII characters (characters below 20H) in
scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are
sent in Character mode.
When Translate Control Codes is not checked and Send Key Messages is checked, CTRL codes
are passed through in Block mode.
Strip Leading / Strip Trailing Characters
This feature, when enabled, strips the specified number of characters from a barcode, either from
the beginning (leading) or at the end (trailing), or both.
When this feature and the Add Prefix and / or Add Suffix features are both enabled, the leading
and trailing characters are stripped before the prefix or suffix is appended.
The configuration for stripping leading and trailing characters is specified independently. To
enable, either or both of the checkboxes labeled Strip Leading and Strip Trailing must be checked.
Then the number of characters to be stripped can be typed into the edit control or set using the spin
control on the right of the edit control.
The maximum number of characters that can be stripped is 99 characters for each leading and
trailing number of characters. When the Strip Leading and Strip Trailing checkboxes are blank (or
disabled), the edit controls are disabled; however the last specified number of characters to strip is
retained and dimmed.
When the number of characters to be stripped is greater than the number of characters in the
barcode a good read beep is sounded but all barcode data is discarded.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
96
Control Panel Options
Prefix / Suffix
If Add Prefix and / or Add Suffix are combined with Strip Leading and / or Strip Trailing, the
leading and / or trailing characters are stripped before the prefix or suffix is added.
The mode for Prefix/Suffix feature is determined by the Send Key Messages (WEDGE) setting in
the Main tab. When checked (enabled), the prefix/suffix feature is in Key Message mode. Key
message mode sends the prefix, barcode, and suffix to the application with the focus as
keystrokes. In Key message mode all keys on the keypad can be entered.
When the Send Key Messages is not checked, Block mode is enabled. Block mode allows ASCII
characters (0x0 – 0x7F), plus backspace, tab, delete, return and escape. In Block mode the
prefix/suffix data is added to the beginning and end of the buffered barcode data that can then be
read by an application from the WDG: device.
Up to 19 characters can be specified for the prefix and up to 19 characters can be specified for the
suffix. The characters can be text or control characters, e.g. tab, carriage return. The characters can
be entered into the prefix and suffix text boxes by typing from the keypad, entering the key’s hex
equivalent, or entering in hat ( ^ ) encoded delimited (8-bit code table) notation.
• To enable the Prefix or Suffix processing, check the associated checkbox. When the box is
checked, the edit controls to the right are enabled. Keys/characters are typed into the edit
control following the checkbox.
• Selecting the Add button then adds the key to the associated list of keys in the read-only edit
control to the right of the Add / Clear buttons. The keys are shown as comma-delimited strings.
• To erase the Prefix or Suffix, select the read-only edit control that contains the currently
configured Prefix or Suffix and select the Clear button.
• The Add and Clear buttons function on the control that is selected when the button is pressed.
• Hex values can be entered by preceding the two digit hex value with ‘0x’. Control characters
can also be entered using the ‘hat’ delimited notation, i.e. ^M for Carriage Return.
• All keypad keys can be entered by typing the key. Some keypad keys are only valid if in Key
Message mode. For example, the Function Keys (F1, PF1) are only valid in Key Message
mode.
See Hat Encoding and Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart in Appendix D Reference Material.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
97
COM Ports
Figure 3-21 Scanner Properties / COM Port Settings
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
The COM 1 display contains the same parameters as the COM 2 and COM 3 Tab. Adjust the
settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Note:
Neither COM1 nor COM4 support 5V switchable power on Pin 9 for tethered scanners.
Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds
Good scan and bad scan sounds are stored in the Windows folder, as SCANGOOD.WAV and
SCANBAD.WAV. These are unprotected WAV files and can be replaced by a WAV file of the
user’s choice. By default a good scan sound on the MX5X is a single 2700 Hz beep, and a bad
scan sound is a double beep.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
98
Control Panel Options
Storage Manager
Access:
Note:
| Settings | Control Panel | Storage Manager
Storage Manager is not available until a storage device is installed in the MX5X.
Installed storage devices are listed by device name in the dropdown box. To view information
about the disk or perform store operations, select a device from the list.
Figure 3-22 Storage Properties
On-line help is available for this option.
Topics available are:
•
•
•
•
Manage storage devices
Manage disk partitions
Creating a new partition
Advanced partition features
LXE recommends CAUTION when formatting or dismounting storage devices and when creating
new partitions or deleting partitions on the storage device.
This menu option is not available in all versions.
Note:
Contact LXE Customer Support prior to using management functions on the internal ATA
card.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
99
Stylus
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Stylus
Set double-tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel.
Double Tap
Follow the instructions on the screen and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take
effect immediately.
Calibration
Figure 3-23 Stylus Properties / Calibration Start / Calibration Begin
Press and hold the stylus on the center of the target as it moves around the screen. Press Enter to
keep the new calibration settings or Esc to cancel.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
100
Control Panel Options
System
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | System Icon
Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage and Program memory
settings.
Factory Default Settings
General
N/A
Memory
Middle of Memory Bar
Device Name
Windows CE
Device Description
Windows CE Device
Copyrights
N/A
General
System - This screen is presented for information only. The System parameters cannot be changed
by the user.
Computer - The processor type is listed. The type cannot be changed by the user. The name of the
installed wireless card is listed in the dropdown list. Total computer memory and the identification
of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user.
Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system. Hence, a system
with 64 MB may only report 35 MB memory, since 29 MB is used up by the Windows CE
operating system. This is actual DRAM memory, and does not include internal flash or the internal
ATA card used for storage.
Memory
Figure 3-24 System / Memory
Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage. If there isn’t enough space for a
file, increase the amount of storage memory. If the MX5X is running slowly, try increasing the
amount of program memory. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The
changes take effect immediately.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Panel Options
101
Device Name
Figure 3-25 System / Device Name
The device name and description can be changed. Enter the name and description using either the
keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Copyrights
This screen is presented for information only. The Copyrights information cannot be changed by
the user.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
102
Compact Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs
Compact Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs
CF
Compact Flash Card | Flash Card
The CF card, located under the main battery pack, is intended to protect the user from losing the
LXE drivers and configuration information in the event of a cold boot. Also, on a cold boot, the
contents of any CAB files (for API, drivers, etc.) are automatically unpacked and then restarted
after the subsequent warm boot.
Access Files on the CF Card
Tap the My Computer or My Device icon then the System folder.
Note:
Perform a warm reset when exchanging one CF card for another.
CF Files
Persistent Storage Memory is not available on the MX5X. Instead, a Flash card is used for
permanent storage of the LXE drivers and utilities. It is also used for registry content back up. The
CF card is located in the socket under the main battery pack.
It is important that all CAB files on the card be given Read-Only attributes. On the MX5X, when a
read-only CAB file is unpacked, it is not deleted.
The following files are included on every MX5X CF card:
WEDGE.CAB
Cab file containing the LXE scanner driver and control panel for the MX5X.
API.CAB
CAB file containing the LXE API for the MX5X device.
The following CAB files are optional and may or may not be present:
SUMMIT.CAB
Summit client driver and utilities.
SYMBOL.CAB
Symbol client driver and utilities. (CE .NET 4.2 only)
CISCO.CAB
Cisco client driver and utilities. (CE .NET 4.2 only)
RFTERM.CAB
LXE RFTerm terminal emulation application.
JAVA.CAB
Java application.
APPLOCK.CAB
LXE AppLock program.
LXE_MX5X_ENABLER.CAB
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler
BT.CAB (See Note)
Bluetooth Manager program (CE .NET 4.2 only)
Note:
Bluetooth Manager, Bluetooth service or options are not available for all MX5X devices
or in all MX5X software releases. Bluetooth access, modules and Bluetooth Manager on
the MX5X are not supported by LXE.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
API Calls
103
API Calls
Refer to Accessories for the LXE MX5 SDK part number.
The LXE specific API calls for the MX5X are included in the LXE CE API Programming Guide.
The guide lists only the LXE-specific API calls and details which calls from the standard LXE
API are and are not supported on the MX5X. It is intended as an appendix to the standard
Microsoft Windows CE API documentation. The APIs detailed in the Programming Guide are
included in the file LXEAPI.DLL..
LXE-specific API calls and registry settings, for LXE devices running Windows CE .NET 4.2 and
CE 5, cover the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Battery
PCMCIA
Power Management
Scanner
Serial Ports
Version Control
Miscellaneous
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
104
ActiveSync / Get Connected Process
ActiveSync / Get Connected Process
Introduction
Requirement:
computer.
ActiveSync version 3.7 (or higher) must be on the host (desktop/laptop, PC)
See Also: Section titled ActiveSync.
A partnership between a PC and the MX5X (Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0) must be
established using serial RS-232 or USB connection between the PC and the MX5X. When more
than one PC will be synchronizing with the MX5X, each PC will need it’s own partnership
established. See section titled Initial Install for the procedure.
After the partnership has been established with the MX5X and the host computer, ActiveSync can
be performed over serial, USB, wireless, InfraRed, or ethernet.
Using Microsoft ActiveSync version 3.7 or higher, you can synchronize information on your PC
with the MX5X and vice versa. Synchronization compares the data on your MX5X with your PC
and updates both with the most recent data. For example, you can:
• Synchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your mobile device and PC.
Your files are automatically converted to the correct format.
• Back up and restore your mobile device data.
• Copy (rather than synchronize) files between your mobile device and PC.
• Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode. For example, you
can synchronize continually while connected to your PC or only when you choose the
synchronize command.
• Select which information types are synchronized and control how much data is synchronized.
Note:
By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information. Use
ActiveSync Options to specify the types of information you want to synchronize. The
synchronization process makes the data (in the information types you select) identical on
both your PC and your mobile device. If an information type is selected that does not
exist on the MX5X, the data appears to transfer, but it is ignored by the MX5X and not
loaded.
When installation of ActiveSync is complete on your PC, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard begins
and starts the following processes:
• connect the mobile device to your PC,
• set up a partnership so you can synchronize information between your mobile device and your
PC, and
• customize your synchronization settings.
For more information about using ActiveSync on your PC, open ActiveSync, then open
ActiveSync Help .
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
ActiveSync / Get Connected Process
105
Initial Install
Initial installation / relationship must be established using serial RS232 or USB cable connection
between the MX5X and the desktop/laptop (PC). Once a relationship has been established, tap
Start | Help | ActiveSync for help.
Install ActiveSync on Desktop/Laptop
Go to the Microsoft Windows website ActiveSync Download | Install file location:
www.microsoft.com/downloads
and type ActiveSync in the Keywords text box. This process should locate the latest version of
ActiveSync.
Install ActiveSync 3.7 (or later) on the PC before using ActiveSync to connect the PC to the
mobile device.
Follow the instructions in the ActiveSync Wizard.
Check that Start | ActiveSync | Tools | Options has the correct connection selected. Refer to Serial
Connection or USB Connection.
When installation of ActiveSync is complete on your PC, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard on the PC
begins and it begins searching for a connected device.
Because ActiveSync is already installed on your mobile device, your first synchronization process
begins automatically when you finish setting up your PC in the ActiveSync wizard and cable your
mobile device to the PC.
Serial Connection
Tap the
| Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection on the MX5X. Tap the Change Connection
button. From the popup list, choose
COM 1 @ 115200
Note:
The default is USB Default.
This will set up the MX5X to use COM 1. Tap OK and ensure the check box for Enable direct
connections to the desktop computer is checked.
Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner and ensure the integrated laser scanner is set to a
port that is NOT the same as the Get Connected port (COM 1).
Tap OK to return to the Control Panel.
USB Connection
Tap the
| Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection on the MX5X. Tap the Change Connection
button. From the popup list, choose
USB Default
This will set up the MX5X to use the USB port. Tap OK and ensure the check box for Enable
direct connections to the desktop computer is checked.
Tap OK to return to the Control Panel.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
106
ActiveSync / Get Connected Process
Connect – Initial Install Process
Connect the correct** cable to the PC (the host) and the MX5X (the client). Tap the
| Communication | Get Connected on the MX5X.
Note:
| Programs
ActiveSync connection between the MX5X and the desktop/laptop computer must be
established using cabled USB or Serial connection for the initial setup only. The other
connection options can be used thereafter. See Change Connection Parameters for a list
of connection options.
| Run. Tap the Browse button and browse to the
The initial MX5X connection is made using
Windows folder. Select repllog.exe and tap the OK button. The Run text box reappears with
\windows\repllog in the text box.
Before pressing Enter, type a backslash ( / ) and remote in the Run text box. For example:
\windows\repllog /remote
**
Cables for initial ActiveSync Configuration:
USB Client to PC/Laptop
Serial Client to PC/Laptop
D26 to USB
D26 to DA9F
MX5A052CBLD26USB
MX5A051CBLD26DA9F
When the desktop/laptop computer and the MX5X successfully connect, the initial ActiveSync
process is complete.
Change Connection Parameters
Tap the
1.
| Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection. Tap the Change Connection button.
From the popup list, choose
Option
IRDA
Description
This will set up the MX5X to use the Infrared port at 57600 or 115200
baud
USB (Default)
This will set up the MX5X to use the USB port direct.
COM1 @ 115200
This will set up the MX5X to use:
COM 1 direct at 38400 baud,
COM4 direct at 38400 baud, or
COM4 direct at 115200 baud
2. Tap OK and ensure the check box for Enable direct connections to the desktop computer is
checked.
3.
Tap OK to return to the Control Panel.
4.
Select Scanner and ensure the integrated scanner is set to a port that is different than the Get
Connected port (COM 1).
Note:
The host-to-client ActiveSync connection does true IrDA, not serial over IR, or TCP/IP
(Winsock) over IR, like many infrared connections. Therefore, it is important to use a PC
infrared interface which supports the handshaking needed for ActiveSync. This,
unfortunately, precludes using many brands of laptops, which use a simple infrared
interface, even though they may call it IrDA.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
ActiveSync / Get Connected Process
107
Backup MX5X Files Using ActiveSync
Use the following to backup data files from the MX5X to a desktop or laptop PC using the
appropriate cables and Microsoft’s ActiveSync.
Prerequisites
Initial ActiveSync partnership between the MX5X and the target PC has been completed. After the
partnership has been established with the mobile device and the host computer, ActiveSync can be
performed over Serial, USB, wireless, InfraRed, or Ethernet.
MX5X and PC Partnership
An ActiveSync partnership between the PC and MX5X has been established. See section Initial
Setup.
Serial Port Transfer
A PC with an available serial port and an MX5X with a serial port. The desktop or laptop PC must
be running Windows 95, 98, NT or 2000.
Null modem cable with all control lines connected. LXE recommends using the RS-232 cable
listed in the following section Connect.
Infrared Port Transfer
A PC with an infrared port and an MX5X with an infrared port. The desktop or laptop PC must be
running Windows 98 SR2, Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
USB Transfer
A PC with an available USB port and an MX5X with a USB port. The desktop or laptop PC must
be running Windows 98 SR2 or Windows 2000.
LXE-specific USB cable as listed in the following section Connect.
Ethernet Transfer
A PC with an available Ethernet port and an MX5X. The desktop or laptop PC must be running
Windows 98 SR2 or Windows 2000.
LXE-specific Ethernet RJ45 cable as listed in the following section Connect.
Connect
Connect the correct cable to the PC (the host) and the MX5X (the client).
Select Get Connected from
| Programs | Communications | Connect.
Cable, MX5X to PC RS-232, D26 to DA9F
Cable, MX5X to PC USB, D26 to USB
Cable, MX5X D26 to Ethernet RJ45, MX5X
Cable, MX5X D26 to USB Host Receptacle, MX5X
Note:
MX5A051CBLD26DA9F
MX5A052CBLD26USB
MX5A057CBLETHD26RJ45
MX5A058CBLD26USBHOST
USB will start automatically when the cable is connected, not requiring you to select
Connect from the Start menu.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
108
ActiveSync / Get Connected Process
Ethernet or Wireless Connection
After establishing an Ethernet connection run \Windows\REPLLOG.EXE /remote. Select Network
Connection in the ActiveSync dropdown box and your computer name in the second drop down
box. Tap Connect on the MX5X.
If a partnership has previously been established, the Connection Status dialog box is displayed.
Tap Sync Now to continue the synchronization or Disconnect to close the Ethernet connection.
The process is the same when using the Enhanced Ethernet Desktop cradle or the mobile device’s
Ethernet cable.
Explore
From the ActiveSync Dialog on the Desktop PC, tap on the Explore button, which allows you to
explore the MX5X from the PC side, with some limitations. You can copy files to or from the
MX5X using drag-and-drop. You will not be allowed to delete files or copy files out of the
\Windows directory on the MX5X. (Technically, the only files you cannot delete or copy are ones
marked as system files in the original build of the Windows OS image. This, however, includes
most of the files in the \Windows directory). For example, you can drag the LXEbook – MX5X
User’s Guide from your desktop computer to the My Documents folder on the MX5X.
Disconnect
Serial Connection
Disconnect the cable from the MX5X. Put the MX5X into Suspend by tapping the red Suspend
button. Tap the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar.
Then tap the Disconnect button.
IRDA Connection
Move the MX5X so the infrared beam is broken. Tap the status bar icon in the lower right hand
corner of the status bar.
Then tap the Disconnect button.
USB Connection
Disconnect the cable from the MX5X. Tap the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the
status bar.
Then tap the Disconnect button.
IMPORTANT – Do not put the MX5X into suspend while connected via USB. The MX5X will
be unable to connect to the host PC when it resumes operation.
Wireless Device Connection
Put the MX5X into suspend by tapping the red Suspend button. Tap the status bar icon in the
lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then tap the Disconnect button.
Ethernet Connection
Tap Disconnect in the Connection Status dialog box. Disconnect the Ethernet cable..
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
ActiveSync / Get Connected Process
109
Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection
ActiveSync assigns a partnership between a mobile device and a PC. A partnership is defined by
two objects – a unique computer name and a random number generated when the partnership is
first created. An ActiveSync partnership for a unique client can be established to two hosts.
If the MX5X is cold booted, the random number is deleted – and the partnership with the last one
of the two hosts is also deleted. The host retains the random numbers and unique names of all
devices having a partnership with it. Two clients cannot have a partnership with the same host if
they have the same name. ( | Settings | Control Panel | System | Device Name)
If the cold booted MX5X tries to reestablish the partnership with the same host PC, a new random
number is generated for the MX5X and ActiveSync will insist the unique name of the MX5X be
changed. If the MX5X is associated with a second host, changing the name will destroy that
partnership as well. This can cause some confusion when re-establishing partnerships with hosts.
Troubleshooting ActiveSync
ActiveSync on the host returns to the Get Connected screen without connecting
to the cabled device.
If the MX5X is already in a powered docking cradle cabled to a PC, remove and reinsert the
MX5X into the powered cradle.
If the MX5X is connected to a PC by a cable, disconnect the cable from the MX5X and reconnect
it again.
Check that the correct connection is selected (Serial or USB Client if this is the initial ActiveSync
installation).
See Also: Cold Boot and Loss of Host Reconnection.
ActiveSync on the host says that a device is trying to connect, but it cannot
identify it
One or more control lines are not connected. This is usually a cable problem, but on a laptop or
other device, it may indicate a bad serial port.
ActiveSync indicator on the host (disc in the toolbar tray) turns green and spins
as soon as you connect the cable, before tapping the Connect icon (or
REPLLOG.EXE in the Windows directory).
One or more control lines are tied together incorrectly. This is usually a cable problem, but on a
laptop or other device, it may indicate a bad serial port.
Try the following to re-establish the connection:
On the Host (desktop or laptop PC)
1.
Open ActiveSync.
2.
Select File | Connection Settings and disable Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this
COM port.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Select File | Connection Settings and enable Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this
COM port.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
110
ActiveSync / Get Connected Process
On the MX5X
Tap Start | Programs | Communication | Get Connected to establish an ActiveSync connection to
the host.
ActiveSync indicator on the host turns green and spins, but connection never
occurs
Baud rate of connection is not supported or detected by host.
-orIncorrect or broken data lines in cable.
ActiveSync indicator on the host remains gray
The host doesn’t know you are trying to connect. May mean a bad cable, with no control lines
connected, or an incompatible baud rate. Try the connection again, with a known-good cable.
Testing connection with a terminal emulator program, or a serial port monitor
You can use HyperTerminal or some other terminal emulator program to do a rough test of
ActiveSync. Set the terminal emulator to 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bits, and the same baud rate as
the connection on the CE device. After double-tapping REPLLOG.EXE on the CE device, the
word CLIENT appears on the display in ASCII format. When using a serial port monitor, you see
the host echo CLIENT, followed by SERVER. After this point, the data stream becomes straight
(binary) PPP.
Drop down list is blank in the ActiveSync dialog box
The wireless link is broken. Make sure that the network card has a valid IP address.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
iRescue
111
iRescue
Note:
iRescue material is copied from copyrighted iRescue material with permission from
Itronix.
You can use the iRescue program to backup and restore the contents of the MX5X files and
registry. There are four basic reasons to use iRescue:
•
•
•
•
To clone program settings and files from one device onto other devices.
To restore data if the battery is drained completely before a recharge.
To restore data following a cold reset.
To restore data if files or settings were unintentionally modified or deleted, causing a device
malfunction or data loss.
The backup data is saved onto the mobile device’s removable storage media, e.g. flash card.
Start iRescue
Select the iRescue icon in the taskbar. If you do not have this icon, select Start | Run. Then type
irescue and select OK. You can view version information by tapping the About button on the
Backup tab.
Figure 3-26 iRescue Backup
Backup Your Mobile Device using iRescue
Note:
1.
2.
In order to perform a full backup, all other programs must be closed. If any programs are
running, iRescue will prompt you to close them.
Open iRescue and select the Backup tab.
Select the Settings button and choose a backup destination from the Location drop-down
list. This list shows all removable storage media on the device.
3.
Tap OK.
4.
Select the Backup button to begin the backup.
Note:
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Information about each competed task or error status will appear in the Backup
status box and the Custom Status LED will flash red and green alternately during
this operation.
MX5X Reference Guide
112
iRescue
Change Backup Settings
Open iRescue and select the Backup tab > Settings button to perform the following:
• Set the backup location
• Specify how many backups the program is allowed to keep.
Note:
If the number of backups is exceeded, iRescue prompts the user to delete one or more
of the existing backups before performing a new backup.
• Enable/Disable automatic backup on a battery low event.
Note:
Once the battery level reaches 10%, iRescue automatically performs a backup. If the
level stays under 10%, iRescue performs a backup every two (2) hours until the
battery is recharged. This option is enabled by default.
• Enable/Disable the auto discard feature when iRescue performs an automatic backup.
Note:
For example, if iRescue is about to perform an automatic backup and either the
maximum number backups is exceeded or the device does not have enough space for
the next backup, iRescue deletes the oldest backup to free up space. If this option is
not checked, the auto backup on low battery only occurs if the maximum number of
backups is not exceeded and enough space is detected. This option is enabled by
default.
• Select an automatic backup schedule. You can choose a daily, weekly, or monthly automatic
backup schedule.
Note:
During an automatic backup, whether scheduled or battery level initiated, iRescue
will NOT close any running applications. Any open or running application will NOT
be saved during the automatic backup. This does not apply to user initiated backups
since iRescue will prompt you to close other running applications.
Manage Backups
1.
Open iRescue and select the Backup tab.
2.
Select the Manage button to bring up the Manage dialog box. From this page, you can:
• View all available backups on all the removable storage media present on the device.
• Delete a backup by selecting it from the backup list and tapping the Delete button. Once
deleted, the entry for that backup disappears from the list.
Restore Backups
1.
Open iRescue and select the Restore tab.
2.
Select a backup file from the Select Date drop-down list. This displays all available
backups from each removable storage media.
3.
The tree view displays the contents of the selected backup. Double tap the Files item to
view a list of folders and files contained in the backup.
4.
To restore selected files, uncheck the files that you do not want to restore. By default, and
each time a different backup is selected, all files and folders are selected.
5.
Select the Restore button to restore the files and registry settings of a backup. Only selected
items in the tree view are restored; all unselected items are skipped.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
113
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
An MX5X device manufactured before October 2006 must have drivers and system files upgraded
before it can use the Avalanche Enabler functions. Please contact an LXE representative for
details on upgrading the mobile device baseline.
If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device, the Enabler
should not be installed on the mobile device.
Terminology may appear different, based on your installed version:
• Avalanche Manager may be shown as the Avalanche Mobility Center Console
• Avalanche Agent may be shown as the Avalanche Mobile Device Server
• Avalanche Management Console may be shown as the Avalanche Mobility Center or the
Avalanche Mobility Center Console
Note that actual operation of the Enabler on the mobile device does not change.
Briefly . . .
The Wavelink Avalanche Enabler installation file is loaded on the mobile device by LXE;
however, the device is not configured to launch the installation file automatically. The installation
application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used. After the installation
application is manually run, the Enabler begins normal performance. The Enabler is by default an
auto-launch application. This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update
Settings panel through the Enabler Interface.
Note:
On LXE mobile devices with integrated scanners, the Scanner Wedge has primary
control of the serial ports and must be configured properly to allow the Enabler to access
the serial ports.
Enabler Install Process
Doubletap the Avalanche Enabler CAB file in the System folder. The filename is
LXE_MX5X_ENABLER.CAB.
Enabler Uninstall Process
To remove the LXE Avalanche Enabler from a Windows CE mobile device:
1.
Delete the Avalanche folder located in the System folder.
2.
Warm boot the mobile device.
The Avalanche folder cannot be deleted while the Enabler is running. See Stop the Enabler
Service. If sharing errors occur while attempting to delete the Avalanche folder, warm boot the
mobile device, immediately delete the Avalanche folder, and then perform another warm boot.
Orphaned Packages
To prevent the enabler from restoring parameters, delete orphaned packages through the Wavelink
Management Console (refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility User Guide for details and
instruction).
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
114
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Stop the Enabler Service
To stop the Enabler from monitoring for updates from the Management Console:
1.
Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop.
2.
Select File | Settings. Enter the password.
3.
Select the Startup/Shutdown tab.
4.
Select the Do not monitor or launch Enabler parameter to prevent automatic monitoring upon
startup.
5.
Select Stop Monitoring for an immediate shutdown of all enabler update functionality upon
exiting the user interface.
6.
Click the OK button to save the changes.
7.
Reboot the device if necessary.
Update Monitoring Overview
There are three methods by which the Enabler on an LXE device can communicate with the
Mobile Device Server running on the host machine.
• Wired via a serial cable between the Moble Device Server PC and the LXE device.
• Wired via a USB connection, using ActiveSync, between the Moble Device Server PC and the
mobile device.
• Wirelessly via the 2.4GHz network card and an access point
Following a mobile device reboot, the Enabler searches for a Moble Device Server, first by polling
all available serial ports and then over the wireless network. The designation of the mobile device
to the Avalanche CE Manager is LXE_MX5X.
The Enabler running on LXE Windows CE devices will attempt to access COM1, COM2, and
COM3. An Agent not found message will be displayed if the agent is not located or a serial port is
not present or available (COM port settings can be verified using the LXE scanner applet in the
Control Panel).
The wireless connection is made using the default network interface on the mobile device,
therefore the device must be actively communicating with the network for this method to succeed.
If a Moble Device Server or Avalanche Mobility Center Console is found, the Enabler will
automatically attempt to apply all wireless and network settings from the active profile. The
Enabler will also automatically download and process all available packages.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
115
Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings
Once the connection to the Moble Device Server is established, the Enabler will attempt to apply
all network and wireless settings contained in the active profile. The success of the application of
settings is dependent upon the local configuration of control parameters for the Enabler. These
local parameters cannot be overridden from the Avalanche Mobility Console.
The default Enabler adapter control setting are:
• Manage network settings – enabled
• Use Avalanche network profile – enabled
• Manage wireless settings – disabled for Windows CE Units
To configure the Avalanche Enabler management of the network and wireless settings:
1.
Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop.
2.
Select File | Settings. Enter the password.
3.
Select the Adapters tab.
4.
Choose settings for the Use Manual Settings parameter.
5.
Choose settings for Manage Network Settings, Manage Wireless Settings and Use
Avalanche Network Profile.
6.
Click the OK button to save the changes.
7.
Reboot the device.
See Also: Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Computers.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
116
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Enabler Configuration
The Enabler user interface application is launched by clicking:
Avalanche Icon
Either the Avalanche icon on the desktop or Taskbar
or
selecting Avalanche from the Programs menu.
The opening screen presents the user with the connection status and a navigation menu.
Figure 3-27 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen
File
View
Help
Connect
Updates
Adapter Info
Abort
Programs
About
Settings
Icons
Scan Config
List
Exit
Details
Launchable
All Packages
Time on Taskbar
Device Status
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
117
File Menu Options
Connect
The Connect option under the File menu allows the user to initiate a manual
connection to the Moble Device Server and Avalanche Mobility Center. The
connection methods, by default, are wireless and COM connections. Any updates
available will be applied to the mobile device immediately upon a successful
connection.
Abort
Stop transmission.
Settings
The Settings option under the File menu allows the user to access the control panel
to locally configure the Enabler settings. The Enabler control panel is, by default,
password protected. The default password is
system
The password is not case-sensitive.
Scan
Config
Note: LXE does not support the Scan Configuration feature on Windows CE
devices.
The Scan Config option under the File menu allows the user to configure Enabler
settings using a special barcode that can be created using the Avalanche
Management Console utilities. Refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center
User Guide for details.
Exit
The Exit option is password protected. The default password is
leave
The password is not case-sensitive.
If changes were made on the Startup/Shutdown tab screen, then after entering the
password, tap OK and the following screen is displayed:
Change the option if desired. Tap the X button to cancel Exit. Tap the OK button to
exit the Avalanche control panel screen.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
118
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Avalanche Update using File | Settings
Access:
| Avalanche | File | Settings
Use these menu options to setup the Avalanche Enabler on the mobile device. LXE recommends
changing and then saving the changes (reboot) before connecting to the network.
Alternatively, the Mobile Device Server can be disabled until needed (refer to the Wavelink
Avalanche Mobility Center User Guide for details).
Menu Options
Connection
Enter the IP Address or host name of the Moble Device Server portion of
the Avalanche Mobility Center Console. Set the order in which serial ports
or RF are used to check for the presence of the Moble Device Server.
Execution
Unavailable in this release. LXE recommends using AppLock, which is
resident on each Windows mobile device.
Server Contact
Setup synchronization, scheduled Mobile Device Server contact, suspend
and reboot settings.
Startup/Shutdown
Set options for Enabler program startup or shutdown.
Scan Config
This option allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special
barcode that is created by the Avalanche Mobility Center Console. Not
currently supported by LXE.
Display
Set up the Windows display at startup, on connect and during normal
mode. The settings can be adjusted by the user.
Shortcuts
Add, delete and update shortcuts to user-allowable applications.
Adapters
Enable or disable network and wireless settings. Select an adapter and
switch between the Avalanche Network Profile and manual settings.
Status
View the current adapter signal strength and quality, IP address, MAC
address, SSID, BSSID and Link speed. The user cannot edit this
information.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
119
Connection Tab
Figure 3-28 Connection Options
Avalanche Server
Address
Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server assigned to
the mobile device.
Check Serial
Connection
Indicates whether the Enabler should first check for serial port connection
to the Mobile Device Server before checking for a wireless connection to
the Mobile Device Server.
Disable
ActiveSync
Disable ActiveSync connection with the Mobile Device Server.
Restrict Adapter
Link Speed
When enabled and the link speed is less than the minimum specified, the
Enabler cannot connect.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
120
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Execution Tab
Note the dimmed options on this panel. This menu option is designed to manage downloaded
applications for automatic execution upon startup. LXE recommends using AppLock. See Chapter
6 – AppLock.
Figure 3-29 Execution Options (Dimmed)
Auto-Execute
Selection
An application that has been installed with the Avalanche Management
system can be run automatically following each boot.
Select AutoExecute App
The drop-down box provides a list of applications that have been installed
with the Avalanche Mobility Center Console.
Delay before
execution
Time delay before launching Auto-Execute application.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
121
Server Contact Tab
Figure 3-30 Server Contact Options
Sync Clock
Reset the time on the mobile computer based on the time on
the Mobile Device Server.
Contact
On Startup – Connect to the Mobile Device Server when the
Enabler is accessed.
On Resume – Connect to the Mobile Device Server when
resuming from Suspend mode.
On Ext. Power – Initiate connection to the Mobile Device
Server when the device is connected to an external power
source, such as being docked in a powered cradle.
Periodic Update - Allows the administrator to configure the
Enabler to contact the Mobile Device Server and query for
updates at a regular interval beginning at a specific time.
Wakeup device if suspended
If the time interval for periodic contact with the Mobile
Device Server occurs, a mobile device that is in Suspend
Mode can ‘wakeup’ and process updates.
Reboot before attempt
Reboot mobile device before attempting to contact the Mobile
Device Server.
Require external power
Only connect when the device has external power (connected
to an AC adapter).
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
122
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Startup/Shutdown Tab
LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function. AppLock is resident on each mobile
device with a Windows OS. AppLock configuration instructions are located in Chapter 6.
Figure 3-31 Startup / Shutdown Options
Do not monitor or launch
Enabler
When the device boots, do not launch the Enabler application and
do not attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server.
Monitor for updates
Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any
updates that are available. Do not launch the Enabler application.
Monitor and launch
Enabler
Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any
updates that are available. Launch the Enabler application.
Manage Taskbar (Lock or
Hide)
Note the dimmed options. The Enabler can restrict user access to
other applications when the user interface is accessed by either
locking or hiding the taskbar.
Program Shutdown
(Continue or Stop
monitoring)
The system administrator can control whether the Enabler
continues to monitor the Mobile Device Server for updates once
the Enabler application is exited.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
123
Scan Config Tab
Note:
Scan Config functionality is a standard option of the Wavelink Avalanche System but is
not currently supported by LXE on Windows CE devices.
Figure 3-32 Scan Config Option
Display Tab
Figure 3-33 Window Display Options
Update Window Display
The user interface for the Enabler can be configured to dynamically change based on the status of
the connection with the Mobile Device Server.
At startup
Half screen, Hidden or Full screen. Default is Half screen.
On connect
As is, Half screen, full screen, Locked full screen. Default is As is.
Normal
Half screen, Hidden or As is. Default is As is.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
124
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Shortcuts Tab
LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function. AppLock is resident on each mobile
device with a Windows OS. AppLock configuration instructions are located in Chapter 6.
Figure 3-34 Application Shortcuts
Configure shortcuts to other applications on the mobile device. Shortcuts are viewed and activated
in the Programs panel. This limits the user’s access to certain applications when the Enabler is
controlling the mobile device display.
LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function. See Chapter 6 AppLock for instruction.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
125
Adapters Tab
Note:
LXE recommends the user review the network settings configuration utilities and the
default values in Chapter 5 before setting All Adapters to Enable in the Adapters applet.
Figure 3-35 Adapters Options – Network
Manage Network
Setting
When enabled, the Enabler will control the network settings. This
parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center
Console and is enabled by default.
Manage Wireless
Settings
When enabled, the Enabler will control the wireless settings. This
parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center
Console and is disabled by default. This parameter setting does not
apply to Summit Clients only.
Current Adapter
Lists all network adapters currently installed on the mobile device.
Primary Adapter
Indicates if the Enabler is to attempt to configure the primary adapter
(active only if there are multiple network adapters).
Icon on taskbar
Places the Avalanche icon in the Avalanche taskbar that may,
optionally, override the standard Windows taskbar.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
126
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Use Avalanche Network Profile
The Enabler will apply all network settings sent to it by the
Mobility Center Console.
Avalanche Icon
Selecting the Avalanche Icon will access the Avalanche
Network Profile tab which will display current network
settings.
Figure 3-36 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
127
Use Manual
Settings
When enabled, the Enabler will ignore any network or wireless settings
coming from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and use only the
network settings on the mobile device.
Properties Icon
Selecting the Properties icon displays the Manual Settings Properties dialog
applet. From here, the user can configure Network, DNS and Wireless
parameters using the displays shown below:
Note:
A reboot may be required after enabling or disabling these options.
Network
DNS
Wireless
Figure 3-37 Manual Settings Properties Panels
For descriptions of these Enabler parameters, refer to Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration.
LXE does not recommend enabling Manage Wireless Settings for Summit Client devices.
When you download a profile that is configured to manage network and wireless settings, the
Enabler will not apply the manage network and wireless settings to the adapter unless the global
Manage wireless settings and Manage network settings options are enabled on the Adapters
panel (see Figure titled Adapters Options – Network).
Until these options are enabled, the network and wireless settings are controlled by the third-party
software associated with these settings.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
128
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Status Tab
The Status panel displays the current status of the mobile device network adapter selected in the
drop down box. Note the availability of the Windows standard Refresh button. When tapped, the
signal strength, signal quality and link speed are refreshed for the currently selected adapter. It
also searches for new adapters and may cause a slight delay to refresh the contents of the dropdown menu..
Figure 3-38 Status Display
Link speed indicates the speed at which the signal is being sent from the adapter to the mobile
device. Speed is dependent on signal strength.
Troubleshooting Avalanche Enabler
Cold Boot
If a device managed by Avalanche is cold-booted, a warmboot MUST be performed following the
coldboot. Failure to perform the warmboot will leave the device in an undetermined configuration
and it may not perform as expected. If the intention is to stop using Avalanche to manage the
device configuration, please see Enabler Uninstall Process earlier in this section.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
eXpress Scan
129
eXpress Scan
eXpress Scan may be used for the initial network configuration of the mobile device. Available
configuration parameters can include wireless network settings and the Avalanche Mobile Device
Server Address.
Barcodes are created with the eXpress Config utility. Please refer to Using Wavelink Avalanche on
LXE Windows Computers, available on the LXE manuals CD, for information on eXpress Config.
Depending on the barcode length and the number of parameters selected, eXpress Config
generates one or more barcodes for device configuration.
To use eXpress Scan to configure an LXE device:
1.
Start eXpress Scan on the LXE device by double tapping the eXpress Scan icon on the
desktop.
Figure 3-39 eXpress Scan Desktop Icon
2.
Enter the barcode password used when the barcode was created, if any.
Figure 3-40 eXpress Scan Password Input
Tap Start.
3.
Barcode 1 must be scanned first. The scanned data is displayed in the “Data” text box.
The password, if any, entered above is compared to the password entered when the
barcodes were created.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
130
eXpress Scan
Figure 3-41 Scan Barcode 1
4.
If the passwords match, the barcode data is processed and the screen is updated to reflect
the number of barcodes included in the set.
Figure 3-42 Scan Remaining Barcodes
The remaining barcodes may be scanned in any order. After a barcode is scanned, that
barcode is removed from the “Remaining:” list and placed in the “Scanned:” list.
5.
If the passwords do not match, an error message is displayed. The current screen can be
closed using the X in the upper right corner. The password can be re-entered and Barcode
1 scanned again.
6.
Once the first barcode is scanned, the remaining barcodes may be scanned in any order.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
eXpress Scan
131
7.
After the last barcode is scanned, the settings are automatically applied.
Figure 3-43 Configuring Settings
8.
Once configured, the device is warmbooted and the new settings are active.
9.
If Wavelink Avalanche is deployed and the appropriate network settings are configured,
the device connects to the Mobile Device Server and any software updates and additional
configuration data are downloaded.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
132
MX5X Reference Guide
eXpress Scan
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Chapter 4 Scanner
Introduction
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Scanner
Set scanner keyboard wedge parameters, enable or disable symbologies from being scanned,
active scanner port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for
available COM ports. Scanner parameters apply to the MX5X integrated scanner only. Barcode
manipulation parameters apply to barcodes scanned by the integrated scanner engine only.
Scanner configuration can be changed using the Scanner Control Panel or via the LXE API
functions. While the changed configuration is being read, the Scanner LED is solid amber. The
scanner is not operational during the configuration update.
Determine Your Scanner Software Version
Note:
Scanner control panel options are based on the installed software version levels, driver
and OS versions in MX5X devices. Your Scanner options may or may not be as described
in this section. To identify the current software version, go to Start | Settings | Control
Panel | Handheld.
If the Scanner Control panel looks like this . . . .
Go to . . . .
Chapter 3 System
Configuration, section
titled
or
This chapter
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
134
Barcode Processing Overview
Barcode Processing Overview
Note:
Steps 1-7 describe the barcode manipulation. Steps 8-12 describe how the manipulated
data is built. Step 13 describes how the manipulated data is output.
The complete sequence of barcode processing is as follows:
1.
Scanned barcode is tested for a code ID. If one is found, it is stripped from the data, and the
settings for the symbology specified are used. Otherwise, the All symbology settings are
used.
2.
If symbology is disabled, the scan is rejected.
3.
If the length of data (minus the code ID) is out of specified Min/Max range, the scan is
rejected.
4.
Strip leading data bytes unconditionally.
5.
Strip trailing data bytes unconditionally.
6.
Parse for, and strip if found, Barcode Data strings.
7.
Replace any control characters with string, as configured.
8.
Add prefix string to output buffer.
9.
If Code ID is *not* stripped, add saved code ID from above to output buffer.
10. Add processed barcode string from above to output buffer.
11. Add suffix string to output buffer.
12. Add a terminating NUL to the output buffer, in case the data is processed as a string.
13. If key output is enabled, start the process to output keys.
encountered:
If control characters are
• If Translate All is set, key is translated to CTRL + char, and output.
• If Translate All is not set, and key has a valid VK code, key is output.
• Otherwise, key is ignored (not output).
The data is ready to be read by applications.
See Barcode Processing Examples at the end of the Barcode Tab section.
Integrated Scanner Programming Guide and the Reset All barcode.
After scanning the Reset All (to factory defaults) barcode for the specific scan engine, the next
step is Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner. Tap the OK button and close the scanner applet.
This action will synchronize all scanner formats.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Factory Default Settings
135
Factory Default Settings
Factory Default Settings
Main
Port 1
Enable Internal Scanner Sound
Send Key Messages (WEDGE)
Output Enable
Port 2
Enable Internal Scanner Sound
Send key messages WEDGE
Output enable
Keys
Left Scan key
Right Scan key
COM Ports (COM1 / COM4)
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Data Bits
Barcode
Enable Code ID
Symbology Settings
AIM (ID)
Symbol (ID)
Custom
Control Character
Translate All
Character/Replacement
Custom Identifiers
Name
ID Code
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled (Dimmed)
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled (Dimmed)
Enter key
Enter key
9600
None
1
8
None
Enable Dimmed / Min - 1 to Max - all
Enable Dimmed
Enable Dimmed
Null
Disabled
Disabled
NULl / Ignore(drop)
Blank
Blank
Notes:
• If the internal scanner has to be configured to operate at any communication settings other than
9600, N, 8, 1 and the MX5X either loses power or a cold boot command is entered, the
Scanner applet must be reconfigured to match the scanner communication settings.
• ActiveSync will not work over a COM port if that COM port is enabled in the Scanner applet
as scanner input. For example, if COM 1 is being used by the scanner, COM 1 can’t be used by
any other program.
• LXE 8300 Tethered Scanners and Symbology Settings (AIM ID) – Before manipulating data
received from 8300 tethered scanners, and Symbology settings are desired, the user must
configure and append the Symbology ID as a prefix.
• If Send Key Messages … is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the
active window. When this box is not checked, the application will need to use the set of LXE
Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver. Note that this latter method is
significantly faster than using Wedge.
• Disable Enable Internal Scanner Sound when you want an application, not the scan engine or
the CE operating system, to control scanner audible notifications. Adjust the settings and tap
the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
136
Main Tab
Main Tab
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Main tab
Factory Default Settings
Main
Port 1
Port 2
Enable Internal Scanner
Sound
Send key messages
(WEDGE)
Output enable
Internal
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled (Dimmed)
Figure 4-1 Scanner Control / Main
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Note:
The left and right Scan buttons have no effect on tethered external scanners.
Parameters
Port -- Port 1 default is Internal. Port 2 default is Disabled.
Send Key Messages (WEDGE) -- The default setting is Enabled. This feature coexists with the
parameters and settings located on the Barcode tab. When Send Key Messages (WEDGE) is
checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the active window. When this box is
not checked, the application will need to use the set of LXE Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from
the scanner driver. Note that this latter method is significantly faster than using Wedge.
Even if Send Key Messages is enabled (key mode), the data is still available using the scanner
APIs (block mode).
When using the scanner APIs, refer to the CE API Programming Guide and the ClearBuf setting.
When two applications are reading the data using block mode, ClearBuf must be off so that the
data is not erased when read.
Note:
The user can also open the WDG: device and perform standard OS read functions to
retrieve the data without using the LXE APIs.
Enable Internal Scanner Sound -- The default is Enabled. Functionality of the internal scanner
driver engine includes audible tones on good scan (at the maximum db supported by the speaker)
and failed scan. Disable this parameter when good scan/bad scan sounds are to be handled by
alternate means e.g. application-controlled sound files. Rejected barcodes generate a bad scan
beep. In some cases, the receipt of data from the scanner triggers a good scan beep from a tethered
scanner, and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the processing causes a bad scan beep
from the MX5X on the same data.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Keys Tab
137
Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds
Good scan and bad scan sounds are stored in the Windows directory, as SCANGOOD.WAV and
SCANBAD.WAV. These are unprotected WAV files and can be replaced by a WAV file of the
user’s choice. By default a good scan sound on the MX5X is a single 2700 Hz beep, and a bad
scan sound is a double beep.
Keys Tab
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Keys
Figure 4-2 Scanner Properties / Keys Tab
The Keys tab sets up what happens when one of the Scan keys are pressed. Note that the two keys
can do the same or different functions.
L / R Scan Key
Function
Disabled
When either scan key is set to Disabled, it does nothing when pressed.
Scan
When set to Scan the integrated scanner is activated. If no integrated
scanner is present, the Scan selection is greyed out.
Enter
When set to Enter, both the Enter key and the (Scan button) / Enter key
perform the same function.
Tab
When set to Tab, both the Tab key and the (Scan button) / Tab key perform
the same function.
Field Exit
IBM TN5250 specific keypad only. The left Scan key can be programmed
as a Field Exit key.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
138
Keys Tab
L / R Scan Key
Function
Esc
When set to Esc the Scan key press halts the current function.
Virtual key
When set to Virtual, the Virtual Left (Scan button) key produces a default
F20 and the Virtual Right (Scan button) key produces a default F21.
Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value
The virtual keys are set in the User Interface. The text name of the key is typed into the text box
below the key. The strings listed below and, along with all single alphanumeric characters and
punctuation, can be used as replacements for the default F20 and F21.
Left
Backspace
F7
F15
Del
Right
Tab
F8
F16
Space
Up
F1
F9
F17
Enter
Down
F2
F10
F18
Esc
Home
F3
F11
F19
Break
End
F4
F12
F20
Page Up
F5
F13
F21
Page Down
F6
F14
Ins
Single letters, numbers and punctuation are valid;
a is valid but not aaaaa, 3 is valid but not 333.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
COM1/COM4 Tab
139
COM1/COM4 Tab
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | COM1 tab or COM4 tab
Factory Default Settings
COM1 Port
Baud Rate
9600
Stop Bits
1
Parity
None
Data Bits
8
COM4 Port
Baud Rate
9600
Stop Bits
1
Parity
None
Data Bits
8
Figure 4-3 Scanner Control / COM1 and COM4
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Note:
Pin 9 power for tethered scanners is supported via the Handheld Settings control panel
applet.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
140
Barcode Tab
Barcode Tab
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Barcode tab
The Scanner application (Wedge) can only enable or disable the processing of a barcode inside the
Wedge software.
The Scanner application enables or disables the Code ID that may be scanned.
Enabling or disabling a specific barcode symbology is done manually using the configuration
barcode in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide (available on the LXE Manuals CD and
the LXE ServicePass website).
Choose an option from the Enable Code ID drop-down box: None, AIM ID, Symbol ID, or
Custom ID.
Figure 4-4 Scanner Control / Barcode tab
Buttons
Symbology Settings -- Individually enable or disable a barcode from being scanned, set the
minimum and maximum size barcode to accept, strip Code ID, strip data from the beginning or
end of a barcode, or (based on configurable Barcode Data) add a prefix or suffix to a barcode
before transmission.
Ctrl Char Mapping -- Define the operations the LXE Wedge performs on control characters
(values less than 0x20) embedded in barcodes.
Custom Identifiers -- Defines an identifier that is at the beginning of barcode data which acts as a
Code ID. After a Custom Identifier is defined, Symbology Settings can be defined for the
identifier just like standard Code IDs.
See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Barcode Tab
141
Enable Code ID
This parameter programs the internal scanner to transmit the specified Code ID and/or determines
the type of barcode identifier being processed. If the scanner being configured is not an integrated
scanner, the scanner driver expects that the setting has been programmed into the scanner
externally, and that the data will be coming in with the specified Code ID attached.
Transmission of the Code ID is enabled at the scanner for all barcode symbologies, not for an
individual symbology. Code ID is sent from the scanner so the scanner driver can discriminate
between symbologies.
Options
None
Programs the internal scanner to disable transmission of a Code ID. The only entry in
the Symbology popup list is All.
AIM
Programs the internal scanner to transmit the AIM ID with each barcode. The combo
box in the Symbology control panel is loaded with the known AIM ID symbologies
for that platform, plus any configured Custom code IDs.
Symbol
Programs the internal scanner to transmit the Symbol ID with each barcode. The
combo box in the Symbology control panel is loaded with the known Symbol ID
symbologies for that platform, plus any configured Custom Code IDs.
Custom
Does not change the scanner’s Code ID transmission setting. The combo box in the
Symbology control panel is loaded with any configured Custom Code IDs.
Notes
• When Strip: Code ID (see Symbology panel) is not enabled, the code ID is sent as part of the
barcode data to an application.
• When Strip: Code ID (see Symbology panel) is enabled, the entire Code ID string is stripped
(i.e. treated as a Code ID).
• UPC/EAN Codes only: The code id for supplemental barcodes is not stripped.
• When Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol, Custom Code IDs appear at the end of the list
of standard Code IDs.
• When Enable Code ID is set to Custom, Custom Code IDs replace the list of standard Code
IDs.
• When Enable Code ID is set to Custom, AIM or Symbol Code IDs must be added to the end of
the Custom Code ID. For example, if a Custom Code ID ‘AAA’ is created to be read in
combination with an AIM ID for Code 39 ‘]A1’, the Custom Code ID must be entered with the
AIM ID code first then the Custom Code ID : ]A1AAA.
• When Enable Code ID is set to None, Code IDs are ignored.
• Custom symbologies appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog, but will be
processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver. This allows custom IDs, based on
actual code IDs, to be processed before the Code ID.
• The tethered scanner operation cannot be controlled by the scanner driver; therefore, a ‘good’
beep may be sounded from the tethered scanner even if a barcode from a tethered scanner is
rejected because of the configuration specified. The MX5X will still generate a ‘bad’ scan
beep, to indicate the barcode has been rejected.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
142
Barcode Tab
Barcode – Symbology Settings
The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is
being configured. The features available on the Symbology Settings dialog include the ability to
individually enable or disable a barcode from scanning, set the minimum and maximum size
barcode to accept, strip Code ID, strip data from the beginning or end of a barcode, or (based on
configurable Barcode Data) add a prefix or suffix to a barcode.
The Symbology drop-down box contains all symbologies supported on the MX5X. An asterisk
appears in front of symbologies that have already been configured or have been modified from the
default value.
Each time a Symbology is changed, the settings are saved as soon as the OK button is tapped.
Settings are also saved when a new Symbology is selected from the Symbology drop-down list.
Figure 4-5 Barcode Tab – Symbology Settings
Clear -- This button will erase any programmed overrides, returning to the default settings for the
selected symbology. If Clear is pressed when All is selected as the symbology, a confirmation
dialog appears, then all symbologies are reset to their factory defaults, and all star (*) indications
are removed from the list of Symbologies.
The order in which these settings are processed are:
• Code ID
• Leading / Trailing
• Barcode Data
Note:
When Enable Code ID is set to None on the Barcode tab and when All is selected in the
Symbology field, Enable and Strip Code ID on the Symbology panel are grayed and the
user is not allowed to change them, to prevent deactivating the scanner completely.
When All is selected in the Symbology field and the settings are changed, the settings in this
dialog become the defaults, used unless overwritten by the settings for individual symbologies.
This is also true for Custom IDs, where the code IDs to be stripped are specified by the user.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Barcode Tab
143
Note:
In Custom mode on the Barcode tab, any Code IDs not specified by the user will not be
stripped, because they will not be recognized as code IDs.
If a specific symbologys settings have been configured, a star (*) will appear next to it in the
Symbology drop-down box, so the user can tell which symbologies have been modified from their
defaults. If a particular symbology has been configured, the entire set of parameters from that
symbologies screen are in effect for that symbology. In other words, either the settings for the
configured symbology will be used, or the default settings are used, not a combination of the two.
If a symbology has not been configured (does not have an * next to it) the settings for All are used
which is not necessarily the defaults.
Parameters
Enable
This checkbox enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the symbology field.
The scanner driver searches the beginning of the barcode data for the type of ID
specified in the Barcode tab – Enable Code ID field (AIM or Symbol) plus any
custom identifiers.
When a code ID match is found as the scanner driver processes incoming barcode
data, if the symbology is disabled, the barcode is rejected. Otherwise, the other
settings in the dialog are applied and the barcode is processed. If the symbology is
disabled, all other fields on this dialog are grayed.
When there are no customized settings, and the Enable checkbox is unchecked (All is
selected and no other settings are customized) a confirmation dialog is presented to
the user You are about to disable all scan input – Is this what you want to do?. Tap
the Yes button or the No button. Tap the X button to close the dialog without making
a decision.
If there are customized settings, uncheck the Enable checkbox for the All symbology.
This results in disabling all symbologies except the customized ones.
Min
This field specifies the minimum length that the barcode data (not including Code ID)
must meet to be processed. Any barcode scanned that is less than the number of
characters specified in the Min field is rejected. The default for this field is 1.
Max
This field specifies the maximum length that the barcode data (not including Code ID)
can be to be processed. Any barcode scanned that has more characters than specified
in the Max field is rejected. The default for this field is All. If the value entered is
greater than the maximum value allowed for that symbology, the maximum valid
length will be used instead.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
144
Barcode Tab
Strip Leading/Trailing Control
This group of controls determines what data is removed from the barcode before the data is
buffered for the application. If all values are set, Code ID takes precedence over Leading and
Trailing; Barcode Data stripping is performed last. Stripping occurs before the Prefix and Suffix
are added, so does not affect them.
See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter.
Figure 4-6 Strip Leading / Trailing and Barcode Data
If the total number being stripped is greater than the number of characters in the barcode data, it
becomes a zero byte data string. If, in addition, Strip Code ID is enabled, and no prefix or suffix is
configured, the processing will return a zero-byte data packet, which will be rejected.
The operation of each type of stripping is defined below:
Leading
This strips the number of characters specified from the beginning of the barcode data
(not including Code ID). The data is stripped unconditionally. This is disabled by
default.
Trailing
This strips the number of characters specified from the end of the barcode data (not
including Code ID). The data is stripped unconditionally. This is disabled by default.
Code ID
Strips the Code ID based on the type code id specified in the Enable Code ID field in
the Barcode tab. Programmed custom identifiers are always checked (in the order they
are entered) and stripped, regardless of Enable Code ID setting. By default, Code ID
stripping is enabled for all symbologies (meaning code IDs will be stripped, unless
specifically configured otherwise).
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Barcode Tab
145
Barcode Data Match List
Barcode Data -- This panel is used to strip data that matches the entry in the Match list from the
barcode. Enter the data to be stripped in the text box and tap the Insert or Add button. The entry is
added to the Match list.
To remove an entry from the Match list, highlight the entry in the list and tap the Remove button.
Tap the OK button to store any additions, deletions or changes.
Figure 4-7 Barcode Data Match List
Barcode Data Edit Buttons
Add
Entering data into the text entry box enables the Add button. Tap the Add button and
the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list.
Insert
Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list. The Add button changes to Insert. Enter
data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button. The data is
added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list.
Edit
Double tap on the item to edit. Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing. The
Add button changes to Replace. When Replace is tapped, the values for the current
item in the list are updated.
Clear
All
When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected, tapping the Clear All button clears
the Custom ID list and any text written (and not yet added or inserted) in the Name
and ID Code text boxes. [Not available in this version: A popup dialog appears
asking for confirmation is displayed and after approval, all items in the Custom IDs
list are removed.]
Remove
The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs
list is selected. Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it.
Line items are Removed one at a time. Contents of the text box fields are cleared at
the same time.
Notes
• Prefix and Suffix data is always added on after stripping is complete, and is not affected by any
stripping settings.
• If the stripping configuration results in a 0 length barcode, a ‘good’ beep will still be sounded,
since barcode data was read from the scanner.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
146
Barcode Tab
Match List Rules
The data in the list is processed by the rules listed below:
• Strings in the list will be searched in the order they appear in the list. If the list contains ABC
and AB, in that order, incoming data with ABC will match first, and the AB will have no effect.
• When a match between the first characters of the barcode and a string from the list is found,
that string is stripped from the barcode data.
• Processing the list terminates when a match is found or when the end of the list is reached.
• If the wildcard * is not specified, the string is assumed to strip from the beginning of the
barcode data. The string ABC* strips off the prefix ABC. The string *XYZ will strip off the
suffix XYZ. The string ABC*XYZ will strip both prefix and suffix together. More than one *
in a configuration string is not allowed. (The User Interface will not prevent it, but results
would not be as expected, as only the first * is used in parsing to match the string.)
• The question mark wildcard ? may be used to match any single character in the incoming data.
For example, the data AB?D will match ABCD, ABcD, or AB0D, but not ABDE.
• The Barcode Data is saved per symbology configured. The Symbology selected in the
Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured.
• Note that the Code ID (if any are configured) is ignored by this dialog, regardless of the setting
of Strip: Code ID in the Symbologies dialog. If Strip Code ID is disabled, then the barcode
data to match must include the Code ID. If Strip Code ID is enabled, the data should not
include the Code ID since it has already been stripped.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Barcode Tab
147
Add Prefix/Suffix Control
See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter.
Figure 4-8 Add Prefix/Suffix Control
Use this option to specify a string of text, hex values or hat encoded values to be added to the
beginning (prefix) or the end (suffix) of the barcode data. Up to 19 characters can be included in
the string. The string can include any character from the keyboard plus characters specified by
hex equivalent or entering in hat encoding. Please see the Hat Encoding section in Appendix D
for a list of characters with their hex and hat-encoded values.
Using the Escape function allows entering of literal hex and hat values.
Add
Prefix
To enable a prefix, check the Prefix checkbox and enter the desired string in the
textbox. The default is disabled (unchecked) with a blank text string. When
barcode data is processed, the Prefix string is sent to the output buffer before any
other data. Because all stripping operations have already occurred, stripping
settings do not affect the prefix. The prefix is added to the output buffer for the
Symbology selected from the pulldown list. If ‘All’ is selected, the prefix is added
for any symbology that has not been specifically configured.
Add
Suffix
To enable a suffix, check the Suffix checkbox and enter the desired string in the
textbox. The default is disabled (unchecked) with a blank text string. When
barcode data is processed, the Suffix string is sent to the output buffer after the
barcode data. Because all stripping operations have already occurred, stripping
settings do not affect the suffix. The suffix is added to the output buffer for the
Symbology selected from the pulldown list. If ‘All’ is selected, the suffix is added
for any symbology that has not been specifically configured.
See Hat Encoding and Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart in Appendix D Reference Material.
Note:
Non-ASCII equivalent keys in Key Message mode are unavailable in this option. NonASCII equivalent keys include the function keys (e.g. <F1>), arrow keys, Page up, Page
down, Home, and End.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
148
Barcode Tab
Barcode – Ctrl Char Mapping
See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter.
The Ctrl Char Mapping button activates a dialog to define the operations the LXE Wedge
performs on control characters (values less than 0x20) embedded in barcodes. Control characters
can be replaced with user-defined text which can include hat encoded or hex encoded values. In
key message mode, control characters can also be translated to their control code equivalent key
sequences.
Figure 4-9 Barcode Tab – Ctrl Char Mapping
See Hat Encoding and Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart in Appendix D Reference Material.
Translate All
When Translate All is checked, unprintable ASCII characters (characters below 20H) in scanned
barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are sent in
Character mode.
The wedge provides a one-to-one mapping of control characters to their equivalent
‘control+character sequence’ of keystrokes. If control characters are translated, the translation is
performed on the barcode data, prefix, and suffix before the keystrokes are simulated.
Translate All
MX5X Reference Guide
This option is grayed unless the user has Key Message mode (on the Main tab)
selected. In Key Message mode, when this option is enabled, control characters
embedded in a scanned barcode are translated to their equivalent ‘control’ key
keystroke sequence (13 [0x0d] is translated to Control+M keystrokes as if the
user pressed the CTRL, SHIFT, and m keys on the keypad Additionally, when
Translate All is disabled, any control code which has a keystroke equivalent
(enter, tab, escape, backspace, etc.) is output as a keystroke. Any control code
without a keystroke equivalent is dropped.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Barcode Tab
149
Character
This is a drop down combo box that contains the control character name. Refer
to the Character drop down box for the list of control characters and their
names. When a character name is selected from the drop down box, the default
text Ignore (drop) is shown and highlighted in the Replacement edit control.
Ignore (drop) is highlighted so the user can type a replacement if the control
character is not being ignored. Once the user types any character into the
Replacement edit control, reselecting the character from the Character drop
down box redisplays the default Ignore (drop) in the Replacement edit control.
Replacement
The edit control where the user types the characters to be assigned as the
replacement of the control character. Replacements for a control character are
assigned by selecting the appropriate character from the Character drop down
box, typing the replacement in the Replacement edit control (according to the
formats defined above) and then selecting Assign. The assigned replacement is
then added to the list box above the Assign button.
For example, if ‘Carriage Return’ is replaced by Line Feed (by specifying ‘^J’
or ‘0x0A’) in the configuration, the value 0x0d received in any scanned barcode
(or defined in the prefix or suffix) will be replaced with the value 0x0a.
The Wedge then sends Ctrl+J to the receiving application, rather than Ctrl+M.
List Box
The list box shows all user-defined control characters and their assigned
replacements. All replacements are enclosed in single quotes to delimit white
space that has been assigned.
Delete
This button is grayed unless an entry in the list box is highlighted. When an
entry (or entries) is highlighted, and Delete is selected, the highlighted material
is deleted from the list box.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
150
Barcode Tab
Barcode – Custom Identifiers
Code IDs can be defined by the user. This allows processing parameters to be configured for
barcodes that do not use the standard AIM or Symbol IDs or for barcodes that have data embedded
at the beginning of the data that acts like a Code ID.
These are called custom code IDs and are included in the Symbology drop down box in the
Symbology dialog, unless Enable Code ID is set to None. When the custom code ID is found in a
barcode, the configuration specified for the custom Code ID is applied to the barcode data. The
dialog below allows the custom Code IDs to be configured.
It is intended that custom code IDs are used to supplement the list of standard code IDs (if Enable
Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol), or to replace the list of standard code IDs (if Enable Code ID is
set to Custom).
When Enable Code ID is set to None, custom code IDs are ignored.
Note:
Custom symbologies will appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog, and are
processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver itself. This allows custom IDs
based on actual code IDs to be processed before the code ID itself.
Note:
When Strip: Code ID is enabled, the entire custom Code ID string is stripped (i.e.,
treated as a Code ID).
Figure 4-10 Barcode Tab – Custom Identifiers
After adding, changing and removing items from the Custom IDs list, tap the OK button to save
changes and return to the Barcode panel.
Parameters
Name
text box
Name is the descriptor that is used to identify the custom Code ID. Names must be
unique from each other; however, the Name and ID Code may have the same value.
Name is used in the Symbology drop down box to identify the custom Code ID in a
user-friendly manner. Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a
custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list.
ID
Code
text box
ID Code defines the data at the beginning of a barcode that acts as an identifier (the
actual Code ID). Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom
Code ID to the Custom IDs list.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Barcode Tab
151
Buttons
Add
Entering data into both the Name and ID Code fields enables the Add button. Tap
the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID
list.
Insert
Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list. The Add button changes to Insert. Enter
data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button. The data is
added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list.
Edit
Double tap on the item to edit. Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing. The
Add button changes to Replace. When Replace is tapped, the values for the current
item in the list are updated.
Clear
All
When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected, tapping the Clear All button clears
the Custom ID list and any text written (and not yet added or inserted) in the Name
and ID Code text boxes.
Remove
The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs
list is selected. Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it.
Line items are Removed one at a time. Contents of the text box fields are cleared at
the same time.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
152
Control Code Replacement Examples
Control Code Replacement Examples
Example
Control
Character
Example
configuration
The control
character is
discarded from the
barcode data, prefix
and suffix
ESCape
‘Ignore (drop)’
0x1B in the
barcode is
discarded.
Printable text
Text is substituted
for Control
Character.
Start of TeXt
‘STX’
0x02 in a barcode
is converted to the
text ‘STX’.
Hat-encoded text
The hat-encoded
text is translated to
the equivalent hex
value.
Carriage Return
‘^M’
Value 0x0d in a
barcode is
converted to the
value 0x0d.
Escaped hat-encoded
text
The hat-encoding to
pass thru to the
application.
Horizontal Tab
‘\^I’
Value 0x09 in a
barcode is
converted to the
text ‘^I’.
Hex-encoded text
The hex-encoded
text is translated to
the equivalent hex
value.
Carriage Return
‘0x0A’
Value 0x0D in a
barcode is
converted to a
value 0x0A.
Escaped hex-encoded
text
The hex-encoding to
pass thru to the
application.
Vertical Tab
‘\0x0A’ or ‘0\x0A’
Value 0x0C is a
barcode is
converted to text
‘0x0A’
Configuration data
Translation
Ignore(drop)
Translated data
Figure 4-11 Control Code Replacement Examples
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Control Code Replacement Examples
153
Barcode Processing Examples
The following table shows examples of stripping and prefix/suffix configurations. The examples assume that the
scanner is configured to transmit an AIM identifier.
Symbology
All
EAN-128 (]C1)
EAN-13 (]E0)
Intrlv 2 of 5 (]IO)
Code93
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Min length
1
4
1
1
Max length
all
all
all
10
Strip Code ID
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Strip Leading
3
0
3
3
‘*123’
‘1*’
‘456’
0
0
3
3
Prefix
‘aaa’
‘bbb’
‘ccc’
‘ddd’
Suffix
‘www’
‘xxx’
‘yyy’
‘zzz’
Enable
Strip Barcode Data
Strip Trailing
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
154
Control Code Replacement Examples
Provided that the wedge is configured with the previous table, below are examples of scanned
barcode data and results of these manipulations.
Barcode Symbology
Raw Scanner Data
Resulting Data
EAN-128
]C11234567890123
bbb1234567890xxx
EAN-128
]C111234567890123
bbb11234567890xxx
EAN-128
]C1123
< rejected > (too short)
EAN-13
]E01234567890987
ccc]E04567890yyy
EAN-13
]E01231234567890987
ccc]E0234567890yyy
EAN-13
]E01234
ccc]E0yyy
I2/5
]I04444567890987654321
< rejected > (too long)
I2/5
]I04444567890123
ddd7890zzz
I2/5
]I0444
dddzzz
I2/5
]I022245622
ddd45zzz
Code-93
]G0123456
< rejected > (disabled)
Code-93
]G0444444
< rejected > (disabled)
Code-39
]A01234567890
aaa4567890www
Code-39 full ASCII
]A41231234567890
aaa1234567890www
Code-39
]A4
< rejected > (too short)
Rejected barcodes generate a bad scan beep. In some cases, the receipt of data from the scanner
triggers a good scan beep (from the external scanner), and then the rejection of scanned barcode
data by the processing causes a bad scan beep on the same data.
Figure 4-12 Barcode Processing Examples
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Length Based Barcode Stripping
155
Length Based Barcode Stripping
Use this procedure to create symbology rules for two barcodes with the same symbology but with
different discrete lengths. This procedure is not applicable for barcodes with variable lengths
(falling between a maximum value and a minimum value).
Example 1:
• A normal AIM or Symbol symbology role can be created for the desired barcode ID.
• Next, a custom barcode symbology must be created using the same Code ID as the original
AIM or Symbol ID rule and each rule would have unique length settings.
Example 2:
For the purposes of this example, the following sample barcode parameters will be used –
EAN128 and Code128 barcodes. Some of the barcodes start with ‘00’ and some start with ‘01’.
The barcodes are different lengths.
• 34 character length with first two characters = “01” (strip first 2 and last 18)
• 26 character length with first two characters = “01” (strip first 2 and last 10)
• 24 character length with first two characters = “01” (strip first 2 and last 8). This 24 character
barcode is CODE128.
• 20 character length with first two characters = “00” (strip first 0 (no characters) and last 4)
On the Barcode tab, set Enable Code ID to AIM.
Create four custom IDs, using 1 for EAN128 barcode and 0 for Code128 barcode.
•
•
•
•
c1 = Code = ‘]C1’
c2 = Code = ‘]C1’
c3 = Code = ‘]C0’ (24 character barcode is CODE128)
c4 = Code = ‘]C1’
AIM Custom IDs
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
156
Length Based Barcode Stripping
AIM custom symbology setup is assigned in the following manner:
• c1 min length = 34, max length = 34, strip leading 2, strip trailing 18, Code ID enabled,
Barcode Data = “01”
• c2 min length = 26, max length = 26, strip leading 2, strip trailing 10, Code ID enabled,
Barcode Data = “01”
• c3 min length = 24, max length = 24, strip leading 2, strip trailing 8, Code ID enabled, Barcode
Data = “01”
• c4 min length = 20, max length = 20, strip leading 0, strip trailing 4, Code ID enabled, Barcode
Data = “00”
Add the AIM custom symbologies. Refer to the previous section Barcode – Symbology Settings
for instruction.
AIM Custom Setup for C1
Click the Barcode Data button. Click the Add button.
Add the data for the match codes.
Barcode Match Data for C1
Refer to the previous section BarcodeData Match List for instruction.
Scan a barcode and examine the result.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration
Introduction
The Cisco and Symbol clients are 802.11b wireless devices and are compatible only with the
Windows CE .NET 4.2 operating system. Instruction for Cisco and Symbol clients is located
in Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2 section titled Wireless Network Configuration.
Note:
It may be necessary to upgrade client drivers in order to use certain Summit Client
Utility (SCU) features described in this chapter. Please contact your LXE representative
for details.
The MX5X mobile device offers a choice of Cisco, Symbol and Summit clients. The Summit
client is an 802.11g network device and is compatible with Windows CE operating systems.
The wireless client can be configured for no encryption, WEP encryption or WPA security (WPA
is N/A with Symbol client).
Certificates are necessary for many of the WPA authentications. Please refer to the Certificates
section at the end of this chapter for more information on generating and installing certificates.
Please refer to the table below for the security options supported for each client type.
Security Options Supported
Summit (CE .NET 4.2
and CE 5)
Cisco (CE .NET)
Symbol
(CE .NET)
None
WEP
LEAP
EAP-FAST
PEAP-MSCHAP
WPA/LEAP
WPA-PSK
PEAP-GTC
EAP-TLS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Prerequisites
• Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point
• WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys
• The Summit profile settings for Auth Type, EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security
option chosen.
Please refer to the LXE Security Primer to prepare the Authentication Server and
Access Point for MX5X communication. It is available on the LXE Manuals CD
and the LXE ServicePass website.
It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of
certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct
authentication will fail.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
158
Summit Client Configuration
Summit Client Configuration
Summit Client Utility Icon
Note:
Terminology used on your screen displays may be different than those shown in the
figures in this chapter.
Start the Summit Client configuration by tapping the Summit Client Utility icon on the desktop.
You can also start the Summit Client utility by tapping Start | Programs | Summit | SCU.
Important: After making changes to a profile, tap the Commit button and perform a Warm Reset /
Suspend and Resume.
Summit Client Utility
Access: Start | Programs | Summit | SCU or SCU Icon on Desktop or Summit Tray Icon (if
present) or WiFi icon in the Windows CE Control Panel (if present)
or
Figure 5-1 Summit Client Utility (SCU)
The Main tab provides information, the Admin Login and active config (profile) selection.
Profile specific parameters are found on the Config or Profile tab. The parameters on this tab can
be set to unique values for each profile.
The Status tab contains information on the current connection.
The Diags tab provides utilities to troubleshoot the client (network device). Update Driver and Site
Survey functions are not available in this release. Contact your LXE representative for availability.
Global parameters are found on the Global Settings or Global tab. The values for these parameters
apply to all profiles.
Help
Help is available by clicking the ? button in the title bar on most SCU screens.
SCU Help may also be accessed by selecting Start | Help and tapping the Summit Client Utility
link. The SCU does not have to be open to view the help information using this option.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
159
Summit Tray Icon
The Summit tray icon
provides access to the SCU and is a visual indicator of link status.
The Summit tray icon is displayed when:
•
•
•
•
The Summit radio is installed and active.
The Windows Zero Config utility is not active.
The Tray Icon setting is On.
Tap the icon to launch the Summit Configuration Utility.
Use the tray icon to view the link status:
Summit client is not currently associated or authenticated to an Access Point.
The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is -80 dBm or
weaker.
The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is stronger than
-80dBm but not stronger than -60 dBm.
The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is stronger than
-60 dBm but not stronger than -40 dBm.
The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is stronger than
-40 dBm.
Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Client
The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X
through them, indicating the Wireless Zero Config application is enabled and the MX5X is not
connected to a network. You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit
Client Utility to connect to your network.
LXE recommends using the Summit Client Utility to manage wireless connectivity.
To use Wireless Zero Config, first open the Summit Client Utility.
1.
Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Config drop down box.
2.
A message appears that a Power Cycle is required to make settings activate properly. Tap OK.
3.
Tap the Disable Radio button to remove the connection to the Summit Client Utility. The text
on the button changes to Enable Radio.
4.
Tap the Power button to place the MX5X in Suspend, then tap the Power button to wake the
MX5X from Suspend mode.
The Wireless Zero Config utility begins.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
160
Summit Client Configuration
Main Tab
Note:
Terminology used on your screen displays may be different than those shown in the
figures in this chapter.
Factory Default Settings
Admin Login password
Radio
Active Config/Profile
Regulatory Domain
SUMMIT
Enabled
Default
FCC or ETSI
or
Figure 5-2 SCU – Main Tab
The Main tab displays information about the wireless client device including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SCU (Summit Client Utility) version
Driver version
Radio Type (the radio is an 802.11 b/g radio)
Regulatory Domain
Copyright Information may be accessed by tapping the About SCU button.
Active Config / Active Profile profile name.
Status of the client (Down, Associated, Authenticated, etc).
The Active Config or Active Profile can be switched without logging in to Admin mode. Selecting
a different profile from the drop down list does not require logging in to Admin mode. The profile
must already exist. LXE recommends performing a Suspend/Resume function when changing
profiles. Profiles can be created or edited after the Admin password has been entered and accepted
(LXE recommends that only the default profile be edited).
The Disable Radio button is used to disable the network card. Once disabled, the button label
changes to Enable Radio. By default the radio is enabled.
The Admin Login button provides access to editing client parameters. Profile (or Config) and
Global Settings (or Global) parameters may only be edited after entering the Admin Login
password. The password is case-sensitive. Once logged in, the button label changes to Admin
Logout. To logout, either tap the Admin Logout button or exit the SCU without tapping the Admin
Logout button.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
161
Admin Login
To login to Admin mode, tap the Admin login button.
Once logged in, the button label changes to Admin Logout. The admin is automatically logged out
when the SCU is exited. The Admin can either tap the Admin Logout button, or a navigation
button (X or OK), to logout. The Admin remains logged in when the SCU is not closed and a
Suspend/Resume function is performed.
Figure 5-3 Main Tab – Enter Admin Password
Enter the Admin password (the default password is SUMMIT and is case sensitive) and tap OK. If
the password is incorrect, an error message is displayed.
The Admin default password can be changed on the Global Settings or Global tab.
The end user can:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Turn the radio on or off on the Main tab.
Select active Config (Profile) on the Main tab.
View the current parameter settings for the profiles on the Config or Profile tab.
View the global parameter settings on the Global Settings or Global tab.
The current connection details on the Status tab.
Radio status, software versions and regulatory domain on the Main tab.
Access additional troubleshooting features on the Diags tab.
After Admin login, the end user can also:
• Create, edit, rename and delete profiles on the Config or Profile tab.
• Edit global parameters on the Global Setting or Global tabs.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
162
Summit Client Configuration
Config or Profile Tab
Note:
Tap the Commit button to save changes before leaving this panel or the SCU. If the panel
is exited before tapping the Commit button, changes are not saved!
Factory Default Settings
Config / Profile
Default
SSID
Blank
Client Name
Blank
Power Save
Fast
Tx Power
Maximum
Bit Rate
Auto
Radio Mode
BG Optimized
or
BG Rates Full
Auth Type
Open
EAP type
None
Encryption
None
or
Figure 5-4 SCU – Config / ProfileTab
When logged in as an Admin (see Admin Login), use the Config or Profile tab to manage profiles.
When not logged in as an Admin, the parameters can be viewed, but cannot be changed. The
buttons on this tab are dimmed if the Admin is not logged in.
Buttons
Button
Function
Commit
Saves the profile settings made on this screen. Settings are saved in the profile.
Credentials
Allows entry of a username and password, certificate names, and other
information required to authenticate with the access point. The information
required depends on the EAP type.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
163
Button
Function
Delete
Deletes the profile. The current active profile cannot be deleted and an error
message is displayed if a delete is attempted.
New
Creates a new profile with the default settings (see Config/Profile Parameters)
and prompts for a unique name. If the name is not unique, an error message is
displayed and the new profile is not created.
Rename
Assigns a new, unique name. If the new name is not unique, an error message is
displayed and the profile is not renamed.
Scan
Opens a window that lists access points that are broadcasting their SSIDs. Tap
the Refresh button to view an updated list of APs. Each AP’s SSID, its received
signal strength indication (RSSI) and whether or not data encryption is in use
(true or false). Sort the list by tapping on the column headers.
If the scan finds more than one AP with the same SSID, the list displays the AP
with the strongest RSSI and the least security.
Figure 5-5 SCU - Scan
If you are logged in as an Admin, tap an SSID in the list and tap the Connect
button, you return to the Profile window to create a profile for that SSID, with
the profile name being the same as the SSID (or the SSID with a suffix such as
“_1” if a profile with the SSID as its name exists already).
WEP Keys /
PSK Keys
Note:
Allows entry of WEP keys or pass phrase as required by the type of encryption.
Unsaved Changes -- Some versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button
is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from the Config or
Profile tab.
Important – The settings for Auth Type, EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security type
chosen. Please refer to Wireless Security later in this Summit Client Utility section to determine
the proper settings for the security type implemented on the wireless LAN.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
164
Summit Client Configuration
Config/Profile Parameters
Parameter
Default
Explanation
Config or Edit Profile
Default
A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters,
establishes the name of the profile.
Options are Default or ThirdPartyConfig.
SSID
Blank
A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Establishes the Service Set Identifier (SSID) of the
WLAN to which the client connects.
Client Name
Blank
A string of up to 16 characters. The client name is
assigned to the network card and the device using
the network. The client name may be passed to
networking wireless devices, e.g. Access Points.
Power Save
Fast
Power save mode is On.
Options are: Constantly Awake Mode (CAM) power
save off, Maximum (power saving mode) and Fast
(power saving mode).
Tx Power
Maximum
Maximum setting regulates Tx power to the Max
power setting for the current regulatory domain.
Options are: Maximum, 50mW, 30mW, 20mW,
10mW, 5mW or 1mW. Depending on the version of
the SCU, the options for Tx Power are between
Maximum and 1mW
Bit Rate
Auto
Setting the rate to Auto will allow the Access Point
to automatically negotiate the bit rate with the
compact flash wireless device.
Options are: Auto, 1 Mbit, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18,
24, 36, 48 or 54 Mbit.
Radio Mode
BG Optimized
or
BG Rates Full
Specify 802.11g and/or 802.11b when
communicating with the Access Point.
Options are: B rates only, BG Rates full, G rates
only, BG optimized.
Note:
Default value may vary depending on
installed SCU driver version.
It is important this parameter correspond to the AP
to which the device is to connect. For example, if
this parameter is set to G rates only, the LXE device
may only connect to APs set for G rates and not
those set for B and G rates.
Auth Type
Open
802.11 authentication type used when associating
with the Access Point.
Options are: Open, LEAP, or Shared key.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
165
Parameter
Default
Explanation
EAP Type
None
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) type used
for 802.1x authentication to the Access Point.
Options are: None, LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAPMSCHAP, PEAP-GTC, or EAP-TLS.
Note: EAP type chosen determines whether the
Credentials button is active and also determines the
available entries in the Credentials pop-up window.
Encryption
None
Type of encryption to be used to protect transmitted
data.
Options are: None, Manual WEP, Auto WEP, WPA
PSK, WPA TKIP, WPA2 PSK, WPA2 AES, CCKM
TKIP, CKIP Manual, CKIP Auto, Manual WEP
CKIP, or Auto WEP CKIP.
Note:
The Encryption type chosen determines if the WEP/PSK Keys button is active and also
determines the available entries in the WEP or PSK pop-up window.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
166
Summit Client Configuration
Status Tab
This screen displays information on the current profile and wireless connection. Information
cannot be edited or changed on the Status panel.
or
Figure 5-6 SCU – Status Tab
The panel displays:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Profile being used.
The client name, IP address and MAC address.
The status of the network connection (down, associated, authenticated, etc.).
The name, IP address and MAC address of the Access Point maintaining the connection to the
network.
Channel currently being used for wireless traffic.
Beacon period – the time between AP beacons in kilomicroseconds (1 kilomicrosecond –
1,024 microseconds).
DTIM interval – A multiple of the beacon period that specifies how often the beacon contains
a delivery traffic indication message (DTIM). The DTIM tells power saving devices a packet is
waiting for them. For example, if DTIM = 3, then every third beacon contains a DTIM.
Current transmit power in mW.
Rate in Mbps.
Signal strength (RSSI) and signal quality (changes with network activity). Signal quality is a
measure of the clarity of the signal and displayed as a percentage.
Note:
After completing radio configuration, it is good practice to review this screen to verify
the radio has associated (no encryption, WEP) or authenticated (LEAP, any WPA), as
indicated above.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
167
Diags Tab
The Diags panel can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and wireless connectivity issues
for the IP address shown above the Release/Renew button. Admin login is required for the
(Re)connect button function.
Note:
Diagnostics and Site Survey functions are not available in all SCU releases.
or
Figure 5-7 SCU – Diags Tab
Buttons
Button
Function
(Re)connect
Tap this button to apply, or reapply, the current config profile and attempt to
associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN. Activity is logged in the
Diagnostic Output text box on the lower part of the panel.
Release/Renew
Release the current IP address to obtain a new IP address. This option renews
the IP address when applicable. Activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output
text box. If a fixed IP address has been assigned to the wireless device, this is
also noted in the Diagnostic Output box. Note that the current IP address is
displayed next to the Release/Renew button.
Start Ping
Tap the text box and type an IP address to Ping. Tap the Start Ping button to
start pinging the IP address. The button name changes to Stop Ping. Tap Stop
Ping to end the pinging process. The pinging process ends when any other
button on this panel is tapped or a different menu tab is selected. Ping results
are displayed in the Diagnostic Output text box.
Diagnostics
Tapping this button begins an attempt to (re)connect to the wireless LAN.
This option provides more data in the Diagnostics Output text box than the
(Re)connect option. The data dump includes client state, profile settings,
global settings, and a list of access points by SSID broadcasting in the
wireless device’s immediate area. The text file created, _sdc_diag, is placed
in the Windows folder. It is overwritten when Diagnostics is run again. Not
available in earlier releases.
Tap the Save To . . . button to save the Diagnostics log to a TXT file in the
(default) My Device folder.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
168
Summit Client Configuration
Button
Function
Site Survey
Not available in this release.
Global or Global Settings Tab
The parameters on this panel can only be changed when an Admin is logged in with a password.
The current values for the parameters can be viewed by the general user without requiring a
password.
Note:
Tap the Commit button to save changes. If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit
button, changes are not saved!
or
Figure 5-8 SCU – Global /Global Settings Tab
Custom Parameter Option
LXE does not support the parameter Custom option. The parameter value is displayed as
“Custom” when the operating system registry has been edited to set the Summit parameter to a
value that is not available from the parameter’s drop down list. Selecting Custom from the drop
down list has no effect. Selecting any other value from the drop down list will overwrite the
“custom” value set in the registry.
Factory Default Settings
Parameter
RX Diversity
TX Diversity
Preamble
G Short Slot
Roam Trigger
Roam Delta
Roam Period
BG Channel Set
Aggressive Scan
Frag Threshold
RTS Threshold
MX5X Reference Guide
Factory Default Value
On-Start on Main
On
Auto (not available in all versions)
Auto (not available in all versions)
-65 dBm
10 dBm
10 sec.
Full
On (not available in all versions)
2346
2347
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
169
Parameter
Ping Payload
Ping Timeout
Ping Delay ms
LED
Hide Passwords
Admin Password
Auth Timeout
Certs Path
CCX
WMM
Tray Icon
Factory Default Value
32 bytes
5000
1000
Off
Off
Blank
8 sec. (not available in all versions)
System
Off
Off
On
Global Parameters
Parameter
Default
Function
RX
Diversity
On-start
on Main
How to handle antenna diversity when receiving packets from the
Access Point.
Options are: Main Only (use the main antenna only), Aux Only
(use the auxiliary antenna only), On-start on Main (on startup, use
the main antenna), or On-start on Aux (on startup, use the auxiliary
antenna).
TX
Diversity
On
How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to the
Access Point.
Options are: Main only (use the main antenna only), Aux only (use
the auxiliary antenna only), or On (use diversity or both antennas).
Preamble
Auto
The type of network header, or preamble, for packets. (Not
available in all versions)
Options are: Auto, Short, or Long.
G Short
Slot
Auto
802.1x short slot timing mode. (Not available in all versions)
Options are: Auto, On, or Off. Note The G Short Slot parameter
has no effect on the Summit client device.
This option is always set to On regardless of the parameter setting.
This parameter is not present in some versions of the SCU.
Roam
Trigger
-65 dBm
If signal strength is less than this trigger value, the client looks for
a different Access Point with a stronger signal.
Options are: -50 dBm, -55, -60, -65, -70, -75, -80, -85, -90 dBm or
Custom.
Roam Delta
10 dBm
The amount by which a different Access Point signal strength must
exceed the current Access Point signal strength before roaming to
the different Access Point is attempted.
Options are: 5 dBm, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 dBm or Custom.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
170
Summit Client Configuration
Parameter
Default
Function
Roam
Period
10 sec
The amount of time, after association or a roam scan with no roam,
that the radio collects Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI)
scan data before a roaming decision is made.
Options are: 5 sec, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 seconds
or Custom.
Frag
Thresh
2346
If the packet size (in bytes) exceeds the specified number of bytes
set in the fragment threshold, the packet is fragmented (sent as
several pieces instead of as one block). Use a low setting in areas
where communication is poor or where there is a great deal of
wireless interference.
Options are: Any number between 256 bytes and 2346 bytes.
RTS
Thresh
2347
If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the
Request to Send (RTS) threshold, an RTS is sent before sending
the packet. A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in areas
where many client devices are associating with the Access Point.
Options are: Any number between 0 and 2347.
Ping
Payload
32 bytes
Ping
Timeout ms
5000
Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping.
Options are: 32 bytes, 64, 128, 512, or 1024 bytes.
The amount of time, in milliseconds, that a device will be
continuously pinged. The Stop Ping button can be tapped to end the
ping process ahead of the ping timeout.
Options are: Any number between 0 and 30000 ms.
Ping Delay
ms
1000
The amount of time, in milliseconds, between each ping after a
Start Ping button tap.
Options are: Any number between 0 and 30000 ms.
LED
Off
The LED on the wireless card is not visible to the user when the
wireless card is installed in a sealed mobile device.
Options are: On, Off.
Hide
Password
Off
If On, the Summit Config Utility masks passwords (characters on
the screen are displayed as an *) as they are typed and when they
are viewed. When Off, password characters are not masked.
Options are: On, Off.
Admin
Password
SUMMIT
A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must be entered
when the Admin Login button is tapped. If Hide Password is On,
the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry
text box. The password is case sensitive. This value is masked
when the Admin is logged out.
Options are: none.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
171
Parameter
Default
Function
Certs Path
System
A valid directory path, of up to 64 characters, where WPA
Certificate Authority and User Certificates are stored on the mobile
device. LXE suggests ensuring the directory path currently exists
before assigning the path in this parameter. See sections titled Root
Certificates and User Certificates later in this chapter for
instructions on obtaining CA and User Certificates. This value is
masked when the Admin is logged out.
Options are: none.
For example, when the valid certificate is stored as My
Computer/System/mycertificate.cer, enter System in the Certs Path
text box as the directory path.
CCX
Off
Use of Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX) radio management and
AP specified maximum transmit power features.
Options are: On, Off
WMM
Off
Use of Wi-Fi Multimedia extensions.
Options are: On, Off
Tray Icon
On
Determines if the Summit icon is displayed in the System tray.
Options are: On, Off.
Aggressive
Scan
On
When set to On and the current connection to an AP weakens, the
radio aggressively scans for available APs. (Not available in all
versions)
Aggressive scanning works with standard scanning (set through
Roam Trigger, Roam Delta and Roam Period). Aggressive
scanning should be set to On unless there is significant co-channel
interference due to overlapping APs on the same channel.
Options are: On, Off.
Auth
Timeout
8 sec
Specifies the number of seconds the Summit software waits for an
EAP authentication request to succeed or fail. (Not available in all
versions)
If the authentication credentials are stored in the active profile and
the authentication times out, the association fails. No error message
or prompting for corrected credentials is displayed.
If the authentication credentials are not stored in the active profile
and the authentication times out, the user is again prompted to enter
the credentials.
Options are: An integer from 3 to 60.
Note:
Tap the Commit button to save changes. If the panel is closed before tapping the Commit
button, changes are not saved!
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
172
Summit Client Configuration
Summit Wireless Security
Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Config or Profile tab according to
the type of wireless security used by your network. The instructions that follow are the minimum
required to successfully connect to a network. Your system may require more parameters than are
listed in these instructions. Please see your System Administrator for complete information about
your network and its wireless security requirements.
Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of
certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will
fail.
Default profile
LXE recommends editing the Default profile instead of creating new
profiles. Perform a Warm Reset (using the Suspend/Resume key
sequence) after changing parameters to save the changed parameters in
the registry.
Switching profiles
Successfully connecting after switching from one profile to another
may take up to 30 seconds from the moment the Is not authenticated or
Is not Associated messages are displayed.
Adding, changing or
renaming profiles
LXE recommends performing a Warm Reset function (using the
Suspend/Resume key sequence) after tapping the Commit button.
Note:
Unsaved Changes -- Newer versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button
is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from the Config tab.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
173
Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials
When using wireless security that requires a user name and password to be entered, the Summit
Client Utility offers two choices:
• The Username and Password may be entered on the Credentials screen. If this method is
selected, anyone using the device can access the network.
• The Username and Password are left blank on the Credentials screen. When the device
attempts to connect to the network, a sign on screen is displayed. The user must enter the
Username and Password at that time to authenticate.
How to: Use Stored Credentials
1.
After completing the other entries in the profile, click on the Credentials button.
2.
Enter the Username and Password on the Credentials screen and click the OK button.
3.
Click the Commit button.
4.
For LEAP and WPA/LEAP, configuration is complete.
5.
For PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC and EAP-TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows
certificate store.
6.
For EAP-TLS, also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store.
7.
Access the Credentials screen again. Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store
checkboxes are checked.
8.
The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate. Alternatively, use the
Browse button next to the CA Cert (CA Certificate Filename) on the Credentials screen to
select an individual certificate.
9.
For EAP-TLS, also enter the User Cert (User Certificate filename) on the credentials screen
by using the Browse button.
10. If using EAP FAST and manual PAC provisioning, input the PAC filename and password.
11. Click the OK button then the Commit button.
12. Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is property
configured, the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used.
Notes: More details are provided in the appropriate Summit Wireless Security section following
in this chapter.
If invalid credentials are entered into the stored credentials, the authentication will fail.
No error message is displayed and the user is not prompted to enter valid credentials.
How to: Use Sign On Screen
1.
After completing the other entries in the profile, click on the Credentials button. Leave the
Username and Password blank. No entries are necessary on the Credentials screen for LEAP
or WPA/LEAP.
2.
For PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC and EAP-TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows
certificate store.
3.
For EAP-TLS, also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store.
4.
Access the Credentials screen again. Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store
checkboxes are checked.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
174
Summit Client Configuration
5.
The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate. Alternatively, use the
Browse button next to the CA Cert (CA Certificate Filename) on the Credentials screen to
select an individual certificate.
6.
For EAP-TLS, also enter the User Cert (User Certificate filename) on the credentials screen
by using the Browse button.
7.
Click the OK button then the Commit button.
8.
When the device attempts to connect to the network, a sign-on screen is displayed.
9.
Enter the Username and Password. Click the OK button.
Figure 5-9 Sign-On Screen
Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is property
configured, the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used.
The sign-on screen is displayed after a reboot for each of the listed protocols.
Note:
Complete details are provided in the appropriate Summit Wireless Security section
following in this chapter.
If a user enters invalid credentials and clicks OK, the device associates but does not
authenticate. The user is again prompted to enter credentials.
If the user clicks the Cancel button, the device does not associate. The user is not
prompted again for credentials until the device is rebooted, the radio is disabled then
enabled, the Reconnect button on the Diags tag is clicked or the profile is modified and
the Commit button is clicked.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
175
Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path
User Certificates
EAP-TLS authentication requires a user certificate. The user certificate must be stored in the
Windows certificate store.
To generate the user certificate, follow the instructions in “Generating a User Certificate for the
Mobile Device”, later in this chapter.
Import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store by following the instructions in
“Installing a User Certificate on the Mobile Device”, later in this chapter.
A Root CA certificate is also needed for EAP-TLS. Refer to the section below.
Root CA Certificates
Root CA certificates are required for PEAP/MSCHAP, PEAP/GTC, and EAP-TLS. Two options
are offered for storing these certificates. They may be imported into the Windows certificate store
or copied into the Certs Path directory.
How To: Use Windows Certificate Store
1.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter for “Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC”.
2.
To import the certificate into the Windows store, follow the instructions for “Installing a Root
CA Certificate on the Mobile Device” later in this chapter.
3.
When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication, be sure to check the
Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox.
4.
The default is to use all certificates in the store. If this is OK, skip to Step #8.
5.
Otherwise, to select a specific certificate click on the Browse (…) button.
Figure 5-10 Choose Certificate
6.
Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox.
7.
Select the desired certificate and click the Select button to return the selected certificate to the
CA Cert textbox.
8.
Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
176
Summit Client Configuration
How To: Use the Certs Path
1.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter for “Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC”.
2.
Copy the certificate to a specified directory on the mobile device. The default location for
Certs Path is \System. A different location may be specified by using the Certs Path global
variable. Please note the location chosen for certificate storage should persist after warmboot.
3.
When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication, do not check the Use
MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox.
4.
Enter the certificate name in the CA Cert textbox.
5.
Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes.
No Security
Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon.
Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Admin password and tap OK.
Tap the Config or Profile tab.
or
Figure 5-11 Configure a Summit Profile with No Security
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile.
Set Auth Type to Open.
Set EAP Type to None.
Set Encryption to None.
Tap the Commit 3 button to save the new profile configuration.
Perform a warm reset function to connect using the new profile configuration.
3
LXE recommends performing a Warm Reset or Suspend/Resume function after making changes to the SCU
configuration.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
177
WEP Keys
Please see your System Administrator for complete information about your network WEP key
requirements.
To connect using WEP, use the following minimum required profile options..
• Auth Type = Open
• EAP Type = None
• Encryption = Manual WEP
Tap the WEP/PSK Keys button. The WEP Key Entry text entry box appears.
Figure 5-12 Summit WEP Key Dialog
Enter the WEP key. If there are more than one set of keys, tap the radio button in front of the Key
to be used.
WEP keys may be entered in Hex or ASCII format. For previous versions of the SCU, if the WEP
key entry does not offer a choice between Hex and ASCII, the key must be in Hex (refer to the
Hex Key Format segment that follows).
Once configured, tap OK then tap the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Config is selected
on the Main tab and warm boot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio
connects to the network.
Hex Key Format
Valid keys are 10 (for 40 bit encryption) or 26 (for 128 bit encryption) hexadecimal characters (09, A-F). Enter the key(s) and tap OK.
ASCII Key Format
Valid keys are 5 (for 40 bit encryption) or 13 (for 128 bit encryption) alphanumeric characters.
Enter the key(s) and tap OK.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
178
Summit Client Configuration
LEAP w/o WPA Authentication
If the Cisco/CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication, set the Auth Type client
parameter to Open.
If the AP is configured for network EAP only, set the Auth Type client parameter to LEAP.
Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon.
Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Admin password and tap OK. Tap the
Config or Profile tab.
or
Figure 5-13 Configure a Summit Profile for LEAP w/o WPA
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile.
Set Auth Type to Open.
Set EAP Type to LEAP.
Set Encryption to Auto WEP.
To use Stored Credentials, tap the Credentials button.
No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name
and Password when connecting to the network.
Figure 5-14 LEAP Credentials Dialog
Enter the Username or Domain \Username in the Credentials popup text entry box, if desired.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
179
Enter the Password, if desired. Tap OK.
Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration. Perform a warm reset to connect
using the new profile configuration.
See Also: WPA/LEAP Authentication later in this section to configure the client for WPA LEAP.
See Also: Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter if the username and password are
left blank during setup.
EAP-FAST Authentication
Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon.
Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Admin password and tap OK.
Tap the Config or Profile tab.
or
Figure 5-15 Configure a Summit Profile for EAP-FAST
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile.
Set Auth Type to Open.
Set EAP Type to EAP-FAST.
Set Encryption to WPA TKIP.
To use Stored Credentials, tap the Credentials button.
No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name
and Password when connecting to the network.
The SCU supports EAP-FAST with automatic or manual PAC provisioning. With automatic PAC
provisioning, the user credentials, whether entered on the saved credentials screen or the sign on
screen, are sent to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server must have auto provisioning enabled
to send the PAC provisioning credentials to the client device. Please refer to the LXE Security
Primer for more information on the RADIUS server configuration.
To use Stored Credentials, tap the Credentials button.
Note:
No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the
User name and Password when connecting to the network.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
180
Summit Client Configuration
or
Figure 5-16 Summit EAP-FAST Credentials
Enter the Username or Domain \Username in the Credentials popup text entry box, if desired.
Enter the Password, if desired.
For automatic PAC provisioning, once a username/password is authenticated, the PAC
information is stored on the mobile device. The same username/password must be used to
authenticate each time. When using automatic PAC provisioning, once authenticated, there is a file
stored in the \System directory with the PAC credentials. If the username is changed, that file must
be deleted. The filename is autoP.00.pac.
For manual PAC provisioning, the PAC filename and password must be entered. The PAC file
must be copied to the directory specified in the Certs Path global variable. The PAC file must not
be Read Only.
Tap OK then tap Commit to save the new profile configuration. Ensure the correct Active Profile
is selected on the Main tab and perform a warmboot (or Suspend/Resume) function.
See Also: Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter if the username and password are
left blank during setup.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
181
PEAP/MSCHAP Authentication
Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon.
Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Admin password and tap OK.
Tap the Config or Profile tab.
or
Figure 5-17 Configure a Summit Profile for PEAP/MSCHAP
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile.
Set Auth Type to Open.
Set EAP Type to PEAP-MSCHAP.
Set Encryption to Auto WEP (without WPA). To configure PEAP-MSCHAP for WPA set
Encryption to WPA TKIP.
To use Stored Credentials, tap the Credentials button.
No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name
and Password when connecting to the network.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
182
Summit Client Configuration
or
Figure 5-18 PEAP/MSCHAP Credentials Dialog
If using the Windows certificate store:
•
•
•
•
Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store.
To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse [ . . .] button.
Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox.
Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen.
If using the Certs Path option:
• Leave the Use MS store box unchecked.
• Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox.
Click OK then click Commit.
For information on generating a Root CA certificate, please see “Root CA Certificate” later in this
chapter.
Perform a Warm Boot (or Suspend/Resume) function to connect using the new profile
configuration.
The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/MSCHAP for the user
authentication.
See Also: Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter if the username and password are
left blank during setup.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
183
WPA/LEAP Authentication
Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon.
Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Admin password and tap OK.
Tap the Config or Profile tab.
or
Figure 5-19 Configure a Summit Profile with LEAP for WPA TKIP
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile.
Set Auth Type to Open.
Set EAP Type to LEAP.
Set Encryption to WPA TKIP.
To use Stored Credentials, tap the Credentials button.
No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name
and Password when connecting to the network.
Figure 5-20 LEAP Credentials
Enter the Username or Domain \Username in the Credentials popup text entry box, if desired.
Enter the Password, if desired. Tap OK.
Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration.
Perform a warm reset (or Suspend/Resume) to connect using the new profile configuration.
See Also: LEAP w/o WPA earlier in this section to configure the client for LEAP without WPA.
See Also: Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter if the username and password are
left blank during setup.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
184
Summit Client Configuration
WPA PSK Authentication
Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon.
Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Admin password and tap OK.
Tap the Config or Profile tab.
or
Figure 5-21 Configure a Summit Profile with WPA PSK Encryption
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile.
Set Auth Type to Open.
Set EAP Type to None.
Set Encryption to WPA PSK.
Tap the WEP/PSK Keys button.
Figure 5-22 Summit PSK Entry Dialog
Enter the Passphrase in the PSK Entry popup text entry box. This value can be a 64 hex character
or an 8-63 byte ASCII value. Tap OK
Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration.
Perform a warm reset (or Suspend/Resume) to connect using the new profile configuration.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
185
PEAP/GTC Authentication
Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon.
Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Admin password and tap OK.
Tap the Config or Profile tab.
or
Figure 5-23 Configure a Summit Profile with PEAP/GTC
Enter the SSID of the access point assigned to this profile.
Set Auth type to Open.
Set EAP type to PEAP-GTC.
Set Encryption to WPA TKIP.
To use stored credentials, tap the Credentials button.
No entries are necessary for sign-on credentials as the user will be prompted for the user name and
password when connecting to the network.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
186
Summit Client Configuration
or
Figure 5-24 PEAP/GTC Credentials Dialog
If using the Windows certificate store:
•
•
•
•
Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store.
To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse [ . . .] button.
Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox.
Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen.
If using the Certs Path option:
• Leave the Use MS store box unchecked.
• Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox.
Click OK then click Commit.
The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/GTC for the user
authentication.
For information on generating a Root CA certificate, please see “Root CA Certificate” later in this
chapter.
Note:
The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate.
Perform a Warm Reset function to connect using the new profile configuration.
See Also: Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter if the username and password are
left blank during setup.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Summit Client Configuration
187
EAP-TLS Authentication
Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon.
Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Admin password and tap OK.
Tap the Config or Profile tab.
Figure 5-25 Configure a Summit Profile with EAP-TLS
Enter the SSID of the access point assigned to this profile.
Set Auth type to Open.
Set EAP type to EAP-TLS
Set Encryption to WPA TKIP.
To use stored credentials, tap the Credentials button.
No entries are necessary for sign-on credentials as the user will be prompted for the user name and
password when connecting to the network. If the username and password are left blank during
setup, see Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
188
Summit Client Configuration
Note:
The date must be accurate on the device to authenticate a certificate.
Figure 5-26 EAP-TLS Credentials Dialog
If using the Windows certificate store:
•
•
•
•
Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store.
To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse [ . . .] button.
Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox.
Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen.
If using the Certs Path option:
• Leave the Use MS store box unchecked.
• Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox.
Click OK then click Commit.
The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using EAP-TLS for the user
authentication.
Perform a Warm Reset function to connect using the new profile configuration.
Refer to Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials and Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path earlier in
this chapter
For information on generating a Root CA certificate, please see “Root CA Certificate” later in this
chapter.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Certificates
189
Certificates
Please refer to the LXE Security Primer to prepare the Authentication Server and
Access Point for communication.
It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of
certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication
will fail.
Root Certificates
Download a Root CA Certificate
The easiest way to get the root CA certificate is to use a browser on a desktop PC to navigate to
the CA (Certificate Authority). To request the root CA certificate, open a browser to
http://<CA IP address>/certsrv
Sign into the CA with any valid username and password.
Figure 5-27 Logon to Certificate Authority
Figure 5-28 Certificate Services Welcome Screen
Tap the Download a CA certificate, certificate chain or CRL task link.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
190
Certificates
Make sure the correct root CA certificate is selected in the list box.
Figure 5-29 Download CA Certificate Screen
Tap the DER button.
To download the CA certificate, tap on the Download CA certificate link.
Figure 5-30 Download CA Certificate Save to Desktop
Tap the Save button and save the certificate to the desktop PC. Keep track of the name and
location of the certificate as the certificate file name and file location is required in later steps.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Certificates
191
Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device
Copy the certificate file from the desktop PC to the mobile device. Import the certificate by
navigating to Start | Control Panel | Certificates.
Figure 5-31 Certificate Stores
Tap the Import button.
Figure 5-32 Import Certificate From a File
Make sure From a File is selected and tap OK.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
192
Certificates
Figure 5-33 Browsing to Certificate Location
Using the Explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the certificate, select the
certificate desired and tap OK.
Tap Yes to import the certificate.
Once the certificate is installed, return to the proper authentication section, described later in this
chapter.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Certificates
193
User Certificates
Generating a User Certificate for the MX5X
The easiest way to get the user certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the CA. To
request the user certificate, open a browser to
http://<CA IP address>/certsrv
Sign into the CA with the username of the user certificate required.
Figure 5-34 Logon to Certificate Authority
This process saves a user certificate and a separate private key file. CE devices such as the MX5X
require the private key to be saved as a separate file rather than including the private key in the
user certificate.
Figure 5-35 Certificate Services Welcome Screen
Tap the Request a certificate task link.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
194
Certificates
Figure 5-36 Request a Certificate Type
Tap on the advanced certificate request link.
Figure 5-37 Advanced Certificate Request Screen
Tap on the Create and submit a request to this CA link.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Certificates
195
Figure 5-38 Advanced Certificate Details
For the Certificate Template, select User.
Check the Mark keys as exportable and the Export keys to file checkboxes.
Type the full path on the local PC where the private key is to be copied. Also specify the private
key filename.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
196
Certificates
Be sure to note the name used for the private key file, for example
MX5USER.PVK. The certificate file created later in this process must be given
the same name, for example, MX5USER.CER.
DO NOT check Enable strong private key protection.
Make any other desired changes and tap the Submit button.
Figure 5-39 Script Warnings
If any script notifications occur, tap the Yes button to continue the certificate request.
Figure 5-40 Script Warnings
When prompted for the private key password:
Tap None if you do not wish to use a password, or
Enter and confirm your desired password then tap OK.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Certificates
197
Figure 5-41 User Certificate Issued
Tap the Download certificate link.
Figure 5-42 Download Certificate Security Warning
Tap Save to download and store the user certificate to the PC. Keep track of the name and location
of the certificate as the file name and location is required in later steps. The private key file is also
downloaded and saved during this process.
Be sure use the same name for the certificate file as was used for the private key
file. For example, it the private key was saved as MX5USER.PVK then the
certificate file created must be given the same name, for example,
MX5USER.CER.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
198
Certificates
Installing a User Certificate on the MX5X (WPA-TLS Only)
Copy the certificate and private key files to the mobile device. Import the certificate by navigating
to Start | Control Panel | Certificates.
Select My Certificates from the pull down list.
Figure 5-43 Certificate Stores
Tap the Import button.
Figure 5-44 Import User Certificate
Make sure From a File is selected and tap OK.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Certificates
199
Figure 5-45 Browsing to Certificate Location
Using the explorer buttons, browse to the location on the mobile device where you copied the
certificate, select the certificate desired and tap OK.
Tap Yes to import the certificate.
The certificate is now shown in the list.
Figure 5-46 User Certificate Listing
Highlight the certificate you just imported and tap the View. . button.
From the Field pull down menu, select Private Key.
If the private key is present, the process is complete.
If the private key is not present, import the private key.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
200
Certificates
To import the private key, tap OK to return to the Certificates screen.
Tap import.
Figure 5-47 Browsing to Private Key Location
Using the explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the private key file, change
the Type pull down list to Private Keys, select the certificate desired and tap OK.
Tap on View to see the certificate details again.
The private key should now say Present. If it does not, there is a problem. Possible items to check:
Make sure the certificate was generated with a separate private key file, as shown earlier in this
section. If the certificate was not generated with a separate private key file, generate a new
certificate and follow the import process again.
Make sure the certificate and private key file have the same name, for example mx5user.cer for the
certificate and mx5user.pvk for the private key file. If the file names are not the same, rename the
private key file and import it again.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Chapter 6 AppLock
Introduction
Note:
LXE has made the assumption, in this chapter, that the first user to power up a new
mobile device is the system administrator.
LXE’s AppLock is designed to be run on LXE certified Windows CE based devices only. LXE
loads the AppLock program as part of the LXE customer installation process.
Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device enduser. AppLock is password protected by the Administrator.
End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application or applications. The end user
can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes. The administrator-specified
application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up.
When the mobile device is reset to factory default values, for example after a cold reset, the
Administrator may need to reconfigure the AppLock parameters.
Note:
A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing. AppLock cannot
prevent this type of application from closing, but is notified that the application has
closed. For these applications, AppLock immediately restarts the application (see Auto
Re-Launch) which causes the screen to flicker. If this type of application is being locked,
the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end-user mode
to minimize the screen flicker.
AppLock is updated periodically as new options become available. Contact your LXE
representative for assistance, downloads and update availability.
Determine Your AppLock Version
If the Administrator Control Menu looks like this . . .
Go to . . . .
Appendix D –
Reference Material,
AppLock – Single
Application Version
This chapter.
Figure 6-1 Determine Your AppLock Version
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
202
Setup a New Device
Setup a New Device
Prerequisites:
• The touch panel must be enabled. Refer to the (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Handheld |
Misc | ) Touch Panel Disabled setting.
• An MX5X default input method (Input Panel, Transcriber, or custom input method) is
assigned.
LXE CE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no
default password, thus when the device is first booted, the user has full access to the device and no
password prompt is displayed. After the administrator specifies applications to lock, a password is
assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed, the device switches to end-user mode.
Briefly, the process to configure a new device is as follows:
1.
Insert a fully charged battery and press the Power button. See Chapter 1 – Introduction for
instruction.
2.
Connect an external power source to the device (if required). See Chapter 1 – Introduction for
instruction.
3.
Adjust screen display, audio volume and other parameters if desired. Install accessories (e.g.
handstrap, stylus). See Chapter 1 – Introduction for instruction.
4.
Tap Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon.
5.
Assign a Switch Key (hotkey) sequence for AppLock. See Security Panel.
6.
Assign an application on the Application tab screen. More than one application can be
assigned. See Application Panel.
7.
Assign a password on the Security tab screen. See Security Panel.
8.
Select a view level on the Status tab screen, if desired. See Status Panel.
9.
Tap OK.
10. Press the Switch Key sequence to launch AppLock and lock the configured application(s).
11. The device is now in end-user mode.
Note:
LXE has made the assumption, in this appendix, that the first user to power up a new
mobile device is the system administrator.
Note:
AppLock cannot support multiple windows of some applications. Attempting to open
multiple windows of RFTerm or Pocket Word will cause AppLock to switch to
administration mode.
See Also: Appendix D – Reference Material, sections titled AppLock Error Messages and
AppLock Registry Settings.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Setup a New Device
203
OR
Application Panel
OR
End User Switchpad
Application – Launch Panel
Security Panel
Status Panel
Figure 6-2 AppLock Panels
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
204
Administration Mode
Administration Mode
Administration mode gives full access to the device and configuration options.
The administrator must enter a valid password (when a password has already been assigned)
before access to Administration mode and configuration options are allowed. The administrator
can configure the following options:
•
•
•
•
Create/change the keystroke sequence to activate administrator access.
Create/change the password for administrator access.
Assign the name of the application, or applications, to lock.
Select the command line of the application, or applications, to lock.
In addition to these configuration options, the administrator can view and manage the status logs
of AppLock sessions.
Administrator default values for this device:
Administrator Hotkey
Shift+Ctrl+A
Password
none
Application path and name
none
Application command line
none
End User Mode
End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application (or applications). The end user
can still reboot and respond to dialog boxes. The single application is automatically launched, and
runs in full screen mode when the device boots up.
The user cannot unintentionally or intentionally exit the application nor can the end user execute
any other applications. Normal application exit or switching methods and all Microsoft defined
Windows CE key combinations, such as close (X) icon, File Exit, File Close, Alt-F4, Alt-Tab, etc.
are disabled. The Windows CE desktop icons, menu bars, task bar and system trays are not visible
or accessible. Task Manager is not available.
If the end-user selects File/Exit or Close from the applications menu bar, the menu is cleared and
nothing else happens; the application remains active. Nothing happens when the end-user taps on
the Close icon on the application’s title bar and the application remains active.
Note:
A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing. AppLock cannot
prevent this type of application from closing, but is notified that the application has
closed. For these applications, AppLock immediately restarts the application which
causes the screen to flicker. If this type of application is being locked, the administrator
should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the
screen flicker.
Windows accelerator keys such as Alt-F4 are disabled.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Passwords
205
Passwords
A password must be configured. If the password is not configured, a new device switches into
Administration mode without prompting for a password. In addition to the Administrator hotkey
press, a mode switch occurs if inaccurate information has been configured or if mandatory
information is missing in the configuration.
There are several situations that display a password prompt after a password has been configured.
If the configured hotkey is pressed, the password prompt is displayed. In this case the user has 30
seconds (and within three attempts) to enter a password. If a valid password is not entered within
30 seconds, the password prompt is dismissed and the device returns to end-user mode.
All other situations that present the password prompt do not dismiss the prompt -- this is because
the other situations result in invalid end-user operation.
These conditions include:
• If inaccurate configuration information is entered by the administrator, i.e. an application is
specified that does not exist.
• If the application name, which is mandatory for end-user mode, is missing in the configuration.
• Invalid installation of AppLock (e.g. missing DLLs).
• Corrupted registry settings.
To summarize, if an error occurs that prevents AppLock from switching to user mode, the
password will not timeout and AppLock will wait until the correct password is entered.
See Also: Appendix D – Reference Material, sections titled AppLock Error Messages and
AppLock Registry Settings.
AppLock Password Troubleshooting
Can’t locate the password that has been set by the administrator? Enter this LXE back door key
sequence:
Ctrl+L Ctrl+X Ctrl+E
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
206
End-User Switching Technique
End-User Switching Technique
Note:
The touch screen must be enabled. Refer to Start | Settings | Control Panel | Handheld |
Misc | Touch Panel Disabled setting.
or
Figure 6-3 Switchpad Menu
A checkmark indicates applications currently active or available for Launching by the user. When
Keyboard is selected, the MX5X default input method (Input Panel, Transcriber, or custom input
method) is activated.
Using a Stylus Tap
When the mobile device enters end-user mode, a Switchpad icon (it looks like three tiny windows
one above the other) is displayed in the taskbar. The taskbar is always visible on top of
the application in focus. Note: If only one application is configured and the Input Panel
is not enabled, the Switchpad icon is not displayed.
When the user taps the Switchpad icon, a menu is displayed showing the applications available to
the user. The user can tap an application name in the popup menu and the selected application is
brought to the foreground. The previous application continues to run in the background. Stylus
taps affect the application in focus only. When the user needs to use the Input Panel, they tap the
Keyboard option. Input Panel taps affect the application in focus only.
The figure shown above is an example and is shown only to aid in describing how the user can
switch between applications using a stylus. The switchpad lists user applications as well as the
Keyboard option.
See Also: Application Panel | Launch | Manual (Launch) and Allow Close
Using the Switch Key Sequence
One switch key sequence (or hotkey) is defined by the administrator for the end-user to use when
switching between locked applications. This is known as the Activation key. The Activation key is
assigned by the Administrator using the Global Key parameter. When the switch key sequence is
pressed on the keypad, the next application in the AppLock configuration is moved to the
foreground and the previous application moves to the background. The previous application
continues to run in the background. End-user key presses affect the application in focus only.
See Also: Application Panel | Global Key
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Multi-Application Configuration
207
Multi-Application Configuration
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon
The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift+Ctrl+A.
Note:
AppLock cannot support multiple windows of some applications. Attempting to open
multiple windows of RFTerm or Pocket Word will cause AppLock to switch to
administration mode.
Application Panel
or
Figure 6-4 Application Panel – Multi-Application
Note:
If your Application Panel does not look like the figures shown above, you may have the
Single Application version. Refer to Appendix D – Reference Material, AppLock - Single
Application Version for instruction.
Use the Application tab options to select the applications to launch when the device boots up in
End-user Mode.
If no application is specified when the Administrator Control Panel is closed, the mobile device
reboots into Administrator mode. If a password has been set, but an application has not been
specified, the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode. The
password prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered.
Option
Explanation
Filename
Default is blank. Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the
application path or tap the Browse button (the … button). The standard Windows
CE Browse dialog is displayed. After selecting the application from the Browse
dialog, tap OK.
Title
Default is blank. Enter the Title to be associated with the application. The
assumption is that multiple copies of the same application may need unique titles
in order to differentiate them in the application switcher panel.
Arguments
Default is blank. Enter the command line parameters for the application in the
Arguments text box.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
208
Multi-Application Configuration
Option
Explanation
Order
Default is 1. Enter the Order in which the application is to be loaded or presented
to the end-user. Applications are launched in lowest to highest number order.
Internet
Default is Disabled. Enable the Internet checkbox to use the End-user Internet
Explorer (EUIE.EXE) When the checkbox is enabled, the Internet Menu and
Internet Status are available. See the section titled End-user Internet Explorer
(EUIE) for more details.
Launch
Button
See following section titled Launch Button.
Global Key
Default is Ctrl+Spc. Select the Global Key key sequence the end-user is to press
when switching between applications. The Global Key default key sequence
must be defined by the AppLock Administrator. The Global key is presented to
the end-user as the Activation key.
Global
Delay
Default is 10 seconds. Enter the number of seconds that Applications must wait
before starting to run after reboot.
Note: AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not interrelate with similarly-named options contained in other LXE Control Panels.
Note: Delay (Global) may not be available in all versions of AppLock. You can
simulate a Global Delay function by setting a delay for the first application
(lowest Order) launched and setting the delay to 0 for all other applications. See
Boot Options.
Input Panel
Default is Disabled. Enable (check) to show the Keyboard option on the
Switchpad menu. When enabled the input panel cannot be enabled or disabled
for each individual application, and is available to the user for all configured
applications.
Clear
Button
Tap the Clear button to clear all currently displayed Filename or Application
information. The Global settings are not cleared.
Scroll
Buttons
Use the left and right scroll buttons to move from application setup screen to
application setup screen. The left and right buttons update the information on the
screen with the previous or next configured application respectively.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Multi-Application Configuration
209
Launch Button
Note:
The Launch button may not be available in all versions of Multi-AppLock. Contact your
LXE representative for assistance, downloads and AppLock update availability.
When clicked, displays the Launch options panel for the Filename selected on the Administration
panel.
Figure 6-5 Application Launch Options
Note:
Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab. The Order
value does not have to be sequential.
Auto At Boot
Default is Enabled. Auto At Boot, when enabled, automatically launches (subject to the specified
Delay in seconds) the application after the unit is rebooted. If a Delay in seconds is specified,
AppLock waits for the specified period of time to expire before launching the application. The
Delay default value is 10 seconds; valid values are between 0 (no delay) and a maximum of 999
seconds.
Auto At Boot Retries is the number of times the application launch will be retried if a failure
occurs when the application is automatically launched at bootup. Valid values are between 0 (no
tries) and 99 tries or -1 for infinite. Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches.
The default is 0 retries.
Auto At Boot Delay timer is the time that AppLock waits prior to the initial launch of the selected
application when it is automatically launched at bootup. Delay default is 10 seconds. Valid values
are between 0 seconds (no delay) and 999 seconds.
The Auto At Boot delay is associated for each application; it will be either a value specified by the
Administrator or it will be the delay default value. At startup, when a delay has been assigned for
each application, AppLock waits for the delay associated with the first application to expire before
launching the first application then AppLock waits for the delay associated with the second
application to expire before launching the second application. AppLock continues in this manner
until all applications are launched.
Note:
A Global Delay can be accomplished by setting a timed delay for the first application to
be launched (by lowest Order number) and no delay (0 seconds) for all other
applications.
Note:
Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab. The Order
value does not have to be sequential.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
210
Multi-Application Configuration
Auto Re-Launch
Default is Enabled. Auto Re-Launch, when enabled for a specific application. automatically relaunches it (subject to the specified Auto Re-Launch Delay in seconds) after it terminates. This
option allows the Administrator to disable the re-launch operation. AppLock cannot prevent all
applications from closing. When an application that AppLock cannot prevent from closing
terminates, perhaps because of an error condition, AppLock re-launches the application when this
option is enabled.
Note:
If Allow Close is enabled and both Auto Re-launch and Manual (Launch) are disabled,
the application cannot be restarted for the end-user or by the end-user after the
application terminates.
Auto Re-Launch Retries default is 0 tries. Retries is the number of times AppLock will try to relaunch the application. The retry count is reset after an application is successfully launched and
controlled by AppLock. Valid values are between 0 (no tries) and 99 tries or -1 for infinite.
Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches.
Auto Re-Launch Delay timer default is 0 seconds (no delay). Delay is the amount of time
AppLock waits prior to re-launching an application that has terminated. The delay is specified in
seconds. Valid values are between 0 (no delay) and 99 seconds.
AppLock must also be configured to automatically re-launch an application. To AppLock,
application termination by the end-user is indistinguishable from application termination for any
other reason.
Manual (Launch)
Default is Disabled. Enabling this option allows the end-user to launch the specified
application(s). Upon bootup completion an application with Manual enabled is listed on the
Switchpad accompanied by a checkmark that indicates the application is currently active or
available for Launching. When an application name is tapped by the end-user, the application is
launched (if inactive) and brought to the foreground.
Applications set up with Manual (Launch) enabled may or may not be launched at bootup. This
function is based on the application’s Auto At Boot setting. The applications have been listed as
approved applications for end-user manual launch using the Switchpad menu structure. The
approved applications are listed on the Switchpad. A checkmark indicates the applications active
status.
When Manual (Launch) is disabled for an application, and Allow Close is enabled for the
application, when the end-user closes the specific application it is no longer available (shown) on
the Switchpad.
When Auto At Boot and Manual (Launch) are both disabled for a specific application, the
application is 1) not placed on the list of approved applications for end-user manual launch and 2)
never launched, and 3) not displayed on the Switchpad.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Multi-Application Configuration
211
Allow Close
Default is Disabled. When enabled, the associated application can be closed by the end-user.
This option allows the administrator to configure applications that consume system resources to be
terminated if an error condition occurs or at the end-user’s request. Error conditions may generate
a topmost popup requiring an end-user response, memory resource issues requiring an end-user
response, etc. Also at the administrator’s discretion, these types of applications can be started
manually (see Manual [Launch]) by the end-user.
End User Internet Explorer (EUIE)
AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer, such as .HTML pages and JAVA
applications. The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in
Internet Explorer’s address bar.
To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method, the address bar and
Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer. This is accomplished by creating an
Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode: End-user Internet Explorer (EUIE.EXE). The
EUIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address
bar and status bar. The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re-enable the
address bar.
The administrator specifies the EUIE by checking the Internet checkbox in the Application tab of
the Administrator applet. The internet application should then be entered in the Application text
box.
When the Internet checkbox is enabled, the Menu and Status check boxes are available.
Enabling the Menu checkbox displays the EUIE menu which contains navigation functions like
Back, Forward, Home, Refresh, etc., functions that are familiar to most Internet Explorer users.
When the Menu checkbox is blank, the EUIE menu is not displayed and Navigation functions are
unavailable.
When the Status checkbox is enabled, the status bar displayed by EUIE gives feedback to the enduser when they are navigating the Internet.
If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the mobile device is desired, it should be
treated like any other application. This means that IEXPLORER.EXE should be specified in the
Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line. In this
case, do not check the Internet checkbox.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
212
Multi-Application Configuration
Security Panel
Figure 6-6 Security Panel – Multi-Application
Note:
If your Status Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may have the Single
Application version. Refer to Appendix D – Reference Material, AppLock - Single
Application Version for instruction.
Setting an Activation Hotkey
Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user
modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode. The default hotkey sequence is
Shift+Ctrl+A.
A 2nd key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence.
Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box. Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the
Shift state key followed by a normal key. The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the
application being locked does not use. The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not
passed to the application.
Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be
pressed from the keyboard when switching modes. The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot
key text box with <Shift>, <Alt>, and <Ctrl> text strings representing the shift state keys. The
normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence. The hotkey must be entered via the keypad.
Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel. Also, hotkeys entered via the SIP are not
guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes.
For example, if the <Ctrl> key is pressed followed by <A>, Ctrl+A is entered in the text box. If
another key is pressed after a normal key press, the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey
sequence is started.
A normal key is required for the hotkey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a
mode switch; this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key. However, when the
hotkey is pressed to switch user modes, the normal key must be entered from the keypad; it cannot
be entered from the SIP.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Multi-Application Configuration
213
Setting a Password in the Security Panel
Move the cursor to the Password text box. The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm
Password fields must match. Passwords are case sensitive.
When the user exits the Administrator Control panel, the two passwords are compared to verify
that they match. If they do not match, a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error.
After the user closes the dialog box, the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be
entered and confirmed again. If the passwords match, the password is encrypted and saved.
See Also:
Passwords and Troubleshooting Multi-Application AppLock
Status Panel
Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operations and to configure which
messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation.
Status information is stored in a specific location on the storage device and in a specific logfile
specified by the Administrator. For this reason, the administrator can configure the type of status
information that is logged, as well as clear the status information.
Figure 6-7 Status Panel – Multi-Application
Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the logfile path or tap the Browse button
(the … button). The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed. After selecting the logfile
from the Browse dialog, tap OK.
Note:
If your Status Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may have the Single
Application version. Refer to Appendix D – Reference Material, AppLock - Single
Application Version for instruction.
View
The default is None.
Error
Error status messages are logged when an error occurs and is intended to be used by
the administrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked.
Process
Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly
intended for LXE Customer Service when helping users troubleshoot problems
with their AppLock program.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
214
Multi-Application Configuration
Extended
Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process
Logging.
All
All messages are displayed.
Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another. The filtered records are
displayed, all others are not displayed.
Log
Note:
If a level higher than Error is selected, the status should be cleared frequently by the
administrator.
In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be
logged or turn off all status information logging completely. The system default is ‘None’;
however to reduce registry use, the administrator may want to select ‘None’ after verifying the
configuration. Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the registry.
•
•
•
•
•
None (default)
Error
Processing
Extended
All
Save As
When the ‘Save As’… button is selected, a standard ‘Save As’ dialog screen is displayed. Specify
the path and filename. If the filename exists, the user is prompted whether the file should be
overwritten. If the file does not exist, it is created.
See Also:
Appendix D – Reference Material, sections titled AppLock Error Messages and
AppLock Registry Settings.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Multi-Application Configuration
215
Troubleshooting AppLock
The mobile device won’t switch from Administration mode to end-user mode.
If two copies of the same application are configured, but the application only allows one copy to
run at a time, for example Microsoft Pocket Word, the switch to end-user fails. AppLock stays in
Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered.
The hotkey sequence needed is not allowed. What does this mean?
When the Administrator is selecting a hotkey sequence to use when switching user modes, they
are not allowed to enter key combinations that are reserved by installed software applications.
LXE has validated RFTerm key combinations ONLY.
When RFTerm is installed on the mobile device and an RFTerm restricted key sequence is
specified as a hotkey sequence by the Administrator, the following error message is displayed in a
message box:
Selected hotkey is not allowed. Please reenter.
When RFTerm is not installed on the mobile device, the RFTerm keys are not restricted from use.
See Also: Appendix D – Reference Material, sections titled AppLock Error Messages and
AppLock Registry Settings.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
216
MX5X Reference Guide
Multi-Application Configuration
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix A Key Maps
Keypad
ANSI / Batch Keypad
Remember :
The Orange (on the left) and Blue (on the right) keys are 2nd function keys.
Ctrl, Alt, Shft, Blue and Orange keys are sticky keys. Sticky keys do not need to be held down
before pressing the next (or desired) key. It is valid to use combined modifiers on specific keys.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
218
Keypad
Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies
Note:
This key mapping is used on hand held computers that are NOT running RFTerm.
• When using a sequence of keys that includes the Orange or Blue keys, press the color key first
then the rest of the key sequence.
• Alphabetic keys default to lower case letters. Press the Shft key, then the alphabetic key for an
uppercase letter.
Note:
When the computer boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps
(or CapsLock) condition can be toggled with Blue plus Tab key sequence.
Press These Keys and Then …
To Get This Key / Function
Power / Suspend
Volume Adjust
Backlight Toggle for Display
and Keypad
Adjust Backlight
Brightness Down 4
Blue Mode
Orange Mode
Start button
Shift
Alt
Ctrl
Blue
Orange
4
5
Alt
Shft
Caps
Lock
Press This Key
x
Power
V
x
Right Scan Key
x
x
Scan
Esc
Space
Enter
CapsLock (Toggle)
Back Space
Tab
BackTab
Break
Pause
Print Screen
Scroll Lock
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Right Arrow
Left Arrow
Insert
Delete
Home
End
Page Up
Ctrl
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
7
Blue
Orange
Right Arrow
Shft
Alt
Ctrl
Left Scan Key or
Right Scan Key 5
Alt
Spc
Enter
Tab
Spc
Tab
Tab
B
P
R
S
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Right Arrow
Left Arrow
I
DOT
Left Arrow
Right Arrow
Up Arrow
Backlight must be toggled On. Once the backlight is off, the Blue key / Right Scan key sequence toggles the
backlight on and at it’s brightest intensity.
Both Scan keys are programmable. Before using as Scan key, make sure key has been programmed to Scan.
See section titled “Programmable Buttons.”.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Keypad
219
Press These Keys and Then …
To Get This Key / Function
Page Down
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Blue
Orange
Ctrl
Alt
Shft
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Caps
Lock
Press This Key
Down Arrow
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
MX5X Reference Guide
220
Keypad
Press These Keys and Then …
To Get This Key / Function
z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
. (DOT)
<
[
]
>
=
{
}
/
+
*
: (colon)
MX5X Reference Guide
Blue
Orange
Ctrl
Alt
Shft
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Caps
Lock
Press This Key
Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DOT
G
Y
Z
H
T
W
X
J
Spc
DOT
I
D
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Keypad
221
Press These Keys and Then …
To Get This Key / Function
; (semicolon)
. (period)
?
`
_ (underscore)
, (comma)
‘ (apostrophe)
~ (tilde)
\
|
“
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
(
)
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Blue
Orange
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Ctrl
Alt
Shft
Caps
Lock
Press This Key
F
K
L
N
M
J
H
B
S
A
G
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
O
P
MX5X Reference Guide
222
IBM Keypad Overlays
IBM Keypad Overlays
3270 Keypad
Please refer to the RFTerm Reference
Guide for further information about 3270
key functions on the mobile device.
Note: The MX5X device approved for
use in Hazardous Locations has a blue
keypad overlay with the same 3270
keymap markings as shown in this
figure.
3270 Keypad Overlay
Legend
Attn
Clr
Del
Dup
E-Inp
Fld –
Fld +
Ins
LDub
RDub
NL
PA1
PA2
PA3
Reset
SysReq
MX5X Reference Guide
Explanation
Attention
Clear
Delete
Duplicate
Erase Input
Field Minus
Field Plus
Insert
Ctrl + B
Ctrl + F
New Line
PA1
PA2
PA3
Reset
System
Key Sequence
Ctrl + A
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + D
Ctrl + U
Ctrl + Q
Ctrl + M
Ctrl + L
Ctrl + I
Not Supported
Not Supported
Ctrl + N
Ctrl + 1
Ctrl + 2
Ctrl + 3
Ctrl + R
Ctrl + S
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
IBM Keypad Overlays
223
5250 Keypad
5250 Keypad Overlay
Please refer to the RFTerm Reference Guide for further information about 5250 key functions on
the mobile device.
Note:
The MX5X device approved for use in Hazardous Locations has a blue keypad overlay
with the same 5250 keymap markings as shown in this figure.
Legend
Attn
Clr
Del
Dup
E-Inp
FBk
FFwd
Fld –
Fld +
Ins
NL
SysReq
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Explanation
Attention
Clear
Delete
Duplicate
Erase Input
Fast Back Ctrl + B
Fast Forward Ctrl + F
Field Minus
Field Plus
Insert
New Line
System
Key Sequence
Ctrl + A
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + D
Ctrl + U
Ctrl + Q
Not Supported
Not Supported
Ctrl + M
Ctrl + L
Ctrl + I
Ctrl + N
Ctrl + S
MX5X Reference Guide
224
MX5X Reference Guide
IBM Keypad Overlays
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix B Technical Specifications
Physical Specifications
Features
CPU
Memory
Display
ROM
RAM
LCD
Removable
CF Card
(Customer
Installable)
PCMCIA Interface
Specifications
Intel Xscale operating at 400 MHz
64 MB Flash (N/A January 2006)
128 MB low power DRAM
Transflective Color
Mass
Storage
ATA Flash Type II PC Cards
(Various Sizes)
Weights
One PCMCIA Slot:
Slot 0 accepts Type II
Slot 1 accepts Type I and II CF
Unit with network card, battery and
scanner endcap
Battery
Wireless Card - 2.4GHz Type II
External
Connectors/Interface
Compact Flash Card
IrDA Connector (COM 3) bidirectional half-duplex
RS-232 COM1 mini D serial port
(left)
RS-232 COM4 mini D serial port
(right)
Audio/Microphone
Connector
Dimensions
Scanner
Batteries
Main
Backup
(CMOS)
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Length
Width
Depth
No Scanner
Symbol SE 1224 Fuzzy Logic
Symbol SE 1223 Long Range
Symbol SE 1223 Adv Long Range
Symbol SE 2223 2D Scanner
Li-Ion battery pack
7.4V 2.8Ah
Internal Nickel Metal Hydride
(NiMH)
5.7V max.
Comments
32 bit CPU (with on-chip cache)
40 MB available for programs and data
System Memory
Transflective LCD with touchscreen.
Customer Configurable Display and
Keypad Backlighting
Type I Compact Flash Card
ATA Flash PC Card, or ATA Hard Drive
PC Card
Compatible with the PCMCIA version
2.1 standard.
1.7 lbs
800g
6.4 oz
180 g
1.0 oz
28g
1.6 oz
45g
1 oz
28g
Supports 115k baud
26 Position D (female) Connector.
Provides connection to external devices
such as a powered cradle, printer, USB
cable, AC power supply cable.
26 Position D (female) Connector.
Provides connection to external devices
such as a powered cradle, printer, AC
power supply cable.
Audio Jack
9.6”
24.3 cm
4”
10.1 cm
2.1”
5.4 cm
Integrated
In-Unit Chargeable or Externally
Chargeable
Automatically charges from main battery
during normal operation. Requires AC
power for re-charging.
Memory operational for 24 hours when
main battery is depleted
MX5X Reference Guide
226
Appendix B Technical Specifications
Display Specifications
Feature
Type
Resolution
Size
Diagonal Viewing Area
Dot Pitch
Dot Size
Color Scale
Specification
LCD - Transflective Color / CCFL Front Light
320 x 240 pixels
1/4 VGA portrait
3.8 in (150.4mm)
0.22mm
0.20mm x 0.20mm
Reflective – 256 colors
Environmental Specifications
MX5X
Feature
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Water and Dust
Operating Humidity
Standards
Contamination
Vibration
ESD
Shock
Specification
-6°F to 140°F (-21°C to 60°C)
-60°F to 160°F (-51°C to 71°C)
IP67
Up to 90% non-condensing at 140°F (60°C)
See Appendix B in the MX5X User’s Guide.
Resistant to exposure to skin oil and other lubricants.
Based on MIL Std 810F
8 KV air, 4kV direct contact
Multiple 2 meter (6.6’) drops to concrete.
AC Wall Adapter
Note:
The External Power Supply for MX5X is not approved for sale in China
Feature
Input Power Switch
Power "ON" Indicator
Input Fusing
Input Voltage
Input Frequency
Input Connector
Output Connector
Output Voltage
Output Current
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
MX5X Reference Guide
Specification
None
LED
Thermal Fuse
100VAC min – 240 VAC max
50 - 60 Hz
North American wall plug, no ground
26 position D serial interface
+12VDC, unregulated
0 Amps min, 3.75 A max
32° F to 104° F / 0° C to 40° C
-13° F to 158° F / -25° C to 70° C
Operates in a relative humidity of 5 – 95% (non-condensing)
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix B Technical Specifications
227
Network Card Specifications
Summit Client Type II
Bus Interface:
Network Frequencies:
RF Data Rates:
RF Power Level:
Channels
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Connectivity:
Compact Flash via a PCMCIA adapter
2.4 - 2.4897 GHz IEEE 802.11b 802.11g DSSS OFDM
1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
18 dBm 64mW Max
11 US, 13 Europe, 13 Japan
see MX5X Environmental Specs
see MX5X Environmental Specs
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI
Symbol Client Type II
Bus Interface:
Network Frequencies:
RF Data Rates:
RF Power Level:
Channels
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Connectivity:
PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot
2.4 - 2.5 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS
11 Mbps maximum
100 mW
11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 1 Japan
see MX5X Environmental Specs
see MX5X Environmental Specs
TCP/IP, Ethernet, NDSI
Cisco Client Type II
Bus Interface
Network Frequencies
RF Data Rates
RF Power Level
Channels
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Connectivity
Antenna
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS
11 Mbps
100 mW max.
11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 14 Japan
see MX5X Environmental Specs
see MX5X Environmental Specs
TCP/IP, Ethernet, NDSI
Internal
MX5X Reference Guide
228
MX5X Reference Guide
Appendix B Technical Specifications
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
System Configuration CE .NET 4.2
Introduction
There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the mobile device. Many of
the setup and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and
software installed on the unit. The examples found in this appendix are to be used as examples
only, as the configuration of your specific mobile device may vary. The following sections provide
a general reference for the configuration of the mobile device and some of it’s optional features.
This appendix presents information and procedures for Windows CE .NET 4.2 only. The MX5X
operating system is displayed on the Desktop. This is the factory default value for the Desktop
Display Background.
Windows CE 5.0 information and procedures are contained in Chapter 3 – System Configuration.
Windows Operating System CE .NET 4.2
For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE .NET 4.2 user’s
guides or the Windows on-line Help application installed in the mobile device.
This chapter’s contents assumes the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows
options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows 2000 (or later) desktop computers.
Therefore, the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the
MX5X and it’s Windows CE environment.
Installed Software CE .NET 4.2
Note:
Some standard Windows options require an external modem connection. Modems are not
available from LXE nor supported by LXE.
When you order a mobile device you receive the software files required by the separate programs
needed for operation and wireless communication. The files are loaded by LXE and stored in
folders in the mobile device. This section lists the contents of the folders and the general function
of the files. Files installed in the mobile device are specific to the intended function of the mobile
device.
Files installed in each mobile device configured for a wireless network environment contain
wireless client specific drivers – the drivers for each type of client are specific to the manufacturer
(e.g. Cisco, Symbol, Summit) for the clients installed in the RF environment and are not
interchangeable.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
230
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Software Load
The software loaded on the MX5X computer consists of Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE
5.0 OS, hardware-specific OEM Adaptation Layer, device drivers, Internet Explorer 6.0 for
Windows CE browser and utilities. The software supported is summarized below:
• Operating System -- Full Operating System License: Includes all operating system
components, including Windows CE 5.0 or CE .NET 4.2 kernel, file system, communications,
connectivity (for remote APIs), device drivers, events and messaging, graphics, keyboard and
touchscreen input, window management, and common controls.
• Network and Device Drivers
• Wavelink Avalanche (Option)
• LXE AppLock (Option)
• Java (Option) -- Java executables and browser components are handled by the Java option
(when installed).
• Terminal Emulation (Option)
• RFTerm (VT220, TN5250, TN3270). Runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot (if
installed).
• LXE API Routines (see Accessories for the LXE SDK Kit part number)
Note:
Please contact your LXE representative for software updates and CAB files as they are
released by LXE.
Software Applications
The following applications are included:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WordPad (PocketWord in previous versions of Windows CE)
Pocket Inbox
Word Viewer
Excel Viewer
PDF Viewer
PowerPoint Viewer
Image Viewer
Scanner Wedge (LXE developed)
ActiveSync
Media Player
Transcriber
Internet Explorer
Note that the Viewer applications allow viewing documents, but not editing them.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
231
Optional
AppLock (Option)
Installed by LXE. The AppLock program is accessed by the user or the AppLock Administrator at
bootup or upon completion of a warm boot. Set parameters using the Administration option in the
Control Panel.
See Chapter 6 - AppLock for instruction.
JAVA (Option)
Installed by LXE. Files can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | JEM-CE. Doubletap the
EVM icon to open the EVM Console. A folder of JAVA examples and Plug-ins is also installed
with the JAVA option. LXE does not support all JAVA applications running on the mobile device.
LXE RFTerm (Option)
Installed by LXE. The application can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | RFTerm. Please
refer to Terminal Emulation Setup earlier in this guide for RFTerm quick start instruction. Refer to
the RFTerm Reference Guide on the LXE Manuals CD for complete information and instruction.
WAV files added by the user should be stored in System\LXE\RFTerm\Sounds.
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler
Requires the Windows CE 5 operating system.
Bluetooth Manager (CE .NET 4.2 only)
Note:
Bluetooth Manager, Bluetooth service or options are not available for all MX5X devices
or in all MX5X software releases. Bluetooth access, modules and Bluetooth Manager on
the MX5X are not supported by LXE.
Access: Taskbar icon
Set the parameters for a Bluetooth radio. The Bluetooth Manager must be installed by
doubletapping the Bluetooth CAB file and then warm resetting the device. The Bluetooth icon is
placed in the taskbar.
Factory Default Settings
All Found Devices
Untrusted
Tap the Scan Device button to locate Bluetooth devices in your wireless area. Tap the <?> button
and follow the instructions in the Help file to authenticate Bluetooth devices in your area.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
232
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Desktop CE .NET 4.2
For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE .NET 4.2 user’s
guides or the Windows on-line Help application installed in the mobile device.
Note:
Whenever possible, use the AC power adapter with the MX5X to conserve the main
battery and to ensure the backup battery is charged.
The Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP. At a
minimum, it has desktop icons that can be tapped with the stylus to access My Computer, Internet
Explorer, and the Recycle Bin.
At the bottom of the screen is the Start button. Tapping the Start Button causes the Start Menu to
open. It contains the standard Windows menu options: Programs, Favorites, Documents, Settings,
Help, and Run.
The Start Menu Shutdown option found on most desktop PC’s has been replaced with a single
command: Suspend, because the mobile device is always powered On (when a fully charged main
battery and backup battery are present).
Tap the Suspend button to turn the screen off or tap the red Power button to turn the screen off and
place the device into Suspend mode.
Tap the screen once more or tap the Power button to ‘wake’ the unit up.
Desktop Option
Icon
Function
My Computer (CE .NET 4.2)
Access files and programs.
Recycle Bin
Storage for files that are to be deleted.
Internet Explorer
Connect to the Internet/intranet (requires a
wireless transmitter and Internet Service
Provider – ISP enrollment is not available from
LXE).
Transcriber
Enter text using the stylus on the touch screen.
Wireless Client Setup Icon
(Summit, Cisco, Symbol)
Used for configuring wireless clients for
network security settings. Note that only one
client can be used at a time, e.g. if the Summit
client icon is present, the Cisco client icon is
not present.
My Documents
Storage for downloaded files / applications.
Start
Access programs, select from the Favorites
listing, documents last worked on, change/view
settings for the control panel or taskbar, on-line
help, run programs or place the unit into
Suspend mode.
Desktop Icons
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
233
My Computer Folders (CE .NET 4.2)
Folder
Application Data
My Documents
Network
Profiles
Program Files
System
Temp
Windows
Description
Data saved by running applications
Storage for downloaded files / applications
Mounted network drive
Network user profiles
Applications
Internal ATA Card (64Meg total, 28 Meg
free for User Applications)
Location for temporary files
Operating System in ROM
Preserved upon Reboot?
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Folders Copied at Startup
The following folders are copied on startup:
•
•
•
•
•
System\Desktop
System\Favorites
System\Fonts
System\Help
System\Programs
-> Windows\Desktop
-> Windows\Favorites
-> Windows\Fonts
-> Windows\Help
-> Windows\Programs
This function copies only the directory contents, no sub-folders.
The following folders are *NOT* copied on startup:
• Windows\AppMgr
• Windows\Recent
• Windows\Startup
because copying these has no effect on the system, or an incorrect effect.
Files in the Startup folder are executed, but only from System\Startup. Windows\Startup is parsed
too early in the boot process so it has no effect.
Executables in System\Startup must be the actual executable, not a shortcut, because shortcuts are
not parsed by Launch.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
234
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Start Menu Program Options CE .NET 4.2
The following options represent the factory default program installation. Your system may be
different based on the software and hardware options purchased. Note that there can be only one
wireless client installed at a time. The client driver configuration utility chosen is based on the
type of installed wireless client card (Cisco, Summit, Symbol).
Access: Start | Programs
Cisco
Requires Windows CE .NET 4.2
operating system.
Symbol
Requires Windows CE .NET 4.2
operating system.
Summit
Communication
Get Connected
Remote Desktop
Terminal
Microsoft File Viewers
Excel Viewer
Image Viewer
PDF Viewer
PowerPoint Viewer
Word Viewer
Command Prompt
Inbox
Internet Explorer
iRescue
Media Player
Microsoft WordPad
Windows Explorer
Transcriber
Note:
Set Cisco client / network parameters. (See Chapter
5 Wireless Network Configuration for instruction.)
Tap the Network icon in the toolbar to set up the
Symbol client (See Chapter 5 Wireless Network
Configuration for instruction.)
Set Summit Client / network parameters. (See
Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for
instruction.)
Stores Network communication options
Run this command after setting up a connection
Displays MX5X file structure on a remote desktop
monitor
Log on to a Windows Terminal Server
View downloaded files (see Note)
View Excel 97 (and later) documents
View BMP, JPEG and PNG images
View Adobe Acrobat documents
View PowerPoint files
View Word 97 (and later) and RTF files
The command line interface in a separate window
Microsoft Outlook mail inbox.
Access web pages on the world wide internet
Data backup and recovery utility
Music management program
Opens an ASCII notepad
File management program
Enter data using the stylus on the touch screen.
The Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected or
encrypted.
Communication
Access: Start | Programs | Communication
Note:
Some communication menu options require an external modem connection to the MX5X.
Modems are not available from LXE nor supported by LXE.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
235
ActiveSync
Once a relationship (partnership) has been established with Connect (on a desktop computer),
ActiveSync will synchronize using the wireless link, serial port, USB or the infrared port on the
MX5X. Refer to ActiveSync Processes later in this guide.
Note:
ActiveSync does not transmit through the IR port in vehicle cradles. It will transport
through the IR port of the MX5 desktop cradles.
For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer, open ActiveSync, then
open ActiveSync Help.
Synchronizing from the MX5X
You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first
synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device. Refer to ActiveSync
Processes later in this guide.
To initiate synchronization from your device, tap Start | Programs | Communication | ActiveSync
to begin the process.
Note:
If you have a wireless LAN card, you can synchronize remotely from your device.
Tap Sync to connect and synchronize. View synchronization status.
Tap Tools to synchronize via IR or change synchronization settings. View connection status.
Tap Stop to stop synchronization.
Tap Start | Help for context-sensitive help.
Get Connected
Get Connected is used to initiate a hardwired connection to a host.
The default connect setup is USB direct connect.
After a Connect setup is selected, Start | Programs | Communication | Get Connected will start to
connect to a host.
The wireless link is made using Start | Run. Tap the Browse button and browse to the Windows
folder. Select repllog.exe and tap the OK button. The Run text box reappears with
\windows\repllog in the text box.
Before pressing Enter, type a backslash ( / ) and remote in the Run text box. For example:
\windows\repllog / remote
See Also: Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection
Remote Desktop Connection
Access: Start | Programs | Communication | Remote Desktop Connection
There are few changes in the CE version of Remote Desktop Connection as it relates to the general
desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection options.
Select a computer from the drop down list and tap the Connect button.
Tap the Options >> button to access the General, Display, Local Resources, Programs and
Experience tabs. Tap the <?> button to access Remote Desktop Connection Help.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
236
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Command Prompt
Access: Start | Programs | Command Prompt
Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands. Exit the Command Prompt by
typing exit at the command prompt or select File | Close.
Inbox
Access: Start | Programs | Inbox
This option requires a connection to a mail server. There are a few changes in the CE version of
Inbox as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Outlook Inbox options. Tap the
<?> button to access Inbox Help. ActiveSync can be used to transfer messages between the MX5X
inbox and a desktop inbox. Refer to ActiveSync Processes in Chapter 3 of this guide.
Internet Explorer
Access: Start | Programs | Internet Explorer
This option requires a wireless card and an Internet Service Provider. There are a few changes in
the CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet
Explorer options. Tap the <?> button to access Internet Explorer Help.
Media Player
Access: Start | Programs | Media Player
There are few changes in the CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general desktop
Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options. Tap the <?> button to access Media Player Help.
Windows Explorer
Access: Start | Programs | Windows Explorer
There are a few changes in the CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general
desktop PC Windows Explorer options. Tap the <?> button to access Windows Explorer Help.
Transcriber
Access: Start | Programs | Transcriber
Select Transcriber on the Start | Programs menu or tap the icon on the Desktop. To make changes
to the Transcriber application, enable or disable the current Transcriber session, etc., tap the hand
with a pen icon in the toolbar. Tap the <?> button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
237
Taskbar
Access: Start | Settings | Taskbar and Start Menu
The Taskbar can be used to determine how the taskbar appears on the display. Use the Advanced
tab to clear the contents of the Documents menu.
Factory Default Settings
General
Always on Top
Auto hide
Show Clock
Advanced
Expand Control Panel
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
There are a few changes in the CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC
Windows Taskbar options.
When the taskbar is auto hidden, press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button
appear.
Advanced Tab
Expand Control Panel
Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the
Settings | Control Panel menu option.
Clear Contents of Document Folder
Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Recently Opened Document folder.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
238
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Control Panel Options CE .NET 4.2
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel or My Computer | Control Panel
Getting Help
Please tap the <?> box to get Help when changing Control Panel options.
Option
Function
Accessibility
Customize the way the keyboard, audio, display or mouse function for
users with hearing or viewing difficulties.
Administration
LXE AppLock Administration utility. See Chapter 6 – AppLock for
details.
Audio
Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to CE events. Adjust
the volume, record gain, and sidetone for headphone, software and
microphone. Set volume for Bay Digital, CRMA Radio and Mixer.
Aironet Client Utility
Set the parameters for a Cisco client. (See Appendix C, section Wireless
Network Configuration for instruction.) Requires Windows CE .NET 4.2
operating system.
Certificates
Manage digital certificates used for secure communication.
Date/Time
Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings.
Dialing
Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by
LXE).
Display
Set background graphic, window/menu appearance parameters and set
backlight properties and timers.
Handheld
Displays hardware and software details. Tabs are Versions, Comms,
Radios, Misc. Enable or disable the touch panel (see Handheld
Properties | Misc).
Input Panel
Select the current key / data input method.
Internet Options
Set General, Connection, Security and Advanced options for Internet
connectivity. CE 5 version added Privacy and Popups options.
Keyboard
Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate.
Mouse
Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touch screen.
Network and Dial Up
Options
Set network driver properties and network access properties.
Owner
Set MX5X owner details (name, phone, etc) and Notes. Enter Network
ID for the device – user name, password, domain. Includes option to
display owner identification at power-on.
Password
Set MX5X user access password properties.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
239
Option
Function
PC Connection
Control the connection between the MX5X and a local desktop or laptop
computer.
Power
Set Power scheme properties. Review battery status and properties..
Regional Settings
Set appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional
and language settings.
Remove Programs
Remove user installed programs in their entirety.
Scanner
Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner
port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data
bits for available COM ports.
See section titled Determine Your Scanner Software Version.
Stylus
Set double-tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel.
Enable or disable the touch panel (see Handheld Properties | Misc).
Symbol
Set the parameters for a Symbol client. (See Appendix C, section
Wireless Network Configuration for instruction.)
System
Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage
and Program memory settings. Enter device name and description.
Terminal Server
Client Licenses
Assign a stored Terminal Server Client license to the device.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
240
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Accessibility
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Accessibility
Customize the way the keyboard, sound, display, mouse, automatic reset and notification sounds
function. There are a few changes from general desktop Accessibility options. Adjust the settings
and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
The following exceptions are due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system:
• If the ToggleKeys option is selected, please note that the ScrollLock key does not produce a
sound as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do.
• If the SoundSentry option is selection, please note that ScrollLock does not produce a visual
warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do.
Administration – for AppLock
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration
Use this option to set parameters for computers intended to be used as dedicated, single or
multiple application devices. In other words, only the application or feature(s) specified in the
AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the user.
LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to start up in Administration mode with no
default password, and when the device is started for the first time, the user has full access to the
mobile device and no password prompt is displayed. After the Administrator specifies an
application or applications to lock, assigns a password and the device is rebooted (or the hotkey is
pressed), the mobile device is then in end-user mode.
AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters and application launch
settings as specified by the Administrator.
See Chapter 6 - AppLock for further information and instruction.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
241
Audio
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Audio
Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files for operating system events. Adjust the volume,
record gain, and sidetone for headphone, software and microphone. Set volume for Bay Digital,
CRMA Radio and Mixer.
Audio Properties
Factory Default Settings
System
Speaker Volume
Events
Applications
Notifications
Key Clicks
Screen taps
Routing
System (Normal)
Wireless Phone (Network card)
Headset
CRMA Radio
Exp. Bay
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Bootloader
Version 1.01
Version 1.02
Loud
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Loud
Loud
Loud
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Loud
Loud
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Unhighlighted Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
N/A
N/A
N/A
MX5X Reference Guide
242
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Factory Default Settings
Disable Headset
Disable Speaker (Mute)
Microphone Gain
Volume
Headphone
Software
Microphone
Extra Volume
Bay Digital
CRMA Radio
Mixer
Events
Scheme
Note:
Bootloader
Version 1.01
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Version 1.02
1
Enabled
Enabled
60%
80%
60%
60%
80%
60%
60%
60%
60%
60%
60%
60%
Windows CE Default
Windows CE Default
MX5X Bluetooth access, Bluetooth modules and Bluetooth Manager are not supported by
LXE.
Certificates
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Certificates
Manage digital certificates used for secure communication.
Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on the mobile devices when using any type of
certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will
fail.
Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the MX5X user. These values may change based on the type
of wireless security resident in the client, access point or the host system.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
243
Date/Time
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Date/Time Icon
Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings after cold boot or at anytime.
Factory Default Settings
Current Time
Midnight
Time Zone
GMT-05:00
Daylight Savings Disabled
Note:
Date and time is reset to the default value each time the MX5X is rebooted.
There is minimal change from general desktop PC Date/Time Properties options. Adjust the
settings and tap the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes. The changes take effect
immediately. Double-tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes the Date/Time Properties
screen to appear.
Dialing
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Dialing
Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by LXE). Tap the <?> and
follow the instructions in Help.
Factory Default Settings
Location
Work
Area Code
425
Tone Dialing
Enabled
Country/Region
1
Disable Call Waiting Disabled
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
244
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Display
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display Icon
Select the Desktop image and set the display/keypad backlight timers when on battery or external
power.
Factory Default Settings
Background
Tile
Backlight
Battery Auto Turn Off
Idle Timer
External Auto Turn Off
Idle Timer
Windows CE
Disabled
Enabled
1 minute
Enabled
10 minutes
Display Properties
Display Properties
Background
There is no change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Background options. Select an
image from the dropdown list (or tap the Browse button to select an image from another folder) to
display on the Desktop, then tap the OK box to save the change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Backlight
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
When the backlight timer expires, the screen backlight is dimmed not turned off and the keypad
backlight is turned off. Default values are 1 minute for Battery power and 10 minutes for External
power.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
245
Handheld
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Handheld
Displays hardware, communications, versions and WLAN client details.
How to Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Handheld | Misc tab
Use this option to disable the touch panel. It can also be used to disable the touch screen
calibration configuration during a Cold Reset. When touch is disabled, the keypad must be used
for input. The Input Panel cannot be used.
Disable Touch Panel and Calibration
Access: My Computer | System
Create a file on the CF card (My Computer\System folder) named DisableTouchScreen.dat. If this
file is present on the CF card, the touch screen will be disabled, and calibration will NOT be
requested upon a cold reset.
Disable Touch Panel Only
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Handheld | Misc tab
To just disable the touch panel (calibration still required upon cold reset), enable (tap) the Touch
Panel Disabled checkbox on the Misc tab in the Handheld Properties Control Panel.
When checked, the touch panel is disabled. When touch is disabled, the keypad must be used for
input. The Input Panel cannot be used.
How to Re-enable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold
Reset
Access: My Computer | System
To enable Touch Panel and Calibration, delete the file named DisableTouchScreen.dat on the CF
card (My Computer\System folder). When this file is present on the CF card, the touch screen is
disabled, and calibration does not occur after a cold reset.
To enable the Touch Panel only, uncheck the Touch Panel Disabled checkbox on the Misc tab in
the Handheld Properties Control Panel (Start/Settings/Control Panel/Handheld/Misc tab).
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
246
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Bootloader Version 1.02
Handheld Properties – Version 1.02
Versions tab
Bootloader, CPU type, CPU, Controller, PCB.CPLD, Platform versions. Mobile device serial
number.
Comms tab
Comms
COM 1 Port
COM 4 Port
Bay Power
MX5X Reference Guide
Default
Main Connector enabled
Disabled: Power Output for Main Connector,
Options Bay
Main Connector enabled
Disabled: Power Output for Main Connector,
Options Bay
Disabled: CRMA, Bay 3V, Bay 5V
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
247
Radios tab
Parameter
Default
CF Slot Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
CF Slot Wakeup Enabled
Disabled (blank)
PC Slot Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
PC Slot Wakeup Enabled
Disabled (blank)
Bluetooth Radio Enabled
Disabled (blank) [see Note]
Ethernet Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
Note:
Bluetooth access, modules and Bluetooth Manager are not supported by LXE.
Misc tab
Parameter
Defaults
Keyboard Backlight
Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
Nonvolatile option
52-key Standard
Options: 52-key Phone, 52-key
MultiKey
Stealth Mode Enabled
Disabled (blank) [see Note]
Touch Panel Disabled
Disabled (blank) [see Note]
Note:
See previous section titled How To Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset
and How To Enable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
248
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Bootloader Version 1.01
Versions tab
Bootloader, CPU type, CPU, Controller, PCB.CPLD, Platform versions. Mobile device serial
number.
Comms tab
Comms
COM 1 Port
COM 4 Port
Bay Power
Defaults
Main Connector enabled
Disabled: Power Output for Main Connector,
Options Bay
Options Bay enabled
Disabled: Main Connector, Power Output for Main
Connector,
CRMA
Disabled: Bay 3V, Bay 5V
Radios tab
Parameter
Defaults
CF Slot Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
CF Slot Wakeup Enabled
Disabled (blank)
PC Slot Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
PC Slot Wakeup Enabled
Disabled (blank)
Bluetooth Radio Enabled
Disabled (blank) [see Note]
Ethernet Enabled
Enabled (checkmark)
Note:
Bluetooth access, modules and Bluetooth Manager are not supported by LXE.
Misc tab
Parameter
Defaults
Keyboard Backlight
Enabled
Disabled
Nonvolatile option
52-key Standard
Options: 52-key Phone, 52-key
MultiKey
Stealth Mode Enabled
Disabled (blank) [see Note]
Touch Panel Disabled
Disabled (blank) [see Note]
Note:
See previous section titled How To Disable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset
and How To Enable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
249
Input Panel
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Input Panel
Select the current key / data input method.
Factory Default Settings
Input Method
Allow applications to
change input panel state
Options
Keys
Use gestures
Keyboard
Enabled
Small keys
Disabled
Input Panel
Use this option to make the Input Panel or the physical keypad primarily available when entering
data. When new key maps are added to the registry, they will appear in the Input Method
dropdown list.
Tap the Input Panel icon in the taskbar to toggle the on-screen Keyboard on and off.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
250
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Internet Options
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Internet Options
Set MX5X user options for internet connectivity.
Windows CE .NET 4.2 Defaults
Factory Default Settings
General
Start Page
http://www.msn.com/
Search Page
search.msn.com
Cache Size
512 Kb
Connection
Use LAN
Disabled
Autodial Name
Blank
Proxy Server
Disabled
Bypass Proxy
Disabled
Security
Allow cookies
Enabled
Allow TLS 1.0 security
Disabled
Allow SSL 2.0 security
Enabled
Allow SSL 3.0 security
Enabled
Warn when switching
Enabled
Advanced
Display web images
Enabled
Play web sounds
Enabled
Enable web scripting
Enabled
Display script error note
Disabled
Underline links
Never
Select a tab. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
Keyboard
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard Icon
Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate.
Factory Default Settings
Repeat
Enable
Delay
Short
Rate
Slow
There is nochange from general desktop PC Keyboard Properties options. Adjust the settings and
tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
These values do not affect virtual keyboard (Input Panel) taps.
Mouse
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mouse
Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touch screen.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
251
Network and Dialup Connections
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections
Create a dialup, direct, Ethernet or VPN connection on the MX5X.
Create a Communication Option
1.
On the MX5X, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections. A
window is displayed showing the existing connections.
2.
Assuming the one you want does not exist, tap Connection. Then tap New…
3.
Give the new connection an appropriate name (IR @ 9600, etc.). Tap the Direct Connection
control. Tap the Next button.
4.
From the popup menu, choose the port you want to connect to. Only the available ports are
shown.
5.
Tap the Configure... button.
6.
Under the Port Settings tab, choose the appropriate baud rate. Data bits, parity, and stop bits
remain at 8, none, and 1, respectively.
7.
Under the Call Options tab, be sure to disable Wait for dial tone, since a direct connection will
not have a dial tone. Set the Cancel parameter (default is 2 seconds). Tap OK.
8.
TCP/IP Settings should not need to change from defaults. Tap the Finish button to create the
new connection.
9.
Close the Remote Networking window.
10. To activate the new connection select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection and tap
the Change button.
11. Select the new connection. Tap OK twice.
12. Close the Control Panel window.
13. Connect the desktop PC to the MX5X with the appropriate cable.
14. Tap the desktop Connect icon to test the new connection.
You can activate the connection by double-tapping on the specific connection icon in the Remote
Networking window, but this will only start an RAS (Remote Access Services) session, and does
not start ActiveSync properly.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
252
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Owner
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Owner Icon
Set MX5X owner details.
Factory Default Settings
Identification
Name, Company, Address, Telephones
Display at power-on
Notes
Notes
Display at power-on
Network ID
User Name
Password
Domain
Blank
Disabled
Blank
Disabled
Blank
Blank
Blank
Owner Properties
There is little change from general desktop PC Owner Properties display. Enter the information
and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
253
Password
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Password Icon
Set MX5X access/power up password properties.
Factory Default Settings
Password
Blank
At Power On
Disabled
Screensaver
Disabled
Note:
Once a password is assigned, each Control Panel option requires the password be
entered before the Control Panel option can be accessed. If you forget the password, it
cannot be restored without performing a cold boot on the unit (which erases everything
in memory).
Enter the password, then type it again to confirm it and tap the OK box to save the changes. The
password is immediately in effect.
Tap the Enable password protection at power-on checkbox to set whether the user types a
password at Power On.
PC Connection
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection
Control the connection between the MX5X and a nearby desktop/laptop computer.
Factory Default Settings
Enable direct connection
Enabled
Connect Using
‘USB Default’
Tap the Change Connection .. button to adjust the settings. Then tap the OK button to save the
changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Unchecking the Enable direct connections ….. disables ActiveSync.
Change Connection ….
Tapping Change Connection displays a list of configured ActiveSync connections.
PC Connection / Change Connection
Please refer to the Backup MX5X Files section in Chapter 3 for parameter setting
recommendations.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
254
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Power
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power
Set Power Off, Backlight properties. Review battery status and details. Please refer to Chapter 2
Physical Description and Layout section titled Power Modes.
Factory Default Settings
Status
Main Battery Power Gauge
Power Schemes
Battery
Suspend
3 minutes
AC Power
Suspend
5 minutes
Power Properties
Status
The Status tab shows the status and the percentage of power left in the main battery (removable).
The listed values cannot be changed by the user. Backup battery information is not available.
Battery
The Battery tab displays technical information (serial number, charge cycles remaining, etc.) about
the main battery pack. Backup battery information is not available.
Schemes
The Schemes tabs allows the user to set the Suspend timers when the mobile device is running on
Battery power or AC power. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The
changes take effect immediately.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
255
Regional Settings
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Regional Settings
Set the appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional and language settings.
Factory Default Settings
Regional Setting
English (United States)
Number
123,456,789.00 / -123,456,789.00 neg
Currency
$123,456,789.00 pos / ($123,456,789.00) neg
Time
h:mm:ss tt (tt=AM or PM)
Date
M/d/yy short / dddd,MMMM,dd,yyyy long
New in Windows CE 5:
In addition to the above settings, the user can set the user interface language and the default input
language.
Factory Default Settings
Language
User Interface
English (United States)
Input
Language
English (United States)-US
Installed
English (United States)-US
Tap the Customize button to assign a different format for dates, times, numbers and currency.
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. Changes are saved across tabs. Tap
the <X> box to discard any changes. Tap the <?> for Help. The changes take effect immediately.
Remove Programs
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Remove Programs
Remove/Delete User Installed Programs
Select a program and tap Remove. Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user-installed
only programs. The change takes effect immediately.
Files stored in the My Documents folder are not removed using this option.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
256
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Scanner
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner
Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings.
Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports. Scanner parameters
apply to the MX5X integrated scanner/imager only. Barcode manipulation parameters apply to
barcodes scanned by the integrated scanner/imager engine only.
Scanner configuration can be changed using the Scanner Control Panel or via the LXE API
functions. While the changed configuration is being read, the Scanner LED is solid amber. The
scanner is not operational during the configuration update.
Determine Your Scanner Software Version
Note:
Scanner control panel options are based on the installed software version levels, driver
and OS versions in MX5X devices. Your Scanner options may or may not be as described
in this section. Contact your LXE representative to obtain the most current software and
drivers for your mobile device. To identify the software version, go to Settings | Control
Panel | Handheld | Versions tab.
If the Scanner Control panel looks like this . . . .
Go to . . . .
This chapter, this
section titled Scanner
or
Chapter 4 Scanner
Determine Your Scanner Software Version
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
257
Factory Default Settings
Factory Default Settings
Main
Port 1
Port 2
Send key messages WEDGE
Translate Control Codes
Keys
Left
Enter
Right
Enter
Advanced (Version 2)
Translate
Disabled
Strip Leading
0 characters
Strip Trailing
0 characters
Prefix
Disabled
Suffix
Disabled
COM Ports (COM1, COM4)
Baud Rate
9600
Parity
None
Stop Bits
1
Data Bits
COM1 : 8
Note:
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
COM4 : greyed out
If the internal scanner has to be configured to operate at any communication settings
other than 9600, N, 8, 1 and the computer either loses power or a cold boot command is
entered, the Scanner applet must be reconfigured to match the scanner communication
settings.
ActiveSync will not work over a COM port if that COM port is enabled in the Scanner applet as a
scanner input. For example, if COM 1 is being used by the scanner, COM 1 can’t be used by any
other program.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
258
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Main
Version 1
Version 2
Scanner Properties / Main Tab
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
If Send Key Messages … is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the
active window. When this box is not checked, the application will need to use the set of LXE
Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver. Note that this latter method is
significantly faster than using Wedge.
Version 1
If Translate Control Codes is checked, unprintable ASCII characters (characters below 20H) in
scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are
sent in Character mode.
When Translate Control Codes is not checked and Send Key Messages is checked, CTRL codes
are passed through in Block mode.
See Also: Appendix D Reference Material section titled ASCII Control Codes.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
259
Keys
Scanner Properties / Keys Tab
The Keys tab sets up what happens when one of the Scan keys are pressed. Note that the two keys
can do the same or different functions.
Disabled
Scan
Enter
Tab
Field Exit
Esc
When either scan key is set to Disabled, it does nothing when pressed.
When set to Scan the integrated scanner is activated. If no integrated scanner is
present, the Scan selection is greyed out.
When set to Enter, both the Enter key and the (Scan button) / Enter key
perform the same function.
When set to Tab, both the Tab key and the (Scan button) / Tab key perform the
same function.
IBM TN5250 specific keypad only. The left Scan key can be programmed as a
Field Exit key.
When set to Esc the Scan key press halts the current function.
Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value
Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor. LXE recommends caution when editing the
Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made.
Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ LXE \ Scanner.
Set either the ScanCodeLeft or ScanCodeRight to be the scan code of the key to be used as the
virtual key when the Virtual Left key (Left Scan key) or Virtual Right key (Right Scan key) is
pressed. The registry requires a decimal value.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
260
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Advanced
Scanner Properties / Advanced tab
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
The title in the group box reflects the current mode. If you are in Block mode, the title of the group
box is Block. If you are in Key Message mode, the title of the group box is Key Message.
Translate Control Codes
If Translate Control Codes is checked, unprintable ASCII characters (characters below 20H) in
scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are
sent in Character mode.
When Translate Control Codes is not checked and Send Key Messages is checked, CTRL codes
are passed through in Block mode.
Strip Leading / Strip Trailing Characters
This feature, when enabled, strips the specified number of characters from a barcode, either from
the beginning (leading) or at the end (trailing), or both.
When this feature and the Add Prefix and / or Add Suffix features are both enabled, the leading
and trailing characters are stripped before the prefix or suffix is appended.
The configuration for stripping leading and trailing characters is specified independently. To
enable, either or both of the checkboxes labeled Strip Leading and Strip Trailing must be checked.
Then the number of characters to be stripped can be typed into the edit control or set using the spin
control on the right of the edit control.
The maximum number of characters that can be stripped is 99 characters for each leading and
trailing number of characters. When the Strip Leading and Strip Trailing checkboxes are blank (or
disabled), the edit controls are disabled; however the last specified number of characters to strip is
retained and dimmed.
When the number of characters to be stripped is greater than the number of characters in the
barcode a good read beep is sounded but all barcode data is discarded.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
261
Prefix / Suffix
If Add Prefix and / or Add Suffix are combined with Strip Leading and / or Strip Trailing, the
leading and / or trailing characters are stripped before the prefix or suffix is added.
The mode for Prefix/Suffix feature is determined by the Send Key Messages (WEDGE) setting in
the Main tab. When checked (enabled), the prefix/suffix feature is in Key Message mode. Key
message mode sends the prefix, barcode, and suffix to the application with the focus as
keystrokes. In Key message mode all keys on the keypad can be entered.
When the Send Key Messages is not checked, Block mode is enabled. Block mode allows ASCII
characters (0x0 – 0x7F), plus backspace, tab, delete, return and escape. In Block mode the
prefix/suffix data is added to the beginning and end of the buffered barcode data that can then be
read by an application from the WDG: device.
Up to 19 characters can be specified for the prefix and up to 19 characters can be specified for the
suffix. The characters can be text or control characters, e.g. tab, carriage return. The characters can
be entered into the prefix and suffix text boxes by typing from the keypad, entering the key’s hex
equivalent, or entering in hat ( ^ ) encoded delimited (8-bit code table) notation.
• To enable the Prefix or Suffix processing, check the associated checkbox. When the box is
checked, the edit controls to the right are enabled. Keys/characters are typed into the edit
control following the checkbox.
• Selecting the Add button then adds the key to the associated list of keys in the read-only edit
control to the right of the Add / Clear buttons. The keys are shown as comma-delimited strings.
• To erase the Prefix or Suffix, select the read-only edit control that contains the currently
configured Prefix or Suffix and select the Clear button.
• The Add and Clear buttons function on the control that is selected when the button is pressed.
• Hex values can be entered by preceding the two digit hex value with ‘0x’. Control characters
can also be entered using the ‘hat’ delimited notation, i.e. ^M for Carriage Return.
• All keypad keys can be entered by typing the key. Some keypad keys are only valid if in Key
Message mode. For example, the Function Keys (F1, PF1) are only valid in Key Message
mode.
See Hat Encoding and Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart in Appendix D Reference Material.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
262
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
COM Ports
Scanner Properties / COM Port Settings
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
The COM 1 display contains the same parameters as the COM 2 and COM 3 Tab. Adjust the
settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Note:
Neither COM1 nor COM4 support 5V switchable power on Pin 9 for tethered scanners.
Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds
Good scan and bad scan sounds are stored in the Windows folder, as SCANGOOD.WAV and
SCANBAD.WAV. These are unprotected WAV files and can be replaced by a WAV file of the
user’s choice. By default a good scan sound on the MX5X is a single 2700 Hz beep, and a bad
scan sound is a double beep.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
263
Storage Manager
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Storage Manager
Note:
Storage Manager is not available until a storage device is installed in the MX5X.
Installed storage devices are listed by device name in the dropdown box. To view information
about the disk or perform store operations, select a device from the list.
Storage Properties
On-line help is available for this option.
Topics available are:
•
•
•
•
Manage storage devices
Manage disk partitions
Creating a new partition
Advanced partition features
LXE recommends CAUTION when formatting or dismounting storage devices and when creating
new partitions or deleting partitions on the storage device.
This menu option is not available in all versions.
Note:
Contact LXE Customer Support prior to using management functions on the internal ATA
card.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
264
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Stylus
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Stylus
Set double-tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel.
Double Tap
Follow the instructions on the screen and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take
effect immediately.
Calibration
Stylus Properties / Calibration Start / Calibration Begin
Press and hold the stylus on the center of the target as it moves around the screen. Press Enter to
keep the new calibration settings or Esc to cancel.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
265
System
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | System Icon
Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage and Program memory
settings.
Factory Default Settings
General
N/A
Memory
Middle of Memory Bar
Device Name
Windows CE
Device Description
Windows CE Device
Copyrights
N/A
General
System - This screen is presented for information only. The System parameters cannot be changed
by the user.
Computer - The processor type is listed. The type cannot be changed by the user. The name of the
installed wireless card is listed in the dropdown list. Total computer memory and the identification
of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user.
Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system. Hence, a system
with 64 MB may only report 35 MB memory, since 29 MB is used up by the Windows CE
operating system. This is actual DRAM memory, and does not include internal flash or the internal
ATA card used for storage.
Memory
System / Memory
Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage. If there isn’t enough space for a
file, increase the amount of storage memory. If the MX5X is running slowly, try increasing the
amount of program memory. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The
changes take effect immediately.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
266
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Device Name
System / Device Name
The device name and description can be changed. Enter the name and description using either the
keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Copyrights
This screen is presented for information only. The Copyrights information cannot be changed by
the user.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
267
Wireless Network Configuration (Cisco and Symbol Clients)
All Summit wireless network configuration is included in Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration.
Cisco Client Configuration (CE .NET 4.2 only)
Prerequisites
• Windows CE .NET 4.2 operating system
• Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point
• WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys
Aironet Client Utility (ACU)
Access: Start | Aironet Client Utility or ACU Icon on Desktop
Note:
When making changes to profile parameters, the mobile device should be warmbooted
afterwards.
Note:
To configure WPA, please see Cisco Wireless Security, later in this chapter.
Profiles Tab
Use this option to manage profiles and review firmware information, status, statistics and wireless
device survey data.
Profile Parameter
SSID
Client Name
Infrastructure Mode
Power Save Mode
Network Security Type
WEP
Authentication Types
LEAP
Mixed Mode
World Mode
Data Rates
Transmit Power
Offline Channel Scan
Default
Blank
Blank
Yes
Fast PSP
None
No WEP
Open
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Auto
MAX
Enabled
Select an active profile to manage. Tap the WEP Keys button to enter WEP information. If a key
is already entered, the Already set? checkbox is checked. The previously entered key value is not
displayed for security.
Firmware Tab
Displays the current firmware version and allows you to load new firmware. Tap the Browse
button to locate the new firmware file.
Status Tab
Immediately runs status on signal strength and signal quality.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
268
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Statistics Tab
Select the Receive Stats or Transmit Stats. The data is displayed on the screen.
Survey Tab
Immediately runs signal strength and quality and link speed. An option is available to Setup
parameters for Active Mode reporting.
Cisco Wireless Security
• Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is only available on mobile device’s equipped with the updated
Cisco client driver (release 2.60 or later).
• WPA requires software revision 1ED or greater. To identify the software revision, tap on the
About icon in the Control Panel.
• Refer to the LXE Security Primer to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for
MX5X communication.
• It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of certificate.
Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail.
System Requirements
To support Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), the mobile device must be equipped with a Cisco 350
wireless card with driver release 2.60 (or later).
The LXE MX5X supports WPA and all authentications. The Microsoft supplicant and Cisco
supplicants are used separately or together to provide support for the different authentications.
Most of the configuration is done with the Microsoft Wireless Configuration tool.
WPA/LEAP requires the Cisco supplicant and Cisco ACU configuration tool.
Installing Cisco Wireless Client Drivers
Which version of the Cisco client driver should be installed depends on what authentication
protocol is to be configured.
• Cisco PEAP should not be installed if using PEAP/MSCHAP.
• Cisco PEAP must be installed if using PEAP/GTC.
• For all other authentications (LEAP, EAP-TLS, WPA-PSK) it does not matter if Cisco PEAP
is installed or not.
To determine if Cisco PEAP is installed or to change the installation, refer to the instructions in
the following sections.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
269
Checking for the Cisco PEAP Supplicant
With a Cisco wireless device installed, open the Wireless network properties as described in
Wireless Network Configuration, later in this section. With the Authentication tab selected check
the text in the EAP type drop down box. Refer to the following figures to determine if Cisco
PEAP is installed.
Cisco PEAP Installed
PEAP Installed
Cisco PEAP Authentications
If the Cisco installation is correct, continue with the configuration. If it is not correct, follow the
procedures below.
Note:
Instructions are also included in the README file located in the \SYSTEM folder.
There are two Cisco CAB files in the \SYSTEM folder of the MX5X. The default files are
CISCO.CAB and CISCOPEAP.CAB.
The default CISCO.CAB file provides for all authentications except Cisco PEAP. When the
default CISCO.CAB file is loaded, the Wireless Network Properties screen looks like the previous
figure labeled PEAP Installed.
If Cisco PEAP is desired:
1.
Rename the CISCO.CAB file to CISCOMSCHAP.CAB.
2.
Rename the CISCOPEAP.CAB file to CISCO.CAB.
3.
Coldboot the mobile device to install the new driver with the registry.
The renamed CISCO.CAB file provides for Cisco PEAP and PEAP/GTC authentications. When
the renamed CISCO.CAB file is loaded, the Wireless Network Properties screen looks like the
previous figure labeled Cisco PEAP Installed.
If it becomes necessary to switch to a different authentication than Cisco PEAP or PEAP/GTC,
1.
Rename the CISCO.CAB file to CISCOPEAP.CAB.
2.
Rename the CISCOMSCHAP.CAB file to CISCO.CAB
3.
Coldboot the mobile device to install the new driver with the registry.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
270
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Cisco WPA Configuration
Use the following instructions for all authentication protocols to configure the Microsoft Wireless
Network configuration utility unless WPA/LEAP is used.
WPA/LEAP is configured with the Cisco ACU (see section titled WPA/LEAP Authentication
Configuration).
Tap the ACU icon on the desktop.
Cisco ACU Profile Selection
From the Select Active Profile pull down list, select <External Settings>.
Tap OK and warmboot.
Cisco ACU Reboot Message
After booting up, the Microsoft Zero Config tool should start. If it does not, start configuring the
wireless connection by tapping on the WZC icon (networked computers) in the toolbar.
The Wireless Network Connection screen appears.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
271
Cisco Wireless Information Screen
Make sure the Notify me when new wireless networks are available box is not checked..
Tap the Advanced… button.
Cisco Advanced Wireless Settings
Make sure the Use Windows to configure my wireless settings box is checked.
Set the Networks to access drop down box to Only access points.
Tap the OK button on the Advanced Wireless Settings screen and the Wireless Information Screen
is displayed.
On the Wireless Information screen tap the Add New … line.
The Wireless Network Properties screen is displayed.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
272
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Cisco Wireless Network Properties
Enter the Network name (SSID) into the text field.
For PEAP/MSCHAP and EAP/TLS, set Encryption to TKIP and Authentication to WPA.
For WPA/PSK see WPA/PSK Authentication Configuration.
To configure the IEEE 802.1X Authentication box see the following sections for configuration of
each authentication protocol.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
273
PEAP/MS-CHAP Authentication Configuration
The Microsoft supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP/MS-CHAP protocol. The Cisco CAB
file without Cisco PEAP must be used with PEAP/MS-CHAP. See Installing Cisco Wireless
Client Drivers, earlier in this chapter, for more information.
Configuring the PEAP/MS-CHAP Supplicant
Cisco PEAP/MSCHAP Wireless Network Properties
With the wireless parameters configured (see Wireless Network Configuration in this chapter) set
the EAP type to PEAP as shown above.
If the EAP type box text is not exactly as shown see Installing Cisco Wireless Client Drivers in
this chapter, to change the wireless client CAB file.
Tap the Properties button.
Cisco Authentication Settings
When first configuring and authenticating, do not validate the server certificate. This allows the
user authentication to be tested. When user authentication is successful, come back to this screen
and validate the server certificate.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
274
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
The login screen appears for logging into the wireless network.
Cisco Wireless Network Login
Once authenticated, tap the IP Information tab.
Cisco IP Information Tab
If the network is set to use DHCP, the mobile device displays the IP address assigned by the
DHCP server.
Now go back and authenticate the server.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
275
Server Authentication
To validate the server certificate install the root CA certificate. For instructions for installing, see
Root Certificates, in this chapter.
Cisco Authentication Settings, Validate Server
Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen.
Tap the Properties button.
Check Validate server.
Tap OK to dismiss the configuration boxes.
Cisco Advanced Wireless Settings, Authenticated SSID
Once the authentication completes, the status changes to show the mobile device has authenticated
to the <SSID>, as shown in the figure above.
Tap on the IP Information tab and make sure there is a valid IP address as shown in the figure
labeled IP Information Tab, earlier in this chapter.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
276
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
PEAP / GTC Authentication Configuration
The Microsoft supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP/GTC protocol.
Configuring the PEAP/GTC Supplicant
Cisco PEAP/GTC Wireless Network Properties
With the client parameters configured (see Wireless Network Configuration in this chapter) set the
EAP type to Cisco PEAP as shown above.
If the EAP type box text is not exactly as shown, see Installing Cisco Wireless Client Drivers in
this chapter, to change the wireless client CAB file.
Tap the Properties button.
Cisco Authentication Settings
When first configuring and authenticating, do not validate the server certificate. This allows the
user authentication to be tested. When user authentication is successful, return to this screen and
validate the server certificate as shown later in this section
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
277
The login screen appears for logging into the wireless network.
Cisco Wireless Network Login
Enter valid user credentials.
Once authenticated, tap the IP Information tab.
Cisco IP Information Tab
If the network is set to use DHCP, the mobile device displays the IP address assigned by the
DHCP server.
Now go back and authenticate the server.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
278
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Server Authentication
To validate the server certificate install the root CA certificate. For instructions for installing, see
Root Certificates, in this chapter.
Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen.
Tap the Properties button.
Cisco Authentication Settings, Validate Server
Check Validate server.
Tap OK to dismiss the configuration boxes. If the login screen appears, enter valid user
credentials.
Cisco Advanced Wireless Settings, Authenticated SSID
Once the authentication completes, the status changes to show the mobile device has authenticated
to the SSID, as shown in the figure above.
Tap on the IP Information tab and make sure there is a valid IP address as shown in the figure
labeled IP Information Tab in this section.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
279
WPA/LEAP
LEAP is a Cisco proprietary authentication protocol and is not supported by the Microsoft
supplicant. To configure the mobile device for WPA/LEAP, use the Cisco ACU installed during
normal installation of the Cisco client driver.
Cisco ACU
Start the Cisco ACU by tapping the icon on the desktop or navigate to Start | Programs | Cisco |
ACU.
Tap on the Profile tab.
Tap the Rename button.
Name the profile.
Cisco Renaming Profile
Tap the Edit . . . button.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
280
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
The profile properties screen is displayed.
Cisco Profile Properties Screen
Enter the SSID and Client Name in the correct fields.
Set the Network Security Type to LEAP(WPA).
Tap the OK button and the Profiles tab is displayed again.
Use the drop down box to choose the profile just configured.
Tap OK.
The mobile device associates and displays the sign on screen.
Cisco Login Screen
Tap the Status tab to display status.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
281
EAP-TLS Authentication Configuration
To authenticate using the EAP-TLS protocol you need a user certificate file and a private key file.
Once you have the user certificate files run the certificate installer from the Microsoft control
panel. For EAP-TLS it does not matter which Cisco cab file is installed.
Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on CE mobile devices when using any type of
certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will
fail.
User Certificate
To check if a user certificate is installed navigate to Start | Control Panel | Certificates.
Set the drop down box to My Certificates as shown below.
The correct user certificate should be shown in the pane.
Cisco Certificate Stores
Tap the View . . . button.
Set the Field to Private Key.
From the Field pull down menu, select Private Key.
If the private key is present, the process is complete.
If the private key is not present, import the private key.
If there is no user certificate refer to User Certificates in this chapter, to acquire a user certificate
and private key file.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
282
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Setting EAP/TLS Parameters
With the client parameters configured (see Wireless Network Configuration) set the EAP type to
TLS as shown.
Cisco EAP/TLS Configuration
Tap the Properties button.
Cisco Authentication Settings
Tap the Select button to choose the user certificate.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
283
Cisco Select Certificate
Cisco Authentication Settings, Certificate Details
Do not check the Validate server certificate box. This allows the user to be authenticated as the
first step.
When the user certificate successfully authenticates, come back to this screen and validate the
server certificate as described in the next section.
Tap the OK button to dismiss the configuration screens. When the client re-connects the user is
authenticated with the user certificate.
If the user does not authenticate, recheck the user certificate and the date on the computer.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
284
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Validating the Server Certificate
Before validating the server certificate, make sure the Root CA certificate is installed on the
mobile device.
Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen.
Tap the Properties button.
Check the Validate server box as shown below.
Cisco Validate Server
Tap OK to dismiss the configuration boxes.
Cisco SSID Authenticated
Once the authentication completes the status changes to show the mobile device has authenticated
to <SSID> as shown above.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
285
WPA PSK Configuration
Configure the Wireless Network Settings as described in Wireless Network Settings in this
chapter.
Change the Network Authentication to WPA-PSK.
Enter an ASCII network key in the text field. Hex keys do not work in the Microsoft Zero Config
utility at this time.
There is no server authentication when using WPA-PSK.
Tap the OK button to complete the configuration.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
286
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
Symbol Client (CE .NET 4.2 only)
Note:
When making changes to profile parameters, the mobile device should be warmbooted
afterwards unless noted otherwise.
Prerequisites
• Windows CE .NET 4.2 operating system
• Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point
• WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys
Access: Tap the Network Connected Icon in the Status Bar
IP Information Tab
After the IP Address has been assigned to the mobile device, tap the Renew button to renew the IP
address if necessary. Tap the Details button to view the Network Connection details.
IPv6 Information Tab
This is the TCP/IPv6 information screen. The contents cannot be edited by the user.
Configuring IPv6
By default, IPv6 is enabled and an IPv6 broadcast message is sent on power up. To disable IPv6,
run \Windows\ipv6Disable.reg and perform a warmboot. To enable IPv6, run
\Windows\ipv6Enable.reg and perform a warmboot. Contact your LXE representative for
ipv6Disable.reg and ipv6Enable.reg availability.
Note:
These utilities affect the behavior of the IPv6 on warmboot. After a coldboot, IPv6 is
enabled.
Wireless Information Tab
Factory Default Settings
Wireless Information tab
Notify when new networks available
Advanced Button
Use Windows to configure wireless settings
Automatically connect to non-preferred networks
Networks to access (Only Apps, Only comp-to-comp)
Encryption (WEP, TKIP)
Authentication (WPA, Open, Shared, WPA-PSK)
Ad hoc network
Key provided automatically
Enable 802.1X authentication
EAP Type (MDF-Challenge, PEAP, TLS)
MX5X Reference Guide
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
All available
WEP
WPA
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
TLS
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
287
View Log
Displays the logon/connection data for the current network connection.
Add a new connection
Select Add New. Enter the ESSID in the Network Name text box.
Disable WEP
• If WEP is to be disabled, tap the down arrow in the Authentication drop down box. Select
Open.
• Tap the down arrow in the Encryption drop down box. Tap Disabled and WEP is disabled.
• Tap the OK button to return to the Wireless Information tab.
Enable WEP
• Tap the down arrow in the Authentication drop down box.
• Tap the WEP Authentication protocol.
• If the key is provided automatically by your network, check the Key provided automatically
checkbox.
• If you wish to enter your Authentication key, uncheck the Key provided automatically
checkbox and enter the Network Key in the Network Key text box.
• Tap the OK button to return to the Wireless Information tab.
Continue
Tap the Advanced … button. Make sure there is a checkmark in the Use Windows to configure my
wireless settings checkbox. Make sure there is no checkmark in the Automatically connect to nonpreferred networks checkbox. Tap the Connect button.
Tap OK to return to the Wireless Information tab.
Tap the Connect button.
To access NETWLAN1 Properties again, tap the Network Connected icon in the Toolbar.
Select a User Certificate
1.
Select Wireless Information Tab.
2.
Select a network by doubletapping the network name.
3.
In the IEEE 802.1X Authentication box, enable 802.1X authentication
4.
Select an EAP type.
5.
Tap the Properties button. Validate Server is enabled by default.
6.
At the Authentication Settings display, tap the Select button to choose a User Certificate.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
288
MX5X Reference Guide
Appendix C MX5X CE .NET 4.2
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Appendix D Reference Material
Introduction
Contents of this Appendix include:
• AppLock – Single Application Configuration. Includes information and instruction for an
MX5X using AppLock to manage a single application. AppLock error messages and registry
settings are also included.
• MX5X Reference Guide Revision History
and the following charts:
•
•
•
•
Valid VK Codes for CE .NET and CE Devices
ASCII Control Codes
Hat Encoding
Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
290
AppLock - Single Application Configuration
AppLock - Single Application Configuration
Access:
| Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon
LXE’s AppLock is designed to be run on LXE certified Windows CE .NET / CE based devices
only. LXE loads the AppLock program as part of the LXE customer installation process.
Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device enduser. AppLock is password protected by the Administrator.
End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application. The end user can still reboot the
mobile device and respond to dialog boxes. The administrator-specified application is
automatically launched and run in full screen mode when the device completes the boots up
process.
When the mobile device is reset to factory default values, for example after a cold reset, the
Administrator may need to reconfigure the AppLock parameters.
AppLock is updated periodically as new options become available. Contact your LXE
representative for assistance, downloads and update availability.
Determine Your AppLock Version
If the Administrator Control Menu looks like this . . .
Go to . . . .
Administrator Control
Control
Security
This appendix.
Status
Chapter 6 - AppLock
Determine Your AppLock Version
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
AppLock - Single Application Configuration
291
Setup a New Device
LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no
default password, thus when the device is first booted, the user has full access to the device and no
password prompt is displayed. After the administrator specifies an application to lock, a password
is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed, the device switches to end-user
mode.
Briefly, the process to configure a new device is as follows:
1.
Insert a fully charged battery and press the Power button. See Chapter 1 – Introduction.
2.
Connect an external power source to the device (if required). See Chapter 1 – Introduction.
3.
Adjust screen display, audio volume and other parameters if desired. Install accessories (e.g.
handstrap, stylus). See Chapter 1 – Introduction.
4.
Tap Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon.
5.
Assign a hotkey switching sequence.
6.
Assign an application on the Control tab screen. See Control Panel.
7.
Assign a password on the Security tab screen. See Security Panel.
8.
Select a view level on the Status tab screen, if desired. See Status Panel.
9.
Tap OK.
10. Press the hotkey sequence to launch AppLock and lock the configured application(s).
11. The device is now in end-user mode.
Note:
LXE has made the assumption, in this appendix, that the first user to power up a new
mobile device is the system administrator.
Note:
AppLock cannot support multiple windows of some applications. Attempting to open
multiple windows of RFTerm or Pocket Word will cause AppLock to switch to
administration mode.
Administration Mode
Administration mode gives full access to the device and configuration options.
The administrator must enter a valid password (when a password has already been assigned)
before access to Administration mode and configuration options are allowed. The administrator
can configure the following options:
•
•
•
•
Create/change the keystroke sequence to activate administrator access.
Create/change the password for administrator access.
Assign the name of the application, or applications, to lock.
Select the command line of the application, or applications, to lock.
In addition to these configuration options, the administrator can view and manage the status logs
of AppLock sessions.
Administrator default values for this device:
Administrator Hotkey
Shift+Ctrl+A
Password
none
Application path and name
none
Application command line
none
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
292
AppLock - Single Application Configuration
End User Mode
End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application (or applications). The end user
can still reboot and respond to dialog boxes. The single application is automatically launched, and
runs in full screen mode when the device boots up.
The user cannot unintentionally or intentionally exit the application nor can the end user execute
any other applications. Normal application exit or switching methods and all Microsoft defined
Windows CE key combinations, such as close (X) icon, File Exit, File Close, Alt-F4, Alt-Tab, etc.
are disabled. The Windows CE desktop icons, menu bars, task bar and system trays are not visible
or accessible. Task Manager is not available.
If the end-user selects File/Exit or Close from the applications menu bar, the menu is cleared and
nothing else happens; the application remains active. Nothing happens when the end-user taps on
the Close icon on the application’s title bar and the application remains active.
Note:
A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing. AppLock cannot
prevent this type of application from closing, but is notified that the application has
closed. For these applications, AppLock immediately restarts the application which
causes the screen to flicker. If this type of application is being locked, the administrator
should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the
screen flicker.
Windows accelerator keys such as Alt-F4 are disabled.
Passwords
A password must be configured. If the password is not configured, a new device switches into
Administration mode without prompting for a password. In addition to the hotkey press, a mode
switch occurs if inaccurate information has been configured or if mandatory information is
missing in the configuration.
There are several situations that display a password prompt after a password has been configured.
If the configured hotkey is pressed, the password prompt is displayed. In this case the user has 30
seconds to enter a password. If a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds, the password
prompt is dismissed and the device returns to end-user mode.
All other situations that present the password prompt do not dismiss the prompt – this is because
the other situations result in invalid end-user operation.
These conditions include:
• If inaccurate configuration information is entered by the administrator, i.e. an application is
specified that does not exist.
• If the application name, which is mandatory for end-user mode, is missing in the configuration.
• Invalid installation of AppLock (e.g. missing DLLs).
• Corrupted registry settings.
To summarize, if an error occurs that prevents AppLock from switching to user mode, the
password will not timeout and AppLock will wait until the correct password is entered.
Password Troubleshooting
Can’t locate the password that has been set by the administrator? Enter this LXE back door key
sequence:
Ctrl+L Ctrl+X Ctrl+E
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
AppLock - Single Application Configuration
293
Single Application Configuration
The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift+Ctrl+A.
Administrator mode allows access to all features on the device. When the hotkey is pressed to
switch into Administrator mode, a password prompt is displayed (if a password has been
configured). A password must be entered within 30 seconds (and within three tries) or the
password prompt is removed and the device remains in end-user mode with the focus returned to
the locked application. Without entry of a valid password, the switch into Administrator mode will
not occur.
The password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured. When the valid password is
entered, the Administration Control panel is displayed. When a valid password is not entered
within 30 seconds, the user is returned to the System Control Panel.
If a password has not been configured, the Administrator Control panel is displayed.
Administrator Control Panels
Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon
A mobile device running the Single Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated, single
application device. In other words, only the application or feature specified in the AppLock
configuration by the Administrator is available to the user.
Administrator Control Panels – Single Application
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
294
AppLock - Single Application Configuration
Control Panel
Control Panel
Note:
If your Administrator Control Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may
have the Multi-Application version.
Use the Control tab options to select the application to launch when the device boots up.
Move the cursor to the Application text box and either type the application path or tap the Browse
button (the … button). The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed. After selecting the
application from the Browse dialog, tap OK.
Enter the command line parameters for the application in the Command Line text box.
Enter the number of seconds the selected Application must wait before starting to run upon reboot.
If no application is specified when the Administrator Control panel is closed, the device reboots
into Administrator mode. If a password has been set, but the application has not been specified,
the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode. The password
prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered.
End User Internet Explorer
AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer, such as .HTML pages and JAVA
applications. The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in
Internet Explorer’s address bar.
To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method, the address bar and
Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer. This is accomplished by creating an
Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode, End-user Internet Explorer (EUIE). The EUIE
executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address bar and
status bar. The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re-enable the address bar.
The administrator specifies the EUIE by simply checking the Internet checkbox in the Control tab
of the Administrator applet. The internet application should then be entered in the Application text
box. If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the device is desired, it should be treated
like any other application. This means that IEXPLORER.EXE should be specified in the
Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line. In this
case, do not check the Internet checkbox.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
AppLock - Single Application Configuration
295
Security Panel
Security Panel
Specify a Hotkey Sequence
Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user
modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode. The default hotkey sequence is
Shift+Ctrl+A.
A 2nd key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence.
Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box. Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the
Shift state key followed by a normal key. The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the
application being locked does not use. The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not
passed to the application.
Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be
pressed from the keyboard when switching modes. The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot
key text box with <Shift>, <Alt>, and <Ctrl> text strings representing the shift state keys. The
normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence. The hotkey must be entered via the keypad.
Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel. Also, hotkeys entered via the SIP are not
guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes.
For example, if the <Ctrl> key is pressed followed by <A>, Ctrl+A is entered in the text box. If
another key is pressed after a normal key press, the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey
sequence is started.
A normal key is required for the hotkey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a
mode switch; this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key. However, when the
hotkey is pressed to switch modes, the normal key must be entered from the keypad; it cannot be
entered from the SIP.
Setting a Password
Move the cursor to the Password text box. The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm
Password fields must match. Passwords are case sensitive.
When the user exits the Administrator Control panel, the two passwords are compared to verify
that they match. If they do not match, a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
296
AppLock - Single Application Configuration
After the user closes the dialog box, the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be
entered and confirmed again. If the passwords match, the password is encrypted and saved.
See Also:
Passwords
Status Panel
Status Panel
Note:
If your Status Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may have the MultiApplication version.
Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operation and to configure which
messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation.
As the status information is stored in the registry and accumulates during AppLock configuration
and operation, it is very important that the administrator periodically clear the status information
to reduce the amount of registry space used. For this reason, the administrator can configure the
type of status information that is logged, as well as clear the status information.
View
Error
Error status messages are logged when an error occurs and is
intended to be used by the administrator to determine why the
specified application cannot be locked.
Process
Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components
and is mainly intended for LXE Customer Service when helping
users troubleshoot problems with their AppLock program.
Extended
Extended status provides more detailed information than that
logged by Process Logging.
All
All messages are displayed.
Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another. The filtered records are
displayed, all others are not displayed.
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
AppLock - Single Application Configuration
297
Levels
Note:
If a level higher than Error is selected, the status should be cleared frequently by the
administrator.
In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be
logged or turn off all status information logging completely. The system default is ‘None’;
however to reduce registry use, the administrator may want to select ‘None’ after verifying the
configuration. Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the registry.
•
•
•
•
•
None
Error
Processing
Extended
All
Save As
When the ‘Save As’… button is selected, a standard ‘Save As’ dialog screen is displayed. Specify
the path and filename. If the filename exists, the user is prompted whether the file should be
overwritten. If the file does not exist, it is created.
See Also:
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Error Messages
MX5X Reference Guide
298
AppLock Error Messages
AppLock Error Messages
Any messages whose first word is an ‘ing’ word is output prior to the action described in the
message. For example, Switching to admin-hotkey press is logged after the administrator has
pressed the hotkey but prior to starting the switch process.
For all operations that can result in an error, an Error level message is displayed when a failure
occurs. These messages contain the word failure. These messages have a partner Extended level
message that is logged which contains the word OK if the action completed successfully rather
than with an error.
For processing level messages, Enter… is logged at the beginning of the function specified in the
message and Exit… is logged at the end (just before the return) of the function specified in the
message.
Message
Error reading hotkey
Error reading hotkey; using default
App Command Line= <Command
line>
App= <Application name>
dwProcessID= <#>
Encrypt exported key len <#>
Encrypt password length= <#>
Encrypted data len <#>
hProcess= <#>
Key pressed = <#>
*****************
Address of keyboard hook
procedure failure
Address of keyboard hook
procedure OK
Alt pressed
Alt
Application handle search failure
Application handle search OK
Application load failure
Backdoor message received
Cannot find kbdhook.dll
Converted Pwd
Could not create event
EVT_HOTKEYCHG
MX5X Reference Guide
Explanation and/or corrective action
The hotkey is read but not required by AppLock.
A hotkey is required. If there is a failure reading the
hotkey, the internal factory default is used.
Command line of the application being locked
Name of the application being locked
Device ID of the application being locked
Size of encrypt export key
The length of the encrypted password.
Length of the encrypted password
Handle of the application being locked
A key has been pressed and trapped by the hotkey
processing.
The status information is being saved to a file and the
file has been opened successfully.
AppLock found the kbdhook.dll, but was unable to get
the address of the initialization procedure. For some
reason the dll is corrupted. Look in the \Windows
directory for kbdhook.dll. If it exists, delete it. Also
delete applock.exe from the \Windows directory and
reboot the unit. Deleting applock.exe triggers the
AppLock system to reload.
AppLock successfully retrieved the address of the
keyboard filter initialization procedure.
The Alt key has been pressed and trapped by the
HotKey processing.
Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry
The application being locked did not complete
initialization.
The application initialized itself successfully
The application could not be launched by AppLock; the
application could not be found or is corrupted.
The backdoor keys have been pressed. The backdoor
hotkeys provide a method for customer service to get a
user back into their system without editing the registry
or reloading the device.
The load of the keyboard filter failed. This occurs when
the dll is missing or is corrupted. Look in the \Windows
directory for kbdhook.dll. If it exists, delete it. Also
delete applock.exe from the \Windows directory and
reboot the unit. Deleting applock.exe triggers the
AppLock system to reload.
Converted password from wide to mbs.
The keyboard filter uses this event at the Administrator
Control panel. The event could not be created.
Level
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
AppLock Error Messages
Message
Could not hook keyboard
Could not start thread HotKeyMon
Ctrl after L or X
Ctrl pressed
Ctrl
Decrypt acquire context failure
Decrypt acquired context OK
Decrypt create hash failure
Decrypt created hash OK
Decrypt failure
Decrypt import key failure
Decrypt imported key OK
Encrypt acquire context failure
Encrypt acquire encrypt context
failure
Encrypt acquired encrypt context
OK
Encrypt create hash failure
Encrypt create key failure
Encrypt created encrypt hash OK
Encrypt export key failure
Encrypt export key length failure
Encrypt exported key OK
Encrypt failure
Encrypt gen key failure
Encrypt generate key failure
Encrypt get user key failure
Encrypt get user key ok
Encrypt hash data failure
Encrypt hash data from pwd OK
Encrypt length failure
Encrypt out of memory for key
Encrypted data OK
Enter AppLockEnumWindows
Enter DecryptPwd
Enter EncryptPwd
Enter FullScreenMode
Enter GetAppInfo
Enter password dialog
Enter password timeout
Enter restart app timer
Enter TaskbarScreenMode
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
299
Explanation and/or corrective action
If the keyboard cannot be controlled, AppLock cannot
process the hotkey. This failure prevents a mode switch
into user mode.
The keyboard filter must watch for hot key changes. The
watch process could not be initiated.
Processing the backdoor entry.
The Ctrl key has been pressed and trapped by the
HotKey processing.
Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry.
Unable to decrypt password.
Decryption process ok.
Unable to decrypt password.
Decryption process ok.
Unable to decrypt password.
Unable to decrypt password.
Decryption process ok.
Unable to encrypt password.
Unable to encrypt password.
Level
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt password process successful.
LOG_EX
Unable to encrypt password.
Unable to encrypt password.
Encrypt password process successful.
Unable to encrypt password.
Unable to encrypt password.
Encrypt password process successful.
The password encryption failed.
Unable to encrypt password.
Unable to encrypt password.
Unable to encrypt password.
Encrypt password process successful.
Unable to encrypt password.
Encrypt password process successful.
Unable to encrypt password.
Unable to encrypt password.
The password has been successfully encrypted.
In order for AppLock to control the application being
locked so it can prevent the application from exiting,
AppLock launches the application and has to wait until
it has created and initialized its main window. This
message is logged when the function that waits for the
application initialization is entered.
Entering the password decryption process.
Entering the password encryption processing.
Entering the function that switches the screen mode. In
full screen mode, the taskbar is hidden and disabled.
Processing is at the beginning of the function that
retrieves the application information from the registry.
Entering the password dialog processing.
Entering the password timeout processing.
Some application shut down before AppLock can stop
it. In these cases, AppLock gets notification of the exit.
When the notification is received, AppLock starts a
timer to restart the application. This message logs that
the timer has expired and the processing is at the
beginning of the timer function.
Entering the function that switches the screen to non-full
screen mode and enable the taskbar.
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
MX5X Reference Guide
300
Message
Enter ToAdmin
Enter ToUser
Enter verify password
Exit AppLockEnumWindowsFound
Exit AppLockEnumWindows-Not
found
Exit DecryptPwd
Exit EncryptPwd
Exit FullScreenMode
Exit GetAppInfo
Exit password dialog
Exit password dialog-cancel
Exit password dialog-OK
Exit password timeout
Exit restart app timer
Exit TaskbarScreenMode
Exit ToAdmin
Exit ToUser
Exit ToUser-Registry read failure
Exit verify password-no pwd set
Exit verify password-response from
dialog
Found taskbar
Getting address of keyboard hook
init procedure
Getting configuration from registry
Getting encrypt pwd length
Hook wndproc failure
Hook wndproc of open app failure
Hot key event creation failure
Hot key pressed
Hot key pressed
Hot key set event failure
Hotkey press message received
In app hook:WM_SIZE
MX5X Reference Guide
AppLock Error Messages
Explanation and/or corrective action
Entering the function that handles a mode switch into
admin mode.
Entering the function that handles the mode switch to
user mode
Entering the password verification processing.
There are two exit paths from the enumeration function.
This message denotes the enumeration function found
the application.
There are two exit paths from the enumeration function.
This message denotes the enumeration function did not
find the application.
Exiting password decryption processing.
Exiting password encryption processing.
Exiting the function that switches the screen to full
screen.
Processing is at the end of the function that retrieved the
application information from the registry.
Exiting password prompt processing.
Exiting password prompt w/cancel.
Exiting password prompt successfully.
Exiting password timeout processing.
Processing is at the end of the timer function
Exiting the function that switches the screen mode back
to normal operation for the administrator.
Exiting the function that handles the mode switch into
admin mode.
Exiting the user mode switch function.
The AppName value does not exist in the registry so
user mode cannot be entered.
Exiting password verification.
Exiting password verification.
Level
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
The handle to the taskbar has been found so that
AppLock can disable it in user mode.
AppLock is retrieving the address of the keyboard hook.
LOG_PROCESSING
The AppLock configuration is being read from the
registry. This occurs at initialization and also at entry
into user mode. The registry must be re-read at entry
into user mode in case the administration changed the
settings of the application being controlled.
The length of the encrypted password is being
calculated.
AppLock is unable to lock the application. This could
happen if the application being locked encountered an
error after performing its initialization and shut itself
down prior to being locked by AppLock.
The application is open, but AppLock cannot lock it.
The Admin applet is unable to create the hotkey
notification.
Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry
Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry
When the administrator changes the hotkey
configuration the hotkey controller must be notified.
This notification failed.
The user just pressed the configured hotkey.
In addition to preventing the locked application from
exiting, AppLock must also prevent the application from
enabling the taskbar and resizing the application’s
window. This message traps a change in the window
size and corrects it.
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_EX
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
AppLock Error Messages
Message
In app
hook:WM_WINDOWPOSCHANG
ED
Initializing keyboard hook
procedure
Keyboard hook initialization failure
Keyboard hook loaded OK
L after Ctrl
Loading keyboard hook
Open failure
Open registry failure
Opened status file
Out of memory for encrypted pwd
pRealTaskbarWndProc already set
Pwd cancelled or invalid-remain in
user mode
Read registry error-hot key
Read registry failure-app name
Read registry failure-Cmd Line
Read registry failure-Internet
Registering Backdoor MSG
Registering Hotkey MSG
Registry read failure at reenter user
mode
Registry read failure at reenter user
mode
Registry read failure
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
301
Explanation and/or corrective action
In addition to preventing the locked application from
exiting, AppLock must also prevent the application from
enabling the taskbar and resizing the application’s
window. This message traps a change in the window
position and corrects it.
AppLock is calling the keyboard hook initialization.
The keyboard filter initialization failed.
The keyboard hook dll exists and loaded successfully.
Processing the backdoor entry.
When AppLock first loads, it loads a dll that contains
the keyboard hook processing. This message is logged
prior to the load attempt.
The status information is being saved to a file and the
file open has failed. This could occur if the file is write
protected. If the file does not exist, it is created.
If the Administration registry key does not exist, the
switch to user mode fails because the AppName value in
the Administration key is not available.
The status information is being saved to a file and the
file has been opened successfully.
Not enough memory to encrypt the password.
The taskbar control has already been installed.
The password prompt was cancelled by the user or the
maximum number of failed attempts to enter a password
was exceeded.
The hotkey registry entry is missing or empty. This is
not considered an error. The keyboard hook uses an
embedded default if the value is not set in the registry.
AppName registry value does not exist or is empty.
This constitutes a failure for switching into user mode.
AppCommandLine registry entry is missing or empty.
This is not considered an error since command line
information is not necessary to launch and lock the
application.
The Internet registry entry is missing or empty. This is
not considered an error since the Internet value is not
necessary to launch and lock the application.
The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard
hook via a user defined message. Both AppLock.exe
and Kbdhook.dll register the message at initialization.
The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard
hook via a user defined message. Both AppLock.exe
and Kbdhook.dll register the message at initialization.
The registry has to be read when entering user mode is
the AppName is missing. This user mode entry is
attempted at boot and after a hotkey switch when the
administrator has closed the application being locked or
has changed the application name or command line.
The registry has to be read when switching into user
mode. This is because the administrator can change the
settings during administration mode. The read of the
registry failed which means the Administration key was
not found or the AppName value was missing or empty.
The registry read failed. The registry information read
when this message is logged is the application
information. It the Administration key cannot be opened
or if the AppName value is missing or empty, this error
is logged. The other application information is not
required. If the AppName value is not available,
AppLock cannot switch into user mode.
Level
LOG_EX
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
MX5X Reference Guide
302
Message
Reset system work area failure
Shift pressed
Shift
Show taskbar
Switching to admin-backdoor
Switching to admin-hotkey press
Switching to admin-kbdhook.dll not
found
Switching to admin-keyboard hook
initialization failure
Switching to admin-registry read
failure
Switching to TaskbarScreenMode
Switching to user mode
Switching to user-hotkey press
Taskbar hook failure
Taskbar hook OK
Timeout looking for app window
ToUser after admin, not at boot
ToUser after admin-app still open
ToUser after admin-no app or cmd
line change
Unable to move desktop
Unable to move taskbar
MX5X Reference Guide
AppLock Error Messages
Explanation and/or corrective action
The system work area is adjusted when in user mode to
cover the taskbar area. The system work area has to be
adjusted to exclude the taskbar area in administration
mode. AppLock was unable to adjust this area.
The Shift key has been pressed and trapped by the
HotKey processing.
Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry
The taskbar is now being made visible and enabled.
The system is currently in user mode and is now
switching to admin mode. The switch occurred because
of the backdoor key presses were entered by the
administrator.
The system is currently in user mode and is now
switching to admin mode. The switch occurred because
of a hotkey press by the administrator.
The keyboard hook load failed, so AppLock switches to
admin mode. If a password is specified, the password
prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password
is entered.
If the keyboard hook initialization fails, AppLock
switches to admin mode. . If a password is specified,
the password prompt is displayed and remains until a
valid password is entered.
See the explanation of the “Registry read failure” above.
AppLock is switching into Admin mode. If a password
has been configured, the prompt will be displayed and
will not be dismissed until a valid password is entered.
In administration mode, the taskbar is visible and
enabled.
The registry was successfully read and AppLock is
starting the process to switch to user mode.
The system is currently in admin mode and is now
switching to user mode. The switch occurred because of
a hotkey press by the administrator.
AppLock is unable to control the taskbar to prevent the
locked application from re-enabling it.
AppLock successfully installed control of the taskbar.
After the application is launched, AppLock must wait
until the application has initialized itself before
proceeding. The application did not start successfully
and AppLock has timed out.
The user mode switch is attempted when the device
boots and after the administrator presses the hotkey.
The mode switch is being attempted after a hotkey press.
The switch to user mode is being made via a hotkey
press and the administrator has left the application open
and has not made any changes in the configuration.
If user mode is being entered via a hotkey press, the
administrator may have left the configured application
open. If so, AppLock does not launch the application
again unless a new application or command line has
been specified; otherwise, it just locks it.
The desktop is moved when switching into user mode.
This prevents them from being visible if the application
is exited and restarted by the timer. This error does not
affect the screen mode switch; processing continues.
The taskbar is moved when switching into user mode.
This prevents them from being visible if the application
is exited and restarted by the timer. This error does not
affect the screen mode switch; processing continues.
Level
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_EX
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_PROCESSING
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
AppLock Registry Settings
Message
Unhook taskbar wndproc failure
Unhook wndproc failure
Unhooking taskbar
Unhooking wndproc
WM_SIZE adjusted
X after Ctrl+L
Ret from password <#>
Decrypt data len <#>
Window handle to
enumwindows=%x
WM_WINDOWPOSCHG
adjusted=%x
303
Explanation and/or corrective action
AppLock could not remove its control of the taskbar.
This error does not affect AppLock processing
AppLock could not remove the hook that allows
monitoring of the application.
In administration mode, the taskbar should return to
normal operation, so AppLock’s control of the taskbar
should be removed.
When the administrator leaves user mode, the device is
fully operational; therefore, AppLock must stop
monitoring the locked application.
This message denotes that AppLock has readjusted the
window size.
Processing the backdoor entry.
Return value from password dialog.
Length of decrypted password.
The window handle that is passed to the enumeration
function. This message can be used by engineering with
other development tools to trouble shoot application
lock failures.
Output the window size after it has been adjusted by
AppLock
Level
LOG_ERROR
LOG_ERROR
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
LOG_EX
AppLock Registry Settings
This system application runs at startup via the Launch feature of LXE Windows CE devices.
When the launch feature is installed on the device, the following registry settings are created. The
launch feature registry settings are embedded in the mobile device OS image:
• HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\Filename=AppLock.exe
• HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\Installed=
• HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\FileCheck=
AppLock registry settings identify the application that is going to be locked and any parameters
that are needed by the application. These registry settings are as follows:
• HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Administration\\AppName
• HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppCommandLine=
In addition to the registry settings needed to specify the application, additional registry settings are
needed to store the configuration options for AppLock. These options include, among others, the
administrator’s password and hotkey.
• HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppLock\\Administration\\HotKey=
• HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppLock\\Administration\\EP=
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
304
Valid VK Codes for CE
Valid VK Codes for CE
This is the list of codes parsed by KEYCOMP compiler. Refer to Microsoft Windows documentation for further
clarification of the meaning of these key codes. Any VK keys not defined here are not valid for use under
Windows CE.
VK_ADD
VK_APOSTROPHE
VK_APPS
VK_ATTN
VK_BACK
VK_BACKQUOTE
VK_BACKSLASH
VK_BROWSER_BACK
VK_BROWSER_FAVORITES
VK_BROWSER_FORWARD
VK_BROWSER_HOME
VK_BROWSER_REFRESH
VK_BROWSER_SEARCH
VK_BROWSER_STOP
VK_CANCEL
VK_CAPITAL
VK_CLEAR
VK_COMMA
VK_CONTROL
VK_CONVERT
VK_CRSEL
VK_DECIMAL
VK_DELETE
VK_DIVIDE
VK_DOWN
VK_END
VK_EQUAL
VK_EREOF
VK_ESCAPE
VK_EXECUTE
VK_EXSEL
VK_F1
VK_F10
VK_F11
VK_F12
VK_F13
VK_F14
VK_F15
VK_F16
VK_F17
VK_F18
VK_F19
VK_F2
VK_F20
VK_F21
VK_F22
VK_F23
VK_F24
MX5X Reference Guide
VK_F3
VK_F4
VK_F5
VK_F6
VK_F7
VK_F8
VK_F9
VK_FINAL
VK_HANGUL
VK_HANJA
VK_HELP
VK_HOME
VK_HYPHEN
VK_INSERT
VK_JUNJA
VK_KANA
VK_KANJI
VK_LAUNCH_APP1
VK_LAUNCH_APP2
VK_LAUNCH_MAIL
VK_LAUNCH_MEDIA_SELECT
VK_LBRACKET
VK_LBUTTON
VK_LCONTROL
VK_LEFT
VK_LMENU
VK_LSHIFT
VK_LWIN
VK_MBUTTON
VK_MEDIA_NEXT_TRACK
VK_MEDIA_PLAY_PAUSE
VK_MEDIA_PREV_TRACK
VK_MEDIA_STOP
VK_MENU
VK_MULTIPLY
VK_NEXT
VK_NOCONVERT
VK_NONAME
VK_NUMLOCK
VK_NUMPAD0
VK_NUMPAD1
VK_NUMPAD2
VK_NUMPAD3
VK_NUMPAD4
VK_NUMPAD5
VK_NUMPAD6
VK_NUMPAD7
VK_NUMPAD8
VK_NUMPAD9
VK_OEM_CLEAR
VK_OFF
VK_PA1
VK_PAUSE
VK_PERIOD
VK_PLAY
VK_PRINT
VK_PRIOR
VK_RBRACKET
VK_RBUTTON
VK_RCONTROL
VK_RETURN
VK_RIGHT
VK_RMENU
VK_RSHIFT
VK_RWIN
VK_SCROLL
VK_SELECT
VK_SEMICOLON
VK_SEPARATOR
VK_SHIFT
VK_SLASH
VK_SLEEP
VK_SNAPSHOT
VK_SPACE
VK_SUBTRACT
VK_TAB
VK_UP
VK_VOLUME_DOWN
VK_VOLUME_MUTE
VK_VOLUME_UP
VK_ZOOM
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
ASCII Control Codes
305
ASCII Control Codes
The following table lists ASCII Control codes in hexadecimal and their corresponding Control-key combinations.
Char
Hex
ControlKey
Control Action
NUL
0
^@
NULl character
Ctrl-Shift-`
SOH
1
^A
Start Of Heading
VK_CONTROL (0x11) down
VK_A (0x41) down
WM_CHAR (0x1)
VK_A (0x41) up
VK_CONTROL (0x11) up
STX
2
^B
Start of TeXt
Ctrl-b
ETX
3
^C
End of TeXt
Ctrl-c
EOT
4
^D
End Of Transmission
Ctrl-d
ENQ
5
^E
ENQuiry
Ctrl-e
ACK
6
^F
ACKnowledge
Ctrl-f
BEL
7
^G
BELl, rings terminal bell
Ctrl-g
BS
8
^H
BackSpace (non-destructive)
Ctrl-h
HT
9
^I
Horizontal Tab (move to next tab position)
Ctrl-i
LF
a
^J
Line Feed
Ctrl-j
VT
b
^K
Vertical Tab
Ctrl-k
FF
c
^L
Form Feed
Ctrl-l
CR
d
^M
Carriage Return
Ctrl-m
SO
e
^N
Shift Out
Ctrl-n
SI
f
^O
Shift In
Ctrl-o
DLE
10
^P
Data Link Escape
Ctrl-p
DC1
11
^Q
Device Control 1, normally XON
Ctrl-q
DC2
12
^R
Device Control 2
Ctrl-r
DC3
13
^S
Device Control 3, normally XOFF
Ctrl-s
DC4
14
^T
Device Control 4
Ctrl-t
NAK
15
^U
Negative AcKnowledge
Ctrl-u
SYN
16
^V
SYNchronous idle
Ctrl-v
ETB
17
^W
End Transmission Block
Ctrl-w
CAN
17
^X
CANcel line
Ctrl-x
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
306
ASCII Control Codes
Char
Hex
ControlKey
Control Action
EM
19
^Y
End of Medium
Ctrl-y
SUB
1a
^Z
SUBstitute
Ctrl-z
ESCape
VK_CONTROL (0x11)down
VK_PACKET (0xe7) down
WM_CHAR 0x1b
VK_PACKET up
VK_CONTROL up
File Separator
VK_CONTROL (0x11)down
VK_PACKET (0xe7) down
WM_CHAR 0x1c
VK_PACKET up
VK_CONTROL up
Group Separator
VK_CONTROL (0x11)down
VK_PACKET (0xe7) down
WM_CHAR 0x1d down
WM_CHAR (0x1d) up
VK_PACKET up
VK_CONTROL up
Record Separator
VK_CONTROL (0x11)down
VK_SHIFT (0x10) down
WM_CHAR 0x36 down
WM_CHAR 0x36 up
VK_SHIFT up
VK_CONTROL up
Unit Separator
VK_CONTROL (0x11) down
VK_SHIFT (0x10) down
VK_PACKET (0xe7) down
WM_CHAR 0x1f
VK_PACKET (0xe7) up
VK_SHIFT (0x10) up
VK_CONTROL (0x11) up
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
1b
1c
1d
1e
1f
^[
^\
^]
^^
^_
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Hat Encoding
307
Hat Encoding
Desired
ASCII
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1 (XON)
DC2
DC3 (XOFF)
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
IND
NEL
SSA
Hex
Value
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
0x0E
0x0F
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1A
0x1B
0x1C
0x1D
0x1E
0x1F
0x7F
0x80
0x81
0x82
0x83
0x84
0x85
0x86
Hat
Encoded
^@
^A
^B
^C
^D
^E
^F
^G
^H
^I
^J
^K
^L
^M
^N
^O
^P
^Q
^R
^S
^T
^U
^V
^W
^X
^Y
^Z
^[
^\\
^]
^^
^_ (Underscore)
^?
~^@
~^A
~^B
~^C
~^D
~^E
~^F
Desired
ASCII
ESA
HTS
HTJ
VTS
PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3
DCS
PU1
PU2
STS
CCH
MW
SPA
EPA
CSI
ST
OSC
PM
APC
(no-break space)
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
Hex
Value
0x87
0x88
0x89
0x8A
0x8B
0x8C
0x8D
0x8E
0x8F
0x90
0x91
0x92
0x93
0x94
0x95
0x96
0x97
0x98
0x99
0x9A
0x9B
0x9C
0x9D
0x9E
0x9F
0xA0
0xA1
0xA2
0xA3
0xA4
0xA5
0xA6
Hat
Encoded
~^G
~^H
~^I
~^J
~^K
~^L
~^M
~^N
~^O
~^P
~^Q
~^R
~^S
~^T
~^U
~^V
~^W
~^X
~^Y
~^Z
~^[
~^\\
~^]
~^^
~^_ (Underscore)
~ (Tilde and Space)
~!
~”
~#
~$
~%
~&
§
¨
©
ª
«
¬
(soft hyphen)
0xA7
0xA8
0xA9
0xAA
0xAB
0xAC
0xAD
~’
~(
~)
~*
~+
~,
~- (Dash)
Hat Encoded Characters Hex 00 through AD
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
308
Desired
ASCII
®
¯
°
±
²
³
´
µ
¶
·
¸
¹
º
»
¼
½
¾
¿
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Í
Î
Ï
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
Hat Encoding
Hex
Value
0xAE
0xAF
0xB0
0xB1
0xB2
0xB3
0xB4
0xB5
0xB6
0xB7
0xB8
0xB9
0xBA
0xBB
0xBC
0xBD
0xBE
0xBF
0xC0
0xC1
0xC2
0xC3
0xC4
0xC5
0xC6
0xC7
0xC8
0xC9
0xCA
0xCB
0xCC
0xCD
0xCE
0xCF
0xD0
0xD1
0xD2
0xD3
0xD4
0xD5
0xD6
Hat
Encoded
~. (Period)
~/
~0 (Zero)
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
~6
~7
~8
~9
~:
~;
~<
~=
~>
~?
[email protected]
~A
~B
~C
~D
~E
~F
~G
~H
~I
~J
~K
~L
~M
~N
~O
~P
~Q
~R
~S
~T
~U
~V
Desired
ASCII
×
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
Hex
Value
0xD7
0xD8
0xD9
0xDA
0xDB
0xDC
0xDD
0xDE
0xDF
0xE0
0xE1
0xE2
0xE3
0xE4
0xE5
0xE6
0xE7
0xE8
0xE9
0xEA
0xEB
0xEC
0xED
0xEE
0xEF
0xF0
0xF1
0xF2
0xF3
0xF4
0xF5
0xF6
0xF7
0xF8
0xF9
0xFA
0xFB
0xFC
0xFD
0xFE
0xFF
Hat
Encoded
~W
~X
~Y
~Z
~[
~\\
~]
~\^
~_ (Underscore)
~`
~a
~b
~c
~d
~e
~f
~g
~h
~i
~j
~k
~l
~m
~n
~o
~p
~q
~r
~s
~t
~u
~v
~w
~x
~y
~z
~{
~|
~}
~~
~^?
Hat Encoded Characters Hex AE through FF
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Decimal – Hexadecimal Chart
309
Decimal – Hexadecimal Chart
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
0x0E
0x0F
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1A
0x1B
0x1C
0x1D
0x1E
0x1F
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
40
41
42 6
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
0x28
0x29
0x2A
0x2B
0x2C
0x2D
0x2E
0x2F
0x30
0x31
0x32
0x33
0x34
0x35
0x36
0x37
0x38
0x39
0x3A
0x3B
0x3C
0x3D
0x3E
0x3F
0x40
0x41
0x42
0x43
0x44
0x45
0x46
0x47
0x48
0x49
0x4A
0x4B
0x4C
0x4D
0x4E
0x4F
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
0x50
0x51
0x52
0x53
0x54
0x55
0x56
0x57
0x58
0x59
0x5A
0x5B
0x5C
0x5D
0x5E
0x5F
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x65
0x66
0x67
0x68
0x69
0x6A
0x6B
0x6C
0x6D
0x6E
0x6F
0x70
0x71
0x72
0x73
0x74
0x75
0x76
0x77
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
0x78
0x79
0x7A
0x7B
0x7C
0x7D
0x7E
0x7F
0x80
0x81
0x82
0x83
0x84
0x85
0x86
0x87
0x88
0x89
0x8A
0x8B
0x8C
0x8D
0x8E
0x8F
0x90
0x91
0x92
0x93
0x94
0x95
0x96
0x97
0x98
0x99
0x9A
0x9B
0x9C
0x9D
0x9E
0x9F
Decimal – Hexadecimal Chart (0 to 159 Decimal)
6
The answer to Life, the Universe and Everything.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
310
Decimal – Hexadecimal Chart
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
0xA0
0xA1
0xA2
0xA3
0xA4
0xA5
0xA6
0xA7
0xA8
0xA9
0xAA
0xAB
0xAC
0xAD
0xAE
0xAF
0xB0
0xB1
0xB2
0xB3
0xB4
0xB5
0xB6
0xB7
0xB8
0xB9
0xBA
0xBB
0xBC
0xBD
0xBE
0xBF
0xC0
0xC1
0xC2
0xC3
0xC4
0xC5
0xC6
0xC7
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
0xC8
0xC9
0xCA
0xCB
0xCC
0xCD
0xCE
0xCF
0xD0
0xD1
0xD2
0xD3
0xD4
0xD5
0xD6
0xD7
0xD8
0xD9
0xDA
0xDB
0xDC
0xDD
0xDE
0xDF
0xE0
0xE1
0xE2
0xE3
0xE4
0xE5
0xE6
0xE7
0xE8
0xE9
0xEA
0xEB
0xEC
0xED
0xEE
0xEF
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
0xF0
0xF1
0xF2
0xF3
0xF4
0xF5
0xF6
0xF7
0xF8
0xF9
0xFA
0xFB
0xFC
0xFD
0xFE
0xFF
Decimal – Hexadecimal Chart (160 to 255 Decimal)
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Revision History
311
Revision History
Revision D, July 2007
• Notices-Added PowerScan registered trademark information.
• Chapter 1 – Introduction-Added “MX5X Features.” Added “Upgrading an MX5X to CE 5.0.”
Updated AppLock application switching instruction to include AppLock Launch function.
Updated Accessories.
• Chapter 3 – System Configuration-Added Windows CE 5.0 information or instruction where
applicable.
• Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration-Added EAP-FAST and EAP-TLS instruction.
Updated Summit Client Utility to reflect version differences.
• Chapter 6 - AppLock-Added AppLock Launch function. Moved AppLock Single Application
Version section to Appendix C – Reference Material
• Appendix C – Reference Material-New.
• Entire Manual-Changed Reference Guide title to MX5X Reference Guide. Changed name of
device to MX5X where applicable. DocID did not change.
Revision C, Dec 2006
• Notices-Updated trademark statements.
• Chapter 1 – Introduction-Added “Troubleshooting” to “Getting Started”. Added Right Arrow
+ Blue key as the Start button key sequence to troubleshooting. Added Multi AppLock
activation key instruction “Entering the Multi AppLock Activation Key”. Added “Manuals”
section. Noted obsolescence of MX5 PPC device. Updated Accessories. Added ROHS
information. dded separate accessory sections for MX5 CE .NET standard and MX5 CE .NET
I-SAFE mobile device.
• Chapter 3 – System Configuration-Added sections titled “JAVA (Option)”, “RFTerm
(Option)”, “AppLock (Option)” and “Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Option)”.
• Added Summit client to “Start Menu Program Options”. Added “Determine Your Scanner
Software Version” chart at beginning of “Control Panel | Scanner” section. Noted the newest
scanner applet is now in Chapter 4 “Scanner”. Added “Wavelink Avalanche Enabler
Configuration”.
• Chapter 4 – AppLock-Renumbered to Chapter 6.
• Chapter 4 – Scanner-New.
• Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration-Added Summit client. Separated chapter into
four sections: Summit Client, Cisco Client, Symbol Client, and Certificates. Added “Sign-on
Screen for LEAP, PEAP/MS-CHAP, PEAP/GTC”. Added configuration instruction for
PEAP/GTC on Summit devices. Updated parameters and options based on Summit version
1.2.10 differences.
• Chapter 6 – AppLock-Renumbered from Chapter 4 (now Scanner). Added Multi AppLock
application instruction.
• Appendix A – Keymaps-Added Right Arrow + Blue key as the Start button key sequence.
• Appendix B – Technical Specifications-Added note about 64M flash not available after 2005.
• Added “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” for Chapter 4 “Scanner” user.
Added “Revision History” section. Added technical specifications for Summit client device.
• Entire Manual-Changed “radio” to “wireless” or “client” in context, where applicable.
Changed chapter cross-references to match Chapter number changes. Updated equipment
figures to show new LXE logo on equipment.
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
MX5X Reference Guide
312
Revision History
Revision B, Nov 2005
• Entire Manual-Added note (for backward compatibility) to all references to “Bluetooth”: Note
Bluetooth access, modules and Bluetooth Manager are not supported by LXE.
• Chapter 1 – Introduction-Added explanatory note to “Tapping the Touchscreen with a Stylus”
right mouse click function. Removed headset with microphone from “Accessories”. Added
Neoprene trigger handle cover to “Accessories”.
• Chapter 3 – System Configuration-Added “2.4GHz Radio Configuration” section and
“Configuring IPv6”. Updated “Audio” section to reflect differences between initial bootloader
release and upgraded bootloader release. Added “How to Disable Touch and / or Calibration
upon Cold Reset”. Added “How to Enable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold Reset” to
“Handheld” section. Updated Scanner panels with barcode wedge additions. Added updated
Bootloader Version panel information to “Handheld” section. Added “Transcriber”. Removed
“Cisco – Aironet Configuration Utility (ACU)” and “Symbol” sections. This information is
now included in Chapter 5 “Wireless Network Configuration”. Updated miscellaneous Figures.
• Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration-Added new chapter containing ACU and Symbol
sections removed from Chapter 3. Added WPA information and instruction.
• Appendix A – Key Maps-Added clearer pictures and 3270/5250 keymapping sequences.
Revision A, Initial Release, Dec 2004
MX5X Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Index
2nd key function .......................................................48
3270 key functions.................................................220
5250 key functions.................................................221
A
About
software, hardware, version, network IP.............79
AC External Power Supply, How to........................16
AC Power
and LEDs on cradles ...........................................58
Accessibility settings ...............................................73
Accessing Files on CF Card ....................................50
Accessories
Electrostatic Discharge .........................................8
Installing ...............................................................8
ActiveSync ............................................................107
Backup Data Files .............................................107
Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection......109
Connect .....................................................106, 107
Create Comm Option ..........................................85
Explore..............................................................108
Troubleshooting ................................................109
ActiveSync Help..............................................67, 104
ActiveSync Options...............................................109
ActiveSync Setup Wizard..............................104, 105
ActiveSync version 3.7..........................................104
Add Prefix ...............................................................95
Add Suffix ...............................................................95
adjust speaker volume .............................................23
Admin Hotkey
AppLock ...........................................................205
Administration
AppLock .............................................................73
Administrator
Summit client utility..........................................159
Advanced tab
Scanner properties...............................................95
Align touch screen ...................................................20
Allow Close ...........................................................209
Allow Connection....................................................87
Alt key function .......................................................48
API calls ................................................................103
API.CAB ...............................................................102
Application Panel ..................................................205
AppLock ..................................................................24
EUIE .................................................................209
Passwords..........................................................203
Setup .................................................................199
Single Application.............................................292
AppLock Administrator...........................................62
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
ASCII Control Codes.............................................307
At Power On
Password protect .................................................87
ATA CF Card file access.........................................39
Audio .................................................................23, 51
Audio Interface location ..........................................35
Audio jack location..................................................22
Audio/Microphone Connector ...............................224
Authenticate using the EAP-TLS protocol ............283
Auto hide .................................................................70
Avalanche Enabler...................................................63
installation.........................................................113
Avalanche Enabler Configuration .........................113
B
Background and Window colors .............................78
Backlight Timer.......................................................21
Backlight timers.......................................................78
Backup and restore ................................................111
Backup Battery
Time Limit ..........................................................54
Backup battery information .....................................89
Backup Data Files..................................................107
Barcode
Enable or Disable ..............................................140
Barcode data match list..........................................145
Barcode processing overview ................................134
Barcode Scanner
Integrated ............................................................41
Tethered ..............................................................41
Barcode scanner decode symbologies .....................41
Barcode Tab...........................................................140
Batteries.................................................................224
Battery
Backup ................................................................55
Charger................................................................56
Charging..............................................................34
Handling Safely ..................................................54
Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) ...........................................34
Low Warning timing...........................................53
Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH)............................34
Battery Auto Turn Off .............................................78
Battery Chargers ......................................................56
Battery Charging LED location ...............................16
Battery Life
Approximate .......................................................54
Battery status LED explanation ...............................55
Battery tab ...............................................................89
Battery voltage.........................................................37
Battery, Main...........................................................53
MX5X Reference Guide
314
Baud Rate ..............................................................133
Bluetooth Manager ................................................229
Bootloader versions .................................................80
C
CAB files ...............................................................102
Cable connections
COM1 and COM4...............................................42
Calibrate touchscreen ..............................................20
Calibration ...............................................................99
Calibration disabled.................................................79
Caps mode function .................................................49
Cautions and Warnings
Hazardous Location ..............................................7
CE .NET 4.2 or CE 5.0..............................................1
Certificates...............................................................75
Root CA ............................................................187
User...................................................................191
Certificates are date sensitive ........................155, 270
Change the MX5X Time and Date ..........................36
Change virtual keys ...............................................138
Character Recognition
Touch screen .......................................................69
Charger
Battery.................................................................56
Charger, battery .......................................................56
Charging Battery
Time Required ....................................................34
Check the battery status and power reading ............15
Cisco
PEAP Supplicant...............................................271
Cisco Client ...........................................................269
Cisco Network Card Specifications.......................225
CISCO.CAB ..........................................................271
Clean display and aperture.......................................51
Clear Contents of Document Folder ........................70
Cold Reset ...............................................................36
Color display timer expires......................................21
Color displays..........................................................50
Color screen
Backlight.............................................................78
COM port settings tab......................................97, 139
COM Ports.......................................................91, 133
Configurations.....................................................35
COM Ports described...............................................40
Command Prompt....................................................68
Commit button
Config ...............................................................160
Communication
ActiveSync..........................................................67
Get Connected.....................................................67
Remote Desktop Connection...............................68
compact flash card location .....................................37
Compact Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs ...102
Compact flash memory............................................34
Components.............................................................11
MX5X Reference Guide
Index
Config buttons .......................................................161
Config parameters
Summit..............................................................162
Connect External PS................................................16
Connect Using .........................................................87
Contacting LXE.......................................................29
Control characters..................................................148
Control Panel options ..............................................71
Controls, Physical....................................................36
Copied at startup......................................................65
Copyrights .............................................................101
Core Logic ...............................................................33
CPU Xscale .............................................................33
Cradles.....................................................................58
Create a dialup, direct, or VPN connection .............85
Ctrl Char mapping .................................................140
Ctrl Char Mapping.................................................148
Ctrl key function......................................................48
Current Time ...........................................................76
Custom ID parameters ...........................................150
Custom identifiers..................................................140
Custom IDs............................................................150
Custom Parameter Option......................................166
Customize dates, times, currency ............................90
D
Data entry ................................................................26
Data Loss
Backup Battery......................................................2
Cold Reset.............................................................8
Daylight Savings .....................................................76
Decimal – Hexadecimal Equivalent
0 – 159 ..............................................................311
160 – 255 ..........................................................312
default value for the battery power timer.................21
default value for the external power timer...............21
Delay .......................................................................84
Desktop................................................................8, 64
Desktop cradle .........................................................58
Determine scanner software version......................133
Determine Your Scanner Software Version ............91
Device Name and description................................101
Diagnostics ............................................................165
Diags tab
Summit..............................................................165
Dialup properties for dial up access.........................77
Dimensions ............................................................224
Disable ActiveSync with Enabler ..........................119
Disable Enabler launch ..........................................122
Display
Features...............................................................50
Pixels...................................................................50
Specifications....................................................224
display and the keypad backlights ...........................22
Display Backlight Timer .........................................50
Display owner notes ................................................21
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Index
315
2nd Key ................................................................48
Alt Key................................................................48
Caps Mode ..........................................................49
Ctrl Key...............................................................48
Enter Key ............................................................47
Field Exit Key .....................................................48
Scan Key .............................................................47
Shft Key ..............................................................48
Spc Key...............................................................48
Display setting with Enabler..................................123
Display Timer ..........................................................50
Document Conventions .............................................3
E
EAP-FAST Authentication, Summit .....................177
EAP-TLS Authentication Configuration ...............283
electrostatic discharge................................................8
Electrostatic Discharge ............................................37
Enable Code ID .....................................................141
notes ..................................................................141
Enable or Disable specific symbology...................140
Enabler
communication..................................................116
installation.........................................................113
Enabler Configuration ...................................113, 116
Enabler Uninstall Process ......................................113
End user switching
Touch ..........................................................24, 204
Enter key function ...................................................47
Entering Data...........................................................26
Environmental Specifications................................224
Hazardous Location ..............................................7
Error Messages
AppLock ...........................................................300
Ethernet port ......................................................40, 58
EUIE......................................................................209
Example
Barcode processing ...........................................153
Control Code replacement ................................152
Expand Control Panel..............................................70
eXpress Config
and Wavelink Avalanche ..................................131
eXpress Config utility............................................129
eXpress Scan .........................................................129
External Auto Turn Off ...........................................78
External PS ..............................................................16
F
Factory Default Settings
Cisco Client.......................................................269
Symbol Client ...................................................289
Failure
Battery Pack ........................................................55
Features .....................................................................5
Field Exit key function ............................................48
Files preserved upon reboot.....................................65
Flash Cards
Install and remove...............................................38
Flash Specifications.................................................34
Folders
copied at startup ..................................................65
My Device...........................................................65
Function
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
G
General ..................................................................100
Getting Started...........................................................8
Getting the Most from Your Batteries .....................55
Global parameters..................................................167
Glossary...................................................................29
graphics modes ........................................................34
H
Handle, Installation..................................................17
Handling Batteries ...................................................54
Handstrap, Install.....................................................18
Hardware
Configuration ......................................................33
Hardware version...................................................270
Hat Encoded Characters ........................................309
Hatch
CF Card file access .............................................39
PC Card file access .............................................39
Hazardous Location, Please Read..............................7
Headset ....................................................................51
Help .................................................................29, 156
Hexadecimal – Decimal Equivalent
0x00 to 0x9F .....................................................311
0xA0 to 0xFF ....................................................312
Host Connection prerequisites.................................10
Hot Swapping Main Battery ....................................54
Hotkey
AppLock ...........................................................210
HyperTerminal, ActiveSync ..................................110
I
Icons
Explorer, Internet ................................................64
My Computer - My Device .................................64
My Documents....................................................64
Recycle Bin.........................................................64
Start.....................................................................64
Transcriber ..........................................................64
Wireless Client Setup..........................................64
Idle Time .................................................................78
IEC IP65 ................................................................224
IEC IP67 ....................................................................7
MX5X Reference Guide
316
Important Battery Information...................................2
Inbox
Outlook .......................................................68, 234
Increase or Decrease Keypad and Display Backlight
Intensity ...............................................................22
Indicators
LEDs ...................................................................46
Infrared (IR) port, described ....................................43
Input Panel...............................................................82
Install ActiveSync on Desktop or Laptop..............105
Install LXEbooks.....................................................25
Integrated scanner barcode reading parameters.......36
Integrated Scanner Programming Guide..................41
Internet Explorer
AppLock ...........................................................209
Network card and ISP required ...........................68
Internet Options
CE 5 ....................................................................83
IO Components........................................................33
IPv6 Broadcast Messages ......................................288
IR operating envelope..............................................43
IR Port
bi-directional half-duplex....................................43
IRDA (Infrared Data Access) ..................................43
iRescue program ....................................................111
J
JEM-CE ...................................................................63
JmpStart...................................................................37
K
Keyboard
Onscreen only .....................................................82
Keyboard 0409 ........................................................84
Keymaps ................................................................215
Keypad.....................................................................47
Keypad and entering data ........................................26
Keypad Shortcuts.....................................................20
Keys tab ...........................................................94, 137
L
LEAP without WPA Authentication, Summit .......176
Li-Ion battery life.....................................................15
Link speed .............................................................128
List configured ActiveSync connections .................87
Lithium Ion battery warning......................................2
Lithium-Ion (Li-ion) ................................................53
Logging
AppLock ...........................................................212
Loss of Host Re-connection...................................109
Low Battery Warning ..............................................55
LXE Manuals CD ....................................................29
LXE Security Primer .....................................155, 187
MX5X Reference Guide
Index
LXE_MX5X..............................................................63
LXE_MX5X_ENABLER.CAB.............................113
LXEbook – MX5X Users Guide .............................25
M
Main.................................................................91, 133
Main Battery
and Critical Suspend state ...................................54
Hot Swapping......................................................54
Main Battery Pack ...................................................54
Main tab
Summit..............................................................158
Manage wireless settings with Enabler..................125
Match List..............................................................146
Match List Rules....................................................146
Media Player............................................................69
Memory .................................................................100
allocate for programs or storage........................100
Memory installed...................................................100
Menu Options
Start.....................................................................66
Microsoft Wireless Network configuration utility.272
Mode
Off.......................................................................46
On........................................................................45
Suspend...............................................................46
Mode Key Functions ...............................................49
Modes
AppLock ...........................................................202
MX5X family of computers.................................4, 29
My Computer
Folders ................................................................65
N
Network Card Specifications.................................225
Network ID for Owner ............................................86
No Security
Summit..............................................................174
O
Off Mode .................................................................46
ON Mode characteristics .........................................45
Operating Temperature..........................................224
Hazardous Location ..............................................7
US AC to DC ....................................................224
Optional Software
JAVA ..................................................................63
RFTerm...............................................................63
WaveLink Avalanche Enabler ............................63
Owner
Identification .......................................................86
Notes ...................................................................86
Owner information ..................................................21
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Index
P
Parts is Parts ............................................................11
Password..................................................................87
AppLock ...........................................................203
Passwords
AppLock Save As .............................................212
PC Card ...................................................................37
Storage ................................................................38
PC Card Management software ...............................34
PC Cards
Install and remove...............................................38
PCMCIA..................................................................37
PCMCIA Slots.........................................................37
PEAP MSCHAP Authentication, Summit.............179
PEAP/GTC Authentication Configuration ............278
PEAP/MS-CHAP Authentication Configuration...275
PEAP-MSCHAP for WPA ....................................179
Pen Stylus ..........................................................20, 50
Pen Stylus and data entry.........................................26
Persistent Storage Memory....................................102
Phillips Screwdriver and handstrap .........................19
Physical Specifications ..........................................223
Pin 9 Power..............................................................91
Pin 9 power unavailable ........................................133
Pistol Grip Handle ...................................................17
Pocket PC 2002 API calls......................................103
Port 1 and Port 2 ......................................................35
Port, Infrared............................................................43
Power key ................................................................36
Power key location ..................................................14
Power Off timer default settings..............................22
Power Port 1 while asleep................................93, 136
Power Properties......................................................89
Power Supply
Battery Packs ......................................................34
Power Supply, AC/DC ............................................57
Prefix and Suffix......................................................96
Prefix and Suffix control .......................................147
Pre-loaded Files .......................................................61
Processor speed .......................................................33
Programmable Buttons ............................................44
Programmable keys
Setup ...........................................................94, 137
Prompt
Command............................................................68
Q
Quick Start Instructions .............................................8
R
Rate..........................................................................84
Reboot .....................................................................36
Recalibration............................................................99
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
317
Re-enable Touch and / or Calibration upon Cold
Reset ....................................................................79
Reference Material ................................................291
Regional settings, defaults .......................................90
Registry ...................................................................94
Registry and save settings........................................10
Release/Renew button ...........................................165
Remote desktop connection.....................................68
Remove user installed programs..............................90
Repeat......................................................................84
Replacing PCMCIA cards .......................................38
Reset warm and reset cold .......................................36
Revision Level
Hardware...........................................................270
Summit ..............................................................156
RFTerm ...................................................................63
RFTerm access ........................................................10
RJ45 Ethernet port ...................................................40
Root CA Certificates
Generating.........................................................187
Installing on mobile device ...............................189
RS-232
Data Entry ...........................................................28
RS-232 Pinouts ........................................................42
Rules
Match list ..........................................................146
S
Save settings ............................................................10
Scan
Good and Bad Scan sounds.........................97, 137
Scan button, reprogram............................................44
Scan buttons
and tethered scanners ..........................................41
Scan key function ....................................................47
Scan Keys
Left and Right .....................................................91
SCANBAD.WAV............................................97, 137
ScanCodeLeft and ScanCodeRight..........................94
SCANGOOD.WAV ........................................97, 137
Scanner Advanced ...................................................91
Scanner Code ID notes ..........................................135
Scanner Control Characters Tab............................148
Scanner engine type...............................................224
Scanner LED illuminated ................................41, 133
Scanner LED, functioning .......................................27
Scanner range ..........................................................41
Scanner, factory defaults .......................................133
Scanning and data entry...........................................27
Schemes tab .............................................................89
SCU Help...............................................................156
SE1223, SE1224 or SE2223 ....................................36
Security options, supported ...................................155
Security Panel
AppLock ...........................................................210
Send Key Messages (WEDGE) ...............................41
MX5X Reference Guide
318
Send Key Messages and Wedge ......................93, 136
Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps.85, 252
Set up RFTerm ........................................................10
Setup
AppLock ...........................................................199
Setup new device
AppLock ...........................................................200
Setup Software.........................................................61
Shift key function ....................................................48
Show Clock .............................................................70
Shutdown time limits...............................................55
Site Survey.............................................................166
Soft Keyboard..........................................................82
Soft keypad, virtual keyboard..................................28
Software and Files ...................................................61
Software Load .........................................................62
Space key function...................................................48
Speaker ....................................................................51
Speaker volume, How to .........................................52
Specifications
Environmental, Hazardous Location.....................7
SSID ......................................................................162
Standard keypad illustrated....................................215
Start Menu ...............................................................66
Shutdown ............................................................64
Start Ping ...............................................................165
Status panel............................................................128
Status Panel
AppLock ...........................................................211
Stop the Enabler Service........................................114
Storage Manager
devices ................................................................98
Storage Temperature..............................................224
US AC to DC ....................................................224
Store data .................................................................26
Stored certificates ....................................................75
Storing PC Cards .....................................................38
Strip Leading and Strip Trailing ..............................95
Strip leading and trailing controls..........................144
Stylus .......................................................................50
Stylus and data entry................................................26
Stylus properties ......................................................99
Stylus sensitivity......................................................99
Stylus, How to .........................................................20
Suffix and Prefix......................................................96
Summit
EAP-FAST Authentication ...............................177
LEAP without WPA Authentication .................176
No Security .......................................................174
PEAP GTC Authentication .......................183, 185
PEAP MSCHAP Authentication.......................179
WEP keys..........................................................175
WPA LEAP Authentication ..............................181
WPA PSK Authentication.................................182
Summit Client configuration .................................156
Summit client utility ..............................................156
Summit client utility (SCU)
MX5X Reference Guide
Index
Config tab..........................................................160
Diags tab ...........................................................165
Status tab...........................................................164
Summit Network Card Specifications ...................225
Summit tray icon ...................................................157
Suspend button ........................................................64
Suspend mode..........................................................46
Suspend mode and ActiveSync ...............................36
Suspend Mode key...................................................14
Switch active scanner Com port ..............................41
Switching COM ports..............................................40
Symbol Network Card specifications ....................225
Symbology settings........................................140, 142
Synchronizing from the MX5X ...............................67
System Configuration ..............................................61
CE NET 42........................................................227
System Hardware Configuration .............................33
System Requirements, WPA .................................270
T
TCP/IPv6 information ...........................................288
Technical Specifications........................................223
Terminal Emulator, connect ....................................10
Tethered scanner
Data entry......................................................27, 42
Tethered Scanner
Setup using a Cradle ...........................................59
Tile...........................................................................78
Time Zone ...............................................................76
Toggle Backlight .....................................................22
Touch panel disabled ...............................................79
Touch Screen .....................................................20, 50
Keypad Shortcuts ................................................20
Touch screen adjustment .........................................20
Touch Screen and data entry....................................26
Touchscreen, stylus tap............................................20
Transcriber...............................................................69
Transflective Display...............................................34
Translate All ..........................................................148
Translate control codes......................................93, 95
Translate Control Codes ..........................................95
Troubleshooting
AppLock ...........................................................213
Troubleshooting
ActiveSync........................................................109
AppLock Password ...........................................203
Avalanche .........................................................128
Getting Started ......................................................9
Type of installed scan engine ..................................41
U
upgrade radio drivers .............................................155
USB port..................................................................40
USB port pinout.......................................................43
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Index
Use Avalanche network profile .............................126
User Certificate on the MX5..................................196
User Certificates
Generating.........................................................191
V
Vehicle cradle..........................................................58
Video Subsystem
Display Characteristics .......................................34
View
Display ................................................................50
Virtual Key, change.................................................94
Virtual keyboard ......................................................49
Virtual Keyboard .....................................................82
Virtual Keys
modify...............................................................138
VK_Code List........................................................306
Volume
adjust audio volume ......................................51, 52
adjustments .........................................................23
319
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler
installation.........................................................113
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration .........113
Wedge..............................................................93, 136
WEDGE.CAB .......................................................102
WEP Keys
Summit..............................................................175
When to use this guide...............................................2
Where is the --- ........................................................11
Windows Explorer...................................................69
Windows version ...................................................100
Wireless network configuration.....................155, 272
Wireless Security
Summit Client ...................................................170
Wireless Zero Config Utility
Summit Client ...................................................157
WPA
Supported Authentications ................................270
System Requirements........................................270
WPA LEAP Authentication, Summit ....................181
WPA PSK Authentication, Summit.......................182
WPA PSK Configuration.......................................287
WZC icon ..............................................................157
W
Wake the device from Suspend ...............................64
Warm Reset .............................................................36
Warning
Low Battery beeps ..............................................55
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Z
Zero Config Utility, Microsoft ..............................272
MX5X Reference Guide
320
MX5X Reference Guide
Index
E-EQ-MX5CERG-F-ARC
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement